Mimaki JV5 Maintenance Manual-V2.00

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

TKB Gotenyama Building, 5-9-41, Kitashinagawa, Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo 141-0001, Japan

Phone : +81-3-5420-8671 Fax : +81-3-5420-8687

URL : http://www.mimaki.co.jp/

Revision 2.00

D500306

Color Inkjet Printer JV5-130S/160S

This manual covers the instructions and useful information to be given to the service personnel on

maintenance of the color inkjet printer JV5-130S/160S. Perform maintenance work according to the

instructions given in this manual and the related documents listed below.

Constitution

This manual consists of the following chapters:

CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance

Describes the specifications and other information of the printer, including precautions

to be taken in maintenance work.

CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions

Explaines the operation of each unit, and describes the functions and setting items of the

printer.

CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment

Describes procedures for removal and reinstallation of major parts.

Adjusting or testing methods, or mechanical adjusting methods using jigs and tools are

also described.

CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting

Describes how to determine the cause of trouble and how to repair the printer.

CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts

Describes information about PCBs and electrical parts.

Related Documents

The following documents relate to JV5-130S/160S. Refer to them whenever necessary.

• OPERATION MANUAL (Packed with main unit)

• MECHANICAL DRAWING

• SETUP GUIDE (for Service Engineers)

About this Maintenance Manual

ii

Symbols

The following symbols are used in this manual. Understand the symbols, and be sure to observe the

instructions.

Safety Symbols

In text Name of symbol Meaning

“WARNING” markFailure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in death or serious injuries to personnel.

“CAUTION” markFailure to observe the instructions given with this symbol can result in injuries to personnel or damage to property.

“IMPORTANT” mark

Important notes on maintenance work are given with this symbol. Understand the instructions thoroughly, and perform maintenance work properly.

“Tips” mark Useful information for maintenance work is given with this symbol.

(P.1-10) Reference pageRelated description is given on the page shown by this symbol. Be sure to refer to the specified page.

iii


Caution Label

A caution label is stuck on the printer as shown below. Check the label before work. If it is illegible due

to stains or coming off, replace it with a new one after getting user's consent.

Locations of labels

(Reorder: M903239)

(Reorder: M903405)

(Reorder: M903330)

(Reorder: M901549)

~ Front ~

(Reorder: M903239)

(Reorder: M903968)

(Reorder: M904130)

~ Rear ~

iv

Contents

Outline of Maintenance

1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ....................................................................... 1-2

1-1-1. Notes on repair ................................................................................. 1-2

1-1-2. Preliminary checks ........................................................................... 1-3

1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ........................................................ 1-4

1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly ............................. 1-4

1-2-2. Adjustment tools .............................................................................. 1-4

1-3. Specifications of the main unit ................................................................... 1-5

Operation Principle and Functions

2-1. Operation Principle ..................................................................................... 2-2

2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on ...................................................................... 2-2

2-1-2. Origin Point Detection ..................................................................... 2-3

2-1-3. Set Up ............................................................................................... 2-3

2-1-4. Media Detection ............................................................................... 2-4

2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function ................................................. 2-5

2-1-6. Ink System ....................................................................................... 2-9

2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .................................. 2-20

2-2. Functions .................................................................................................... 2-26

2-2-1. ADJUST Function ......................................................................... 2-26

2-2-2. TEST Function ............................................................................... 2-33

2-2-3. Special Key Function ..................................................................... 2-48

2-2-4. PARAMETER Function ................................................................ 2-49

2-3. Operation Flow .......................................................................................... 2-50

2-3-1. Outline ............................................................................................ 2-50

2-3-2. SETUP ........................................................................................... 2-51

2-3-3. MACHINE SET ............................................................................. 2-52

2-3-4. NCU ............................................................................................... 2-54

2-3-5. ADJUST ......................................................................................... 2-57

2-3-6. TEST .............................................................................................. 2-61

2-3-7. PARAMETER ................................................................................ 2-68

Overhaul / Adjustment

3-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 3-2

3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ................................... 3-2

3-1-2. Tools and jigs ................................................................................... 3-3

3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ......................................... 3-4

3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts .................................................................... 3-6

3-2-1. Head Unit ......................................................................................... 3-7

3-2-2. S Pump Assembly .......................................................................... 3-33

3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly .................................................................. 3-35

v


3-2-4. Cap Head assy. ................................................................................ 3-37

3-2-5. Cap Base 1H ................................................................................... 3-38

3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly ............................................... 3-42

3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly ..................................... 3-51

3-2-8. Damper Assembly .......................................................................... 3-57

3-2-9. Sucker BOX .................................................................................... 3-61

3-2-10. NCU ................................................................................................ 3-63

3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ....................................................................................... 3-69

3-3-1. Main PCB ....................................................................................... 3-70

3-3-2. HDC PCB ....................................................................................... 3-77

3-3-3. IO PCB ........................................................................................... 3-78

3-3-4. USB PCB ........................................................................................ 3-79

3-3-5. Head Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-81

3-3-6. Slider PCB ...................................................................................... 3-82

3-3-7. Power PCB ..................................................................................... 3-85

3-3-8. Heater PCB ..................................................................................... 3-88

3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB ............................................................................. 3-90

3-3-10. Keyboard PCB ................................................................................ 3-92

3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 3-96

3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................. 3-98

3-3-13. Side Relay PCB .............................................................................. 3-99

3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) .................................. 3-101

3-3-15. LED PCB ...................................................................................... 3-103

3-3-16. Take-up PCB ................................................................................. 3-105

3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB ................................................................... 3-106

3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ................................................................................. 3-109

3-4-1. Origin Sensor ................................................................................ 3-110

3-4-2. Wiper Sensor ................................................................................ 3-112

3-4-3. Clamp Sensor ................................................................................ 3-113

3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor ..................................................................... 3-115

3-4-5. Cap Sensor .................................................................................... 3-117

3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor ...................................................................... 3-119

3-4-7. Jam Sensor .................................................................................... 3-121

3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder .............................................................. 3-125

3-4-9. Y Encoder ..................................................................................... 3-129

3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder ............................................................... 3-132

3-4-11. Paper Sensor ................................................................................. 3-136

3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................................................. 3-139

3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L ................................................................... 3-147

3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R ................................................................... 3-149

3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L ....................................................... 3-151

3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R ....................................................... 3-152

3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor ...................................................................... 3-153

3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor ........................................................................ 3-158

3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ....................................................................... 3-161

3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-162

3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt ............................................................................ 3-165

3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly ................................................................ 3-167

3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt ................ 3-171

3-5-5. Y Drive Belt .................................................................................. 3-175

3-5-6. Wiper Motor ................................................................................. 3-179

3-5-7. Station Motor ................................................................................ 3-182

vi

3-5-8. Head UD Motor ........................................................................... 3-184

3-5-9. M Motor ....................................................................................... 3-186

3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts ......................................................................... 3-188

3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy. .......................................................................... 3-189

3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy. .................................................................. 3-193

3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... 3-198

3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy. ................................................................... 3-204

3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid ................................................................... 3-206

3-6-6. SSR .............................................................................................. 3-209

Troubleshooting

4-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble ............................ 4-2

4-1-2. Checking procedure ......................................................................... 4-2

4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed ..................................... 4-4

4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ......................................... 4-4

4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures .................................. 4-15

Explanation of Electrical Parts

5-1. Outline .......................................................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1. Operation Explanation ..................................................................... 5-3

5-1-2. Power Supply ................................................................................... 5-4

5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ....................................................................... 5-5

5-2-1. Main PCB ......................................................................................... 5-5

5-2-2. USB Board ....................................................................................... 5-6

5-2-3. I/F Connection Board ....................................................................... 5-6

5-2-4. HDC PCB ......................................................................................... 5-7

5-2-5. IO PCB ............................................................................................. 5-7

5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB .................................................................................... 5-8

5-2-7. Slider PCB ....................................................................................... 5-9

5-2-8. Heater PCB .................................................................................... 5-10

5-2-9. Keyboard PCB ............................................................................... 5-10

5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB ......................................................................... 5-11

5-2-11. Encoder PCB ................................................................................... 5-11

5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB ................................................................ 5-11

5-2-13. Take-up PCB ................................................................................... 5-11

5-2-14. Box Relay PCB .............................................................................. 5-12

5-2-15. Side relay PCB ............................................................................... 5-12

5-2-16. Head relay PCB ............................................................................. 5-13

5-2-17. Head memory PCB ........................................................................ 5-13

5-2-18. LED PCB ....................................................................................... 5-13

5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB ..................................................................... 5-13

5-2-20. Memory PCB ................................................................................. 5-13

5-3. Electronic block diagram .......................................................................... 5-14

vii


viii

CHAPTER 1 Outline of Maintenance

1-1

Contents

1-1. Precautions in Maintenance ...................................... 1-2

1-1-1. Notes on repair ....................................................... 1-2

1-1-2. Preliminary checks ................................................ 1-3

1-2. Tools required for maintenance work ....................... 1-4

1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly . 1-4

1-2-2. Adjustment tools .................................................... 1-4

1-3. Specifications of the main unit .................................. 1-5


1-1. Precautions in Maintenance

1-1-1. Notes on repair

Observe the following precautions in maintenance work.

Be sure to fully understand precautions given in “For safe operation” in the operation manual for the

JV5 series.

Some error conditions observed may be due to misoperation. First judge whether or not the error

condition is caused by misoperation.

Provide adequate space for the maintenance work.

When performing tests with the electrical circuit box open, be careful not to receive an electric shock

from any live part and not to drop screws or any other parts into the circuit box.

Take care to avoid insufficient insertion or skewed insertion of any connector or FPC.

In the case where it is necessary to conduct maintenance works with the power on, carefully observe

the movement of the head. (Keep any part of your body away from the moving parts.)

Shift the media (in the X-direction) and the head (in the Y-direction) using the jog keys. If it is

necessary to shift the paper and the head by hand with the power turned off, exercise care to shift them

slowly.

Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink.

In principle, the following procedures should be taken in prior to the transportation and the

transportation should be conducted using exclusive packaging members.

Do not tilt the printer with the ink cartridges filled with ink. Doing so can give rise to leakage of ink.

Discharge ink from the tube in accordance with the description given under “Discharge cleaning” in

the maintenance.

1. Detach the waste ink tank.

2. Execute “BeforeMovingIt.” of the machine.

3. Fix the head with the head stopper. (As for the detail, see Setup Guide)

�Be sure to turn the power off and unplug the power cable from the main body inlet before

starting work.

�To prevent the ink from getting into your eyes, be sure to wear safety goggles and gloves when

cleaning the print head or replacing the S pump L assembly or if the ink is anticipated to

scatter. If the ink sticks to your hand, the skin may be get rough and dry.

�Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture.

Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

�Take sufficient care so that leaked ink does not adhere to other parts. Ink droplets attached to

FPCs or connectors may cause shortcircuit or a bad electric contact at inserting/removing a

damper, thereby the ink discharge trouble or breakage of head/PCB may occur.

�Properly and carefully connect the FPC cable of the slider PCB from the HDC PCB according

to the connector number. Failure to do so may cause a breakage of the PCB because of short-

circuit of the power supply.

Pay sufficient attention on arrangement of 2 FPC cables connecting the head relay PCB to the

head. Wrong arrangement of the FPC cables causes short-circuit of the power supply.Do not

turn off the power during firmware upgrading. Doing so may disable restarting.

1-2

Precautions in Maintenance

If the main unit is removed from the legs and placed directly on the floor, be careful of the following

points.

• Unplug the take-up unit power cord.

• Remove the ink waste tank and the fitting bracket.

(Plug the tube up with a cloth to prevent ink from spilling over.)

1-1-2. Preliminary checks

Before starting work, make sure that the following conditions are all met.

The following conditions for the power supply system are all met:

• The power supply voltage must be within the specification limits.

• The printer must be grounded properly.

• The power cable must be free from damage, broken wire, etc. Many cables must not be

connected to one outlet.

Make sure that the printer is not located under any of the following conditions:

• In a place where the printer is exposed to direct sunlight.

• On an inclined surface.

• In an environment of too high or low temperature, or too high or low humidity, or in a place

where temperature or humidity varies significantly.

• In a place where vibration occurs.

• In a place where the printer is exposed to direct air flow from an air conditioner or the like.

• Around a place where flame is used.

• In a dusty atmosphere.

• Around a place where strong electromagnetic waves are generated.

The media (sheets) to be used must conform to the specifications.

1-3


1-2. Tools required for maintenance work

The tables below show the tools and measuring instruments required for maintenance work.

1-2-1. Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

1-2-2. Adjustment tools

Name Remarks

Phillips screwdriver Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

For M2

For M3 to5 (L=260 or more)

for M3 to 5

Slotted screwdriver Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings

Spanner (Box wrench) Width across flats: 5 mm

Width across flats: 5.5 mm

Width across flats: 7 mm

Hexagon wrench 1.5mm for M3 SSWP

2.0mm for M4 SSWP

2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170)

5.0mm for M6 cap bolts


Spanner Width across flats: 5.0mm

Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud

Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts

Tweezers To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.

Long-nose pliers

Nippers

Soldering iron, Solder

Scale 150, 500mm

Loupe About 50x to 60x magnification

Protection glasses

Gloves To keep hands clean, and for safety.

Adhesive agent LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws)

Insulation lock L=150 or less (UL-approved product)

Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape As required (UL-approved product)

Name Code Remarks

Trimmer adjustment screwdriver For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB.

Tester

Bar type tension gauge 500 g

Ink line airtight tester OPT-J0094

1.3mm Head gap check tool OPT-J0096


All Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0098

A Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0099

Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool

OPT-J0108

1-4

Specifications of the main unit

1-3. Specifications of the main unit

� Basic Specifications of the Unit

ItemSpecifications

NoticeJV5-130S JV5-160S

Head On demand piezoelectric head (IH47V*4 head stagger array) Solvant capable head

Printing resolution 540ÅA720ÅA1440 dpi Variable dot capable

Print mode(Scan x Feed)

720 x 540dpi VD:540 or 720 x 720dpi VD :

540 x 900dpi VD :540 or 720 x 1080dpi VD :

720 x 1440dpi VD :1440 x 1440dpi :

1440 x 1440VDPrinting with decreasing the number of head because of memory constraint

Ink 6 color loading K • M • C • Y • Lc • Lm Total 16 IC chip mounted cartridgs(Special solvant ink)4color loading K • M • C • Y

Ink supply Supplying by 2 cartridges with toggle switching (replacement of cartrdges at printing is allowed))

Ink end is detected with the cartridge end board detection method.

Ink capacity At 6 color load-ing

2 crtaridges of 440cc for each color. 880cc/1color At 6-color, 1760cc for only CM

At 4 color load-ing

4 cartridges of 440cc for each color. 1760CC/1 color

Avairable media FFÅATarpaulin, Polyvinyl chloride film(However, tdrying of he media must be allowed in the specified print mode.)

Print quality confirmation media is MIMAKI genuin.

Maximum drawing range

At standard scan1365 mm 1620 mm

When left and right drawing margin is set to the minimum, VD data is allowed. At 1440*1440VD, printing is conducted with 3 heads.

Media specifica-tion

Maximum width 1375 mm 1630 mm

Minimum width 297 mm

Thickness Less than 1.0 mm

Roll O.D. Less than ø200 mm

Roll weight Less than 38 kg(In the range that feeding error caused by bending with its own weight when both ends of the roll are held does not occur.)

Tube I.D. 2 inches, 3 inches

Deawing face Outside (over wrap)

End of winding Taping or week pasting to the paper tube

Maximum winding O.D.

ø250 mm or less

Print margin Roll Left and Right: 15 mm (default value)Top : 150 mmBottom: 0 mm

Margin of left and right whose toler-ance excluding meandering of media is ± 2mm can be changed.Minimun 5mmLeaf Left and Right : 15 mm (default value)

Top : 150 mmBottom : 200 mm

Distance accu-racy

Precision ± 0.3 mm or ± 0.3% of specified distance, whichever larger Expansion and contraction of test media, photo paper or gloss paper is excluded. Meandering just after the setting is excluded.

Repeatability ± 0.2 mm or ± 0.1% of specified distance, whichever larger

Perpendicularity ± 0.5 mm/1000mm

Media skew 5 mm or less /10m

Print gap 1.5 mm~7 mm non-step user setting(Automatic recognition of media thickness)

Any gap position settings are allowed.

Media heater PRE/PRINT/AFTER (3-system independent control)

1-5


Media cutting Cutting in the Y direction with a tool on the head

Cutting accuracy (step height) less than 1.0mm

Cutting tool is a consumable

Waste ink tank FULL detection with a bottle type (4000cc) sensor

Interface Standard equip-

ment

USB2.0 *Cables are maintenance supplies.

Command MRL-III

Noise At standby Less than 58dB (FAST-A, back and forth and around 1m)

Continuous Less than 65dB

Temporal Less than 70dB

Nozzle check unit Laser type (under class 1) Installed in the machine

(Class 2 as a unit)

Compatible specification VCCI Class A

FCC Class A

UL 60950

CE Marking (EMC Directive, Low Voltage Directive)

CB Report

RoHS Compliant

Power source specifications Single-phase AC200V ~ 240V ± 10%

Lower than 15A 50/60Hz ± 1Hz

With the sleep function

Power consumption Lower than 3600VA Main body including heater

Excluding optional devices

Environment Operating tem-

perature limit

20 °C~35 °C Ink discharge stability declines in an

environment out of the range listed in

the left.Relative humid-

ity

35~65%Rh (non condensing)

Accuracy assur-

ance tempera-

ture

20 °C~25 °C

Temperature

gradient

Less than ± 10 °C/h

Dust Equivalent to office environment

Weight Main body Less than 292 kg (324kg) Less than 298 kg (333kg) Excluding exhaust fan (including

exhaust fan)

Outside dimen-

sion

(W) Less than 2860mm Less than 3120mm Including exhaust dryer fan

(D) Less than 850mm(1050mm) Less than 850mm(1050mm)

(H) Less than 1540mm Less than 1540mm

ItemSpecifications

NoticeJV5-130S JV5-160S

1-6

CHAPTER 2 Operation Principle and Functions

2-1

Contents

2-1. Operation Principle .................................................... 2-2

2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on .............................................. 2-2

2-1-2. Origin Point Detection ............................................. 2-3

2-1-3. Set Up ...................................................................... 2-3

2-1-4. Media Detection ....................................................... 2-4

2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function ......................... 2-5

2-1-6. Ink System ............................................................... 2-9

2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function .......... 2-20

2-2. Functions ................................................................... 2-26

2-2-1. ADJUST Function ................................................. 2-26

2-2-2. TEST Function ....................................................... 2-33

2-2-3. Special Key Function ............................................. 2-48

2-2-4. PARAMETER Function ........................................ 2-49

2-3. Operation Flow ......................................................... 2-50

2-3-1. Outline ................................................................... 2-50

2-3-2. SETUP ................................................................... 2-51

2-3-3. MACHINE SET ..................................................... 2-52

2-3-4. NCU ....................................................................... 2-54

2-3-5. ADJUST ................................................................ 2-57

2-3-6. TEST ...................................................................... 2-61

2-3-7. PARAMETER ........................................................ 2-68


2-1. Operation Principle

2-1-1. Sequence at Power-on

The following is the sequence after power-on.

No. Item Process content

1 Initial setting of CPU and H/W

2 BOOT display

3 S-RAM check R/W check of S-RAM

When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying

ERROR02 (MAIN RAM)

4 F-ROM check Hashing check of F-ROM

<At occurrence of hashing error>

Occurrence in boot system area:

The system is brought down with displaying ERROR01 (MAIN ROM).

Occurrence in main system area:

F/W update mode ( See Special Key Function (p.2-48)) starts.

5 Voltage check Voltage check

When an error is detected, the system is brought down with displaying

ERROR03.

6 FPGA configuration Configuration of PDC and HDC.

7 Device configuration decision Checking of a head and memory

8 Version information display Machine type name and main body F/W version are displayed.

At a maintenance open, revision and PDC/HDC version are also displayed.

Key input during the version information displaying starts special mode ( See

Special Key Function (p.2-48)).

9 Parameter check Parameter initialization at the first starting after F/W version-up.

(The flowing parameters are initialized.)

MAINTE.

INKSYSTEM

INKinfor.

INKSEQUENCE

INKTYPE

SERVO

TEST

NCU

Checksum of parameter area is executed, and in case of SUM value error, the

system is brought down with displaying ERROR04 (Flash ROM).

10 Initial operation

11 I/F Board Detection Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option).

2-2

Operation Principle

2-1-2. Origin Point Detection

Detection of each original point of the device

*1 The position encoder is tested with up/down operation of the head.

If the head height original point detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR53)

*2 Retry operation is not conducted even at the Maintenance Open.

2-1-3. Set Up

Machine Configuration

The following required resources are checked.

Note: Normal start is executed when all results of check 1~3 above mentioned are normal, and ERROR202 (Device configura-

tion) is displayed when an error is detected.

Inputting [ENTER] during ERROR202 displaying causes execution of the following processes.

<Operation sequence at original point detection>

No. Item Content Notice

1 Station original point 1.Station down (cap motor drive)

2.Station original point detection

(detection by the lowest point sensor)

If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR47).

If an error occurs in each

original point detection at

maintenance open, input-

ting of [ENTER] causes

retry operation. Also,

FUNCTION features can

be operated.

([FUNCTION] effective)

2 Wiper original point Wiper original point detection (wiper motor drive)

If the detection fails, the system is brought to down (ERROR46)

3 Y-original point *2 Y-original point detection (Y-motor drive)

If the detection fails, the system is brought to down. (ERROR51)

4 Head height original

point *1, *2

1.Moving the carriage to the head up/down position.

2.Head upping (head up/down motor drive)

3.Detection of head top point (detection by the head height sensor)

4.Moving to the set height.

5 Cap 1.Returning the carriage to the Y-original point.

2.Upping the station (cap motor drive)

If the station original point detection fails, the system is brought to

down.(ERROR45)

<Model determination>

No. Item Content

1 HDC connection

determination

A normal HDC substrate is determined based on configuration results of HDC 1 ~ 4.

When configuration of HDC 1 is not completed, a HDC error (ERROR09) is displayed and the

system is brought to down.

2 Head connection

determination

An effective head connection is determined.

3 Head memory check Contents of the head unit memory are checked.

4 SDRAM check If size of SDRAM is 0, ERROR203 (SD-RAM size) is displayed and the system is brought to

down.

If required SDRAM for the device is not installed, ERROR203 is displayed again at LOCAL →

REMOTE transition after starting or at starting drawing.

Diagnosis results Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is displayed.

Restricted use Head (HDC) determined to have an error in 1 ~ 3 is separated and setting of device start is conducted only with effective heads.

Control/Not control is selected on a head determined to have an error.

A head selected as “Not control” is displayed with “X” in function → MAINTENANCE → HEAD SELECT, and it is not controlled actually.

Setting of restricted use is not stored and the machine configuration determination is always executed at starting.

<Required RAM size>

1GB (2 SDRAM boards in the expansion slot)

2-3


I/F Board Detection

Detection of existence of I/F board and its type (USB2.0 / IEEE-1394: option).

A type of connected I/F board can be known with the guidance function.

When I/F board is not connected, No I/F Board Error (ERROR21) is displayed. The error is displayed

again at LOCAL → REMOTE transition, and transition to the REMOTE is not executed.

2-1-4. Media Detection

Media width and media thickness are detected.

<Media detection operation sequence>


1 Media right end

detection

After moving the carriage to the media detection position, media right

end is detected. (media sensor)

Up the lever to stop the

detection.

2 Media thickness

detection

1. Measuring distance of media non-existing part

(cutter encoder detection)

2. Measuring distance of media existing part

(cutter encoder detection)

3. Media thickness calculation

(media existing part - media non-existing part = media thickness)

4. Moving the carriage to the head up/down position

5. The head height is re-calculated based on the media thickness and

adjusted to the selected gap of USER TYPE automatically.

* Media thickness 0.0mm:ERROR50

Media thickness detection failure:Input media thickness.(ERROR is displayed after cap ON)

Set value: 0.1~1.0mm(unit: 0.1 mm Default 0.1 mm)(Input value is cleared by lever UP)

After inputting the media thickness, though the sequence starts from 1, the media thickness detection is skipped.

* At cutter control error, the system is brought to down.

(ERROR49) or (ERROR59)


detection.

3 Media left end detection 1. After moving the carriage, media left end is detected.

(media sensor)

2. After measuring the distance between the left end and the right

end, media width is calculated (linear encoder)

* During carriage moving of the media width detection, the

linear encoder is tested.

If an error is detected, drawing is disabled. (ERROR8)

[ERROR8 detailed information]DIRECTION: ± of counter of the linear encoder is wrongCOUNT: Count number of the linear encoder is errorSENSOR: Count failure

* When the media width can not be detected, ERROR50.

(Up the lever to release)

Returning the carriage to the Y-original point and cap ON.

* Distance accuracy adjusting is automatically executed in the media

detection.


detection.

4 Media length inputting When “MEDIA RESIDUAL” of the MAINTENANCE function is set

to ON and media return end detection failed, input media length.

Set value: 1 ~ 500m (unit:1m)

2-4

Operation Principle

2-1-5. Sequence of Maintenance Function

� CARRIDGE OUT

Note : In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds.

(Only at maintenance closing)

�WIPER EXCHANGE

Note : After finishing, wiping execution number of times of running parameter is cleared.

In order to avoid dehydration of nozzle surface and inside of the cap, a warning beep is made every 30 seconds.


� NOZZLE WASH



<CARRIDGE OUT operation sequence>


1 Start 1. Cap OFF

2. After moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper-ON

and servo motor-OFF.

2 Maintenance No action during the maintenance.(Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.)

3 End Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation (origin point detection)

<WIPER EXCHANGE operation sequence>


1 Start 1. Cap OFF



2 Maintenance 2 No action during the maintenance.

(Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of maintenance end.)

3 End Wiper-OFF and after moving the carriage, initial operation(origin point detection)

<NOZZLE WASH operation sequence>

No. Item Operation content Notice

1 Start 1. Cap OFF



3. Pump tube is locked.

2 Maintenance

(Wiper)

No action during the wiper cleaning.

(Waiting for inputting [ENTER] of wiper cleaning end.)

3 Maintenance

(Nozzle wash)

1. Wiper OFF

2. The pump tube is locked and a message of “Fill the liquid.” is

displayed. (Waiting for inputting of [ENTER]).

3. Input “being left time”. (Waiting for inputting [ENTER])

Set value: 1 ~ 99 min (time unit: 1 min)

4. After moving the carriage and initial operation (original point

detection), no action for designated time.

4 Maintenance (End) 1. Execution of cleaning.

2. End

2-5


� DISWAY WASH

Cleaning of ink discharge path. Operation sequence is as the following.



� CUSTODY WASH

“NOZZLE WASH” and “DISWAY WASH” above mentioned are executed in series.

� PUMP TUBE WASH

Cleaning of ink suction pump. Cleaning ink cap, ink discharge path and inside of tube of ink suction

pump with driving the cleaning fluid suction pump.

When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank or waste ink tank, the

cleaning is not executed.

�WIPER WASH

Cleaning of the wiper.

When cleaning fluid is not filled, or warning arises in cleaning fluid tank, the cleaning is not executed.



<DISWAY WASH cleaning operation sequence>


1 Start 1. Cap OFF

2. Moving the carriage to the maintenance position, wiper ON, servo

motor OFF.

2 Maintenance

(Nozzle wash)

The following operations are repeated until [ENTER] is input.

1. Pump tube lock

2. 10 seconds No action

3. 5 seconds dry suction

3 End 1. 30 seconds dry suction

2. Execution of initial operation (original position detection)

<PUMP TUBE WASH operation sequence>


1 Start Cap OFF.

2 Cleaning Drive cleaning fluid suction pump and ink suction pump for 10 seconds

3 End Cap ON to end.

<WIPER WASH operation sequence>


1 Start Placing the wiper in a wiper box (wiper sensor monitoring)

2 Wiper cleaning Open the wiper cleaning valve to drop cleaning fluid on the wiper.(valve open time is not decided)

3 Maintenance 1. Cap OFF.



3. No operation at wiper cleaning.


4 End After wiper OFF and carriage moving, initial operation (original position detection).

2-6

Operation Principle

CR.MAINTENANCE

Execution of carriage maintenance (cleaning in the vicinity of head)



HD.MAINTENANCE

The following maintenance items of head are executed.

� FILL UP INK

Select a head to fill ink

<CR.MAINTENANCE operation sequence>


1 Start 1. Cap OFF

2. Move he carriage to the maintenance position in the left end, servo

motor OFF.

2 Maintenance No action during the maintenance.


3 End Move the carriage, and execute initial operation

(original position detection)

<FILL UP INK operation sequence>


1 Start Select a head to be filled

Set value: 1234, 12––, ––34

Filling is not executed when a warning arises in waste ink tank.

2 Filling Open cartridge valve and drive ink suction motor.

The operation is stopped when a warning is detected in ink cartridge during the filling.

Use a cartridge having

smaller residual ink

quantity.

3 End Stop the pump motor.

2-7


� DISCHARGE&WASH

Ink in head, damper and tube is discharged to execute cleaning.

*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.

�Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge

Dedicated cleaning fluid for WIPER WASH and PUMP TUBE WASH is filled.

Note: At discharging

1. Remove a cartridge

2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid discharge suction pump to discharge.

At filling

1. Set a cartridge

2. Drive the ink/cleaning fluid suction pump to fill.

<DISCHARGE&WASH operation sequence>


1 Preparation Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned.

2 Ink discharging 1. Taking out cartridges (all slots) (Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2. Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving)

If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not

executed. (waste ink tank sensor monitoring)

Cartridge valve is closed.

3 Cleaning 1. Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots)

(Cartridge sensor monitoring*1)

2. Cleaning inside of tube.

(Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving)


executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring)

3. Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed.

4 Discharging of cleaning

fluid

1. Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots).

(Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2. Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving)


executed. (waste tank sensor monitoring)

Cartridge valve is closed.

5 Repeating 3~4 are executed again.

6 Operation selection [�] WASH : No.3 → 4 are executed again

[�] COMPLETED : (to next No.)

7 Confirmation of

maintenance cleaning

fluid discharge

[�] No : to No.9 (End)

[�] Yes : (to next No.)

8 Maintenance cleaning

fluid discharge

See the next item, “Maintenance cleaning fluid fill/discharge

operation sequence“

9 End (When cleaning is executed, the state is Not-filling at discharging

ink.)

<Cleaning fluid filling operation sequence>


1 Start Cleaning fluid suction (ink suction motor, cleaning fluid suction

motor driving)

If a warning arises in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not executed. (cleaning fluid cartridge sensor monitoring)

If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, filling is not executed.(waste tank sensor monitoring)

2 Filling 1. Pump stop.

2. Cleaning fluid suction pump blocked

3. Cartridge valve open

(until cleaning fluid is filled in the wiper cleaning valve)

2-8

Operation Principle

2-1-6. Ink System

Ink Supply Control

Ink filling method of JV5 is a suction system with roller pump, a pressure damper with a self sealing

valve is used. Ink supply at drawing is a siphon supply. The sealing valve is opened by discharging

pressure reduction to supply ink, and when the damper ink chamber is filled, the sealing valve is

closed. The ink path pressure at carriage moving conveyed to the meniscus of head is eased by the

sealing valve.

Longer consecutive drawing time than conventional products and replacement of cartridges during the

drawing are allowed by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path.

During the ink end cartridge replacement, in order to avoid dehydration of ink supply system, a

WARNING is displayed if a cartridge is not placed for more than 10 minutes.

A supply valve is placed for each cartridge to supply ink at the supply valve OPEN. The supply valve

is usually in CLOSE state, and when ink supply is necessary, the supply valve turns to OPEN state. Ink

supply is conducted at discharging operation (drawing and flashing) and suction operation (cleaning

and filling). The supply valve is not opened for a cartridge having an error not to supply ink.

2 types of LED (Green: control LED / Red: Error LED) are placed for each cartridge to allow a user to

check a state of cartridge in visual.

JV5 switches the supply valve at occurrence of “INK NEAR END” or “INK END” in the cleaning to

use a cartridge having smaller residual quantity. As for details, see “ Ink wear-up cleaning” (P.2-17 ).

Device configuration

The device configuration of ink supply path is shown below.

Fig.2-1 Ink Supply Path Diagrammic Illustration

2-9


Flow of the ink supply control

The ink supply control flow can be divided as the followings.

� Error check of a cartridge

The error check of a cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms) to select a supply cartridge

according to an error state and ink residual quantity.

The supply cartridge notifies being under control with lighting the control LED (Green).

The error cartridge lights/blink the error LED (Red) to urge replacement of cartridges.

A valve of the cartridge indicated by lighting of the control LED is opened with a valve-open

instruction.

When an error occurs in a supply cartridge while the valve is opened (at drawing or at cleaning), if

there is a cartridge which can supply ink, the valve is switched to continue the operation, if a supply

cartridge is removed, drawing is aborted and cleaning is terminated to return to the local state.

� Selection/determination of a supply cartridge

As ink is supplied by toggle switching of 2 cartridges for 1 supply path in JV5, a supply cartridge

should be selected. The followings are selection conditions of a supply cartridge.

a) When there is a cartridge having an error in 1 supply path.

• If another cartridge can supply, the cartridge is selected.

• The selection conditions depend on occurrence of an error, contents of the error and ink supply

timing. The ink supply is executed at discharging operation (drawing, flushing and so on) or at

suction operation (cleaning and filling).

The followings are cartridge selection conditions. As for errors, see “ Ink system error monitoring” (P.2-

15 ).

Note : Supply is effective.

∆: Supply is effective when another cartridge is normal.

×: Supply is not effective

* Ink IC: NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE,

Expiration:2MONTH

1. Error check of the cartridge.

2. Selection/determination of a supply cartridge (depends on a state of the cartridge).

3. Updating of each LED (depends on a state of the supply/error cartridge).

4. Supply valve open/close operation of the cartridge selected in “2” with a valve operation instruction.

<Cartridge selection conditions>

Error contentDischarging

operation

Suction

operation

Normal cartridge

Cartridge near end ∆

Cartridge ink end× ∆

Residual quantity 0 cartridge× ×

No cartridge× ×

InK IC *× ×

2-10

Operation Principle

b) When there are plural of effective cartridges in 1 supply path.

Occurrence timing of supply cartridge switching

At power-on

When an error occurs in the currently selected cartridge.

When a cartridge superior to the currently selected cartridge is inserted.

(Switching is not executed at drawing or cleaning. It is executed when returned to the local state.)

Based on a) and b), effectiveness of ink supply in variety of cartridge states is shown in the table

below.

Note : Discharge is allowed and suction is allowed.

∆: Discharge is allowed and suction is not allowed (Near end error).

×: Discharge is not allowed and suction is not allowed (Ink end error). As for details, see “ Ink system error monitoring” (P.2-15 ).

The table below shows the switching timing of supply cartridges.

Note : Switch

∆: Switch according to the condition of priority.

–: Not switched

During the cleaning an operation may not follow the conditions above. As for details, see “ Ink wear-up cleaning” (P.2-17 ).

Priority Content

1 A cartridge having smaller ink residual quantity.

2 When “1” is the same, a cartridge having closer expiration date.

3 When both “1” and “2” are the same, a cartridge having smaller slot number.

<Ink supply effectiveness>

Cartridge 2

Cartridge 1

Normal

cartridge

Cartridge

near end

Cartridge ink

end

Residual

quantity 0

cartridge

No cartridge Ink IC

Normal cartridge

Cartridge near end ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆ ∆

Cartridge ink end ∆ × × × ×

Residual quantity 0 cartridge ∆ × × × ×

No cartridge ∆ × × × ×

Ink IC ∆ × × × ×

<Conditions for supply cartridge switching timing> Active side: Cartridge which is selected now

Non-active

Active

Normal

cartridge

Cartridge

near end

Cartridge ink

end

Residual

quantity 0

cartridge

No cartridge Ink IC

Normal cartridge ∆ – – – –

Cartridge near end – ∆ – – – –

Cartridge ink end – – – –

Residual quantity 0 cartridge – – – –

No cartridge – – – –

Ink IC – – – –

2-11


� Cartridge LED

Lighting/blinking of 2 types of LED informs cartridge states to show the timing of replacement.

When the Control LED (Green) lights : At supplying

When the Error LED (Red) lights/blinks : Occurrence of an error

Lighting/blinking conditions for each LED are shown in the table below.


Expiration:2MONTH

Examples of cartridge switching and LED operation patterns are shown in the table below.

<Conditions for lighting/blinking of LED>

LED State

Control LED

(Green)

Not

light

Supply cartridge is not selected

Blinking –

Light At selecting a supply cartridge

At ink wear-up cleaning (See “ Ink wear-up cleaning” (P.2-17 ))

Error LED (Red) Not

light

At normal state

Blinking Occurrence of an error (Blinks at occurrence of the following errors).

Cartridge near end

Cartridge ink end

1 months passed after ink expiration date

Light Occurrence of an error (Lights at occurrence of the following errors)

Residual quantity 0 cartridge

No cartridge

Ink IC*

<LED operation pattern>

Event Valve operation

Cartridge 1 Cartridge 2

Control

LEDError LED

Control

LEDError LED

Online drawing start

No problem on both cartridgeCartridge 1 valve open Light – – –

Cartridge 1

Cartridge near end occursNot changed Light Blink – –

Cartridge 1

Cartridge ink end occursSwitched to cartridge 2 – Blink Light –

Cartridge 2

Cartridge near end occursNot changed – Blink Light Blink

Cartridge 1

Take out to replaceNot changed – Light Light Blink

Cartridge 1

Set a normal cartridgeNot changed – – Light Blink

Cartridge 2

Cartridge ink end occursSwitched to cartridge 1 Light – – Blink

Online drawing end Close all supply valves Light – – Blink

2-12

Operation Principle

�Open/close instruction for supply valve

Generally, a supply valve is in the CLOSE state, and OPEN is instructed when ink supply is necessary.

Timing of open/close instruction is shown in the table below.

Note : Operation instruction

<Supply valve operation instruction timing>

Timing

Supply valve operation

instruction

OPEN CLOSE

Flushing Before execution –

After execution –

Cleaning/filling Before execution –

After execution –

Wash Before execution –

After execution –

Before drawing operation –

Before Capping –

Replacement of supply cartridges during ink supplying

At occurrence of an system error –

At power-off –

2-13


Cartridge Control

2 ink cartridges are used per 1 supply system (1 nozzle row), total 16 cartridges can be loaded.

Supply cartridge is always 1 per 1 supply system, and a cartridge having smaller residual quantity is used

first with toggle switching. LED (Green, Red) of each slot indicates cartridge states shown below.

*1 Ink IC warning: Errors related PIC such as NON-ORIGINAL INK, WRONG INK IC, Kind of INK, Color of

INK, WRONG CARTRIDGE and Expiration:2MONTH.

*2 Residual quantity 0 cartridge: A cartridge having no residual quantity after execution of the ink wear-up cleaning (a

function to conduct cleaning with preferentially using a cartridge having NEAR END or

INK END error).

Switching of supply cartridges occurs under the conditions shown below.

If switching in 1 supply system is impossible, a warning occurs in currently used supply cartridge is

displayed. The followings are relations between warnings and operations.

*1 Transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of drawing.

*2 In case of a month next to the ink expiration month, transition to the LOCAL mode is executed after each completion of

drawing.

<Cartridge states indicated by LED>

Green LED Light Supply cartridge

Red LED Blink INK END, INK NEAR END, Expiration:1MONTH

Light Ink IC warning*1, Residual quantity 0 cartridge*2, No cartridge

“INK END” during the drawing

“INK NEAR END” during the filling

Ink IC warning

When a cartridge is taken off.

Ink wear up cleaning

Local/Remote idle warning

display

(state of supply system unit)

Guidance function warning

display in detail

(state of cartridge unit)

Cleaning Filling Drawing

NEAR END INK NEAR END × × *1

INK END

INK END

× × ×!CAR

NO CARTRIDGE

NON-ORIGINAL INK

WRONG INK IC

Kind of INK

Color of INK

WRONG CARTRIDGE

Expiration:2MONTH

Expiration:1MONTH *2

Expiration

2-14

Operation Principle

Ink system error monitoring

�Operation at occurrence of an ink system error

Error check on ink system/cartridge is executed periodically (every 30 ms), and operation is restricted

according to the error state.

Error contents/operation restrictions are shown in the table below.


Expiration:2MONTH

<Ink system error>

Priority

Ink system error

Executions at error

Error contentsCL/

FillingDrawing

Head

cleaning

Pump

cleaning

H

L

Waste ink tank × × × ×No waste ink tank or the waste ink tank is full.

Initial filling is not

executed× × × ×

Initial filling is not executed.

Ink end error × ×Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing & suction operation can not be executed.

Ink near end error ×

Errors occurred in both cartridges and drawing &

suction operation can not be executed.

Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file

drawing.

A waste ink tank is

FULL soon now.× × ×

Waste ink tank is almost full.

Returns to the local state at each completion of 1 file

drawing.

No cartridge Cartridge is not installed.

Ink IC *An error related to the cartridge IC occurs.

Ink supply is disabled.

Residual quantity 0

cartridge

Ink in the cartridge is used up.

Ink supply is disabled.

Cartridge ink end

Quantity of ink in the cartridge reached to the

predetermined amount.

Ink supply is disabled (CL can be used).

Cartridge near end

The near end sensor detection board detects the state

close to ink end.

Can be used for ink supplying at drawing or CL.

1 months passed after ink

expiration date1 months passed after ink expiration date.

Announcement of nozzle

cleaning executionUrging execution of nozzle cleaning.

Wiper replacementThe number of usage times of a wiper exceeds the predetermined replacement number.

WashLiquidCart.NONE × Cleaning fluid cartridge is not installed.

Cleaning fluid cartridge × Troubles on the ink cleaning fluid cartridge.

Wash Liquid END × The cleaning fluid cartridge is empty.

Ink expiration of

limitation period.Ink expiration of limitation period.

2-15


Ink residual quantity control

Residual quantity of cartridge ink is calculated by subtracting ink consumption quantity obtained by

calculation of number of ink shot times of drawing and flashing and ink suction amount by cleaning and

filling from the ink residual quantity.

When ink residual quantity is updated, writing to the ink IC chip is executed.

A cartridge error is issued according to the residual quantity.

� Calculation of ink consumption quantity

The followings are calculation of ink consumption quantity at drawing, cleaning etc.

a) At drawing and flashing (ink discharging)

Ink consumption quantity at ink discharging is calculated with counting the number of ink shot

times.

b) At cleaning and filling (ink suction)

Ink consumption quantity at each operation is shown in the table below.

� Updating of ink residual quantity

The ink residual quantity is updated at the following timings, and written in the ink IC chip.

In JV5, as each dot size is counted at unit of each nozzle array, Small, Middle, Large, smaller error

between actual measured value and calculated value can be expected.

<Ink consumption quantity at ink suction>

TypeInk consumption quantity in 1

supply path [cc]

Soft cleaning 0.4

Normal cleaning 1.1

High power cleaning 8.3

Maintenance filling 33.7

Initial filling Main suction 69.2

Cobble filling 15.7

Initial filling

(At replacement)

Main suction 69.2

Cobble filling 15.7

<Ink residual quantity updating timing>

Updating timing Conditions

At pre-capping operation When ink is consumed by drawing or flashing.

Mainly at capping after completion of drawing.

At completion of cleaning and filling operation Ink is consumed by cleaning and filling.

Cartridge residual quantity at using main suction is updated.

When the following events occur at drawing and cleaning or

filling.

Cover OPEN

Lever UP

Media end

Ink consumption quantity until just before the events shown in the

left is updated.

When the following errors occur at drawing.

Cartridge near end

Cartridge ink end

Cartridge error

Updated just after occurrence of the error not waiting for writing

at the capping pre-operation.

Update before replacing of cartridge during the drawing.

2-16

Operation Principle

� Errors related to ink residual quantity

Errors related to ink residual quantity are shown in the table below.

* Arises at 220cc cartridge: 400cc, 440cc cartridge: 800cc.

Ink wear-up cleaning

The purpose of this cleaning is subduing ink consumption of a normal cartridge by using residual ink

of a cartridge having “Cartridge near end” error or “Cartridge ink end” error by priority.

When one cartridge is normal at starting of cleaning, residual ink side is sucked and after suction,

switched to the normal cartridge to continue cleaning.

When residual ink is used up (soft counter), “Residual quantity 0 cartridge” error is arisen to disable

the cartridge.

<Errors related to ink residual quantity>

Item Content

Cartridge near end Error arising timing:Residual quantity detection by the near end detection board.

Set value of each cartridge is as the followings.

220 cc cartridge: 20 cc

440 cc cartridge: 40 cc

Restrictions after arising of an error:

Initial filling is not allowed (drawing and cleaning is allowed).

Cartridge ink end Error arising timing:Arising at consumption of predetermined quantity after the near end

detection.

Restrictions after arising of an error:Drawing and initial filling are not allowed (cleaning is

allowed).

Residual quantity 0 cartridge Error arising timing:Arising at residual quantity 0 after arising of ink end.

This error may arise only after cleaning by the ink wear-up cleaning.


Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed.

Cartridge error Error arising timing:Arises when the ink end does not arise even if ink consumption quantity

exceeds about double of ink cartridge capacity*.


Drawing, initial filling and cleaning are not allowed.

Ink wear-up cleaning control is only effective in the normal cleaning, and it can not be executed at

other cleanings or at initial filling.

2-17


Ink Suction and Discharge Control

Outline of control

Suction and discharge of ink is driven by roller pumps (ink suction pump), 1 pump is allocated to

every 2 heads.

Suction and discharge are executed at each pump (at each head is impossible because of the

configuration).

2 sensors in the waste ink tank prevent ink troubles caused by an installation miss, ink over flowing

and so on.

At sensor detection, operations conducting ink discharging such as drawing, cleaning, filling and so

on, are restricted.

In order to avoid clotting of ink in an waste ink path tube from inside of a cap to the waste ink tank,

automatic cleaning mechanism (pump tube cleaning) is equipped.

An exclusive pump sucks cleaning fluid from installed cleaning fluid tank to clean inside of the tube

(Executed at Standby in Power ON or Sleep in Power OFF.)

In order to avoid clotting of ink adhered on a wiper, a wiper cleaning mechanism is equipped.

Cleaning fluid is supplied on the wiper at a solenoid for wiper cleaning OPEN.

Device configuration

The device configuration of ink suction and discharge is shown in a diagrammic illustration below.

Fig.2-2 Diagrammic illustration of Ink Suction and Discharge Path

2 ink suction pumps

2 cleaning fluid suction

1 cleaning fluid cartridge

Cartridge PIC

Cartridge sensor

Ink near end sensor

1 supply valve

Solenoid for wiper cleaning

To waste ink tank

Solenoid for wiper cleaning

To waste ink tank

Flow of ink

Flow of ink

Flow of

cleaning

Head 1

Cap 1

Head 2

Cap 2

Head 3

Cap 3

Head 4

Cap 4

Ink suction pump 1

Cleaning fluid

suction pump 1

Cleaning fluid

suction pump 2

Ink suction pump 2

Flow of

cleaning

Supply valve

Cleaning fluid

cartridge

2-18

Operation Principle

Initial Filling

At device starting, when ink is not filled, initial filling id conducted. Operation sequence is as the

following.

* As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal.

<Initial filling operation sequence>

No. Item Content

1 Selection of ink type A set value is selected among values shown below.

Set value: ES3 Sol, HS Sol

2 Selection of number of

colors

A set value is selected among values shown below.

Set value: 4-Color (MCYKKYCM), 6-Color (MCcKYCMm)

3 Filling of filler liquid Insert a filler liquid cartridge in a slot to be sucked

(As 8 filler liquid cartridges are initially attached, use those cartridges with swapping in order of

odd number slots → even number slots.)

1. Suction to a coupler (odd number slots):

Insert filler liquid cartridges into odd number slots (x8) and suck the liquid to the coupler.Sucking the liquid to the damper (head) (even number slots):

Taking out filler liquid cartridges in odd number slots and insert them into even number slots (x8), suck the liquid to the damper (head).

If there is an occurrence of warning* in a filler liquid cartridge, suction is not conducted.

If there is an occurrence of warning in waste ink tank, suction is not conducted.

If a warning related to waste ink tank is detected during sucking, sucking is stopped and the

filler liquid sucked again.

4 Cleaning fluid filling Inserting ink cartridges into all slots and ink filling is conducted.

1. Filling to the coupler

In case of cartridges in the same supply system, valves are opened in order of 2 → 1, ink is filled to the coupler.

2. Filling to the damper (head).

If a warning occurs in the ink cartridge, filling is not conducted.

If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conducted.

If a warning related to the cartridge occurs during filling to the coupler, filling is stopped and

ink filling is executed again.

If a cartridge warning occurs during filling to the damper (head), filling is continued with

replacing cartridges.

Filling is stopped when ink supply fails in one supply system.

If a warning related to the waste ink tank is detected during the filling, sucking is stopped and

ink filling is started again.

5 Cleaning fluid filling Filling of exclusive cleaning fluid for wiper cleaning, pump tube cleaning.

Insertion of the cleaning fluid cartridge into a slot is confirmed and filling is conducted.

If a warning occurs in the cleaning fluid cartridge, filling is not conducted.

If a warning occurs in the waste ink tank, filling is not conduct.

2-19


2-1-7. Nozzle Missing Detection (NCU) Function

This is a function to detect nozzle missing during drawing or after cleaning using the nozzle check unit.

Selection of conduct/not conduct the nozzle missing detection is set with “NOZZLE CHECK” of

NCU function.

When nozzle missing is detected, a check pattern having predetermined nozzle interval is discharged

to the nozzle check unit to check nozzle missing.

When the number of missing nozzles exceeds the set standard value (Set in “NG JUDGEMENT” of

the NCU Function (p.2-23)), a result of the nozzle check is NG, and a recovering operation selected in

“NG ACTION” of the NCU function is executed.

Operation flows at the nozzle detection are shown in p.2-21 and p.2-22.

As for details of each setting related to the nozzle missing detection function, refer to the

“NCU Function” (p.2-23).

2-20

Operation Principle

Fig.2-3 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 1/2

Nozzle missingdetection

YesEND

Missingnozzle qty. in 1 supplysystem is more than the

judging value?

No

Nozzle checkeffective?

Missingnozzle qty. in all supplysystem is more than the

judging value?

No

END

NoNG ACTION

(DURING THE DRAW)=CONTINUE?

Yes

1

No

Yes

Yes

NoNG ACTION (DURING THE DRAW)

=STOP?

Yes

Drawing stop

END

Cleaning

NGACTION

(DURING THE DRAW) =CLEANING&CONT.

?

No

Nozzle check

Cleaning success?

No

Cleaning retry?

No

Drawing stop

END

Yes

Yes

Missing nozzle qty. clear

Yes

1

2-21


Fig.2-4 Operation at Nozzle Missing Detection 2/2

Missingnozzle qty. in 1 supplysystem is more than the

judging value?

No

Missingnozzle qty. in all supplysystem is more than the

judging value?

No

ENDNoNG ACTION

(AFTERtheDRAWend)=CONTINUE?

Yes

1

Yes

Yes

NoNG ACTION (AFTERtheDRAWend)

=STOP?

Yes

Drawing stop

END

Cleaning

NGACTION

(AFTERtheDRAWend) =CLEANING&CONT.

?

No

Nozzle check

Cleaning success?

No

Cleaning retry?

No

Drawing stop

END

Yes

Yes

Missing nozzle qty. clear

Yes

Drawing continue

END

Drawingcontinue

END

2-22

Operation Principle

NCU Function

Details of the nozzle missing detection function (nozzle check unit) are set.

* When the RETRY COUNT is set to 3, (if the nozzle can not be recovered) max. 4 times f cleaning are executed.

<NCU function setting items>

Item Content

NOZZLE CHECK Setting ON/OFF of nozzle missing detection.

Set value: ON, OFF (Default: ON)

NG

ACTION

DURING

THE DRAW

Setting of operations when nozzle missing NG is determined during the drawing.

Set value

CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default)

CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning.

CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not re-

started

STOP: Drawing is stopped

Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail

Setting of Cleaning operation starts.

CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP)

Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL)

RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP)

Set value: 0 ~ 3 (Default: 3)

AFTER the

DRAW end

Setting of an operation after completion of 1 file drawing at the Nozzle missing NG determination.

Set value

CONTINUE: The drawing is continued (Default)

CLEANING&CONT: The drawing is restarted after the cleaning.

CLEANING&STOP: Nozzle recovery by cleaning is executed If failed, the drawing is not re-

started

STOP: Drawing is stopped

Pressing [FUNCTION] at item selection in CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP, the Detail

Setting of Cleaning operation starts.

CLEANING TYPE:Set a type of cleaning (CLEANING&CONT, CLEANING&STOP)

Set value: NORMAL, SOFT, HARD (Default: NORMAL)

RETRY COUNT*:No. of cleaning re-try is set (CLEANING&STOP)


NG JUDGEMENT Setting No. of missing nozzles to cause nozzle check NG.

Setting contents are stored in the function parameter.

CLOGG NZL/color:Standard of No. of missing nozzles per 1 nozzle raw is set.


CLOGG NZL/ALL:Standard of No. of total missing nozzles is set.


COND. INDICATION operation state of NCU is displayed. (at operation / at being separated)

Pressing [FUNCTION] at operation state displaying, an NCU related error presently occurs is

displayed.

If plural of errors are occurring, the display can be switched with [�]/[�].

Errors related to NCU ERROR116: NCU I/F errorERROR160: NCU DETECT errorERROR161: NCU current consumption on creasesERROR162: NCU current consumption abnormalERROR163: NCU SENSOR errorERROR164: NCU FPGA error

2-23


TEST

The following items are tested. They can be selected only at the maintenance open except for NCU

detection test.

* As it is assumed that tests are executed in a state that there is no nozzle missing, it is required that no nozzle missing is con-

firmed by drawing a nozzle check pattern beforehand.

<Test Items>

Item Content

NOZZLE CHK TEST

(NCU detection test)

Operation contents Testing whether the nozzle missing detection is normally executed.

Flushing of NCU test pattern is executed, confirm that detection detail information

of the nozzle check unit agrees with the pattern.

There are 4 NCU test patterns as listed below. It is tested that both of “missing“

and “not missing“ can be detected on discharging of each nozzle.

• For the odd number nozzle discharge (odd number nozzle missing)

• For the even number nozzle discharge (even number nozzle missing)

• For consecution odd number nozzle discharge > even number nozzle discharge

• Noemal discharge (no missing)

At error Error (ERROR160 DETECT) is displayed.

SDRAM CHECK Operation contents Write/Read check of NCU SDRAM is executed.

At error If data is not agreed, the check is aborted and SDRAM address and Write/Read data

at occurrence of the error are displayed.

F-ROM CHECK Operation contents Hash check of NCU F-ROM is executed.

In the check, It is confirmed that SUM value of long ward size from address 0 of F-

ROM is a normal value, that is counted as 1, and this process is repeated to [END]

input.

At error Check process is aborted and an error is displayed. (When SUM value is not

00007000H)

LDconsu.ELcurr. Operation contents Check whether power current consumption of LD overs the threshold.

At error Over the threshold: Error (ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION) is displayed.

Near then threshold: Warning (ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE.) is displayed

LINE VOLTAGE Operation contents Power source voltage of NCU (5V) is checked.

At error Error (ERROR162 NCU LINE VOLTAGE) is displayed.

LD&SensorTEST Operation contents Sensor test of NCU is executed.

At error At error detection : Error (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR DETECT)

At error detection level down : Warning (ERROR163 NCU SENSOR )

SERIAL CHECK Operation contents Serial communication with NCU test is executed.

At error Error(ERROR116 NCU I/F 01H) is displayed

LASER TEMP.CHK Operation contents Temperature read from the thermistor at laser emission part of NCU is displayed.

(A/D value is also displayed)

At error

2-24

Operation Principle

NCU LD RESET

Initialising LD current consumption value.

Current value increases gradually according to the operation of NCU. Initial value of the current value is

stored in the device and when the value exceeds the predetermined value, the error (ERROR161) to urge

the user to replace the LD sensor unit with a new one is displayed.

If LD current consumption value exceeds 109% of the initial value:

ERROR161 NCU EXCHANGE

NCU can be used

If LD current consumption value exceeds 110% of the initial value:

ERROR161 NCU CONSUMPTION

NCU can not be used

This function is effective only at the MAINTENANCE OPEN, and required to be exe-

cuted at replacement of LD sensor units.

The4 NCULD reset should be executed in the local idling state (a state that initial oper-

ation has been completed and capped).

At normal end (reset complete) : “ RESET COMPLETION ”

At error (reset failure) : “ !! RESET FAILURE !! ”

(Make sure that the machine is in the local idling state, and then execute the reset

again.)

2-25


2-2. Functions

2-2-1. ADJUST Function

#ADJUST function comprises the following items executed at factory shipping or maintenance

operation.

<Adjust functions>

Item ContentReference

page

HEAD ADJUST Slant adjust, Stagger adjust, Dot position adjust, impact confirmation. P.3-20

HEAD WASH Cleaning of head, damper, tube P.2-27

MANUALhead WASH Manual cleaning of head, damper and tube at head replacement and so on. P.2-28

DEFAULT SET Initialization of the selection parameter P.2-28

CAPPING Capping, wiping position adjustment P.3-14

BasisHEADheight Head standard height (manual) adjustment P.3-12

HEAD ID Head ID inputting P.2-29

MOTOR CURRENT Adjusting power current of X-motor, Y-motor P.2-29

SERIAL No Confirmation and input of device serial No. P.2-30

DEALER No Confirmation and input to device dealer No. P.2-30

EDGE ADJUST Adjusting margin in both sides of paper P.2-30

MEDIA ENCODER Decentering compensation of media encoder P.2-31

MEDIA COMP.2 Media basic feed amount compensation P.2-31

EXCHANGE PARTS Display and input of parts, units replacement history P.2-32

2-26

Functions

HEAD WASH

Cleaning head, damper and tube.

*1 As an IC chip is not placed in a filling liquid cartridge, it is recognized that IC chip read error means normal

As it is non- filling state after the completion of cleaning, the Initial Filling (p.2-19) or filling of

corresponding head is required.

<Head wash operation sequence>


1 Preparation Selection of a head to be discharged and cleaned.

2 Discharging of ink 1.Taking out cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2.Discharging ink (Ink suction motor driving)

If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed.

(waste ink tank sensor monitoring)

3 Cleaning 1. Inserting cleaning fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring*1)

2.Cleaning inside of tube (Opening cartridge valve, ink suction motor driving)


(waste tank sensor monitoring)

3.Head vibrating operation (Y-motor) is executed

4 Discharging of

cleaning fluid

1.Taking out cleaning cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2.Discharging cleaning fluid (ink suction pump motor driving)



5 Repeating 3 ~ 4 are executed again.

6 Wiper Cleaning 1.Cap OFF

2.Wiper ON (after moving the carriage to the maintenance position)

Waiting for wiper cleaning end

([ENTER] pressing to start the following No.)

7 Operation

selection

Press one of a key below to select an operation.

[�] : Transit to No. 10 (END)

[�] : Transit to No. 8 (CONTINUE)

[�] : Transit to No. 3 (WASH)

8 Filling of shipping

fluid

1. Insert shipping fluid cartridge (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2. Fill head, damper and tube with shipping fluid

(Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving).



9 Discharging of

shipping fluid

1.Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges (all slots). (Cartridge sensor monitoring)

2.Discharge shipping fluid (with leaving appropriate amount)

(Cartridge valve OPEN, Ink suction pump motor driving)



10 Operation

selection


[�] : End of head cleaning (END)

[�] : Transit to No. 11 (Yes)

11 Maintenance

cleaning fluid

discharge

1.Taking out the maintenance cleaning fluid cartridge

(maintenance cleaning fluid slot)

2.Discharging maintenance cleaning fluid

(driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)

*If a warning arises in the waste ink tank, discharging is not executed.

12 Operation

selection


[�] : End of head cleaning (END)

[�] : Transit to No. 13 (CONTINUE)

13 Shipping fluid

suction and

discharge

1. Inserting shipping fluid cartridge. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot)

2.Shipping fluid suction (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)

3.Taking out of shipping fluid cartridges. (maintenance cleaning fluid slot)

4.Discharging shipping fluid (driving ink suction, cleaning fluid suction motor)

*When a warning on the ink waste tank arises, do not execute suction and discharge.

2-27


MANUALhead WASH

At head cleaning with a syringe (after head replacement and so on), cap off to execute dry suction.

DEFAULT SET

Setting initial value to a selected parameter.

<Manual head cleaning operation sequence>


1 Preparation Select a head to be sucked.

Set value: 1234, 12––, ––34

2 Suction 1. Cap OFF

2. Dry suction (pressing [ENTER] to drive corresponding motor)

If a warning on waste ink tank arises, filling is not conducted.

(Waste tank sensor monitoring)

3 End Press [ENTER] to stop pump motor and return to 1.

<Default set>

No. Selection Item Operation content Notice

1 SETUP PARAMETER 1. Initialization of user operation setting value

2.Set user No. to 1

3. Initialization of language to be used

4. Initialization of User dot position compensation value

5.Set to maintenance close

Always selectable

2 MAINTE. PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

3 CUSTOM. PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

4 RUNNING PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

5 EXCHANGE PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

6 INKSYSTEMparam. Initializing the parameter in question

7 INKinfor.PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question Quasi-disclosure

parameter (Selectable

only at releasing)8 INKinfor.PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

9 INKSEQUENCEpara Initializing the parameter in question

10 HEADunit PARAM. Unit selection: UNIT-1~4, ALL

11 SERVO PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question

12 TEST PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question

13 CORRECT PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

14 ADJUST PARAM. Initializing the parameter in question

15 NCU PARAMETER Initializing the parameter in question

2-28

Functions

HEAD ID

Contents:Head ID input of JV-5 is automatically executed by the system.

The head memory PCB Assy is equipped on the head unit Assy (M007034, IH47V Head

Unit Assy), the ID information is written in the head memory Assy.

MOTOR CURRENT

STOP ADJUST

Contents:Adjusting of power current of X-, Y-motor. Adjust value is stored in the system parameter.

X-, Y-motor power current value and corresponding D/A value are displayed.

Key operation

[ENTER]:Transit to adjust mode

[�], [�]:Motor selection

[�], [�]:Change of D/A value

X MOVING ADJUST/ Y MOVING ADJUST

Contents:Adjust current value with driving X- or Y-motor.

Current value of X- or Y-motor and corresponding D/A value are displayed.

The operation sequence is as same as that of #TEST→MOTOR TEST→ XY SERVO

MOTOR.

Adjust the D/A value with [�] [�] during the operation under designated conditions.

The set value is stored at stopping with [END].

Head ID is for compensating differences of discharge amount of ink among each head. A label on

which a compensation value (ID) is written is attached on a head at shipping.

Storing the ID in the Parameter of JV-5 makes print quality constant.

Manual input of the ID information is required in the following cases.

�In a case that the ID information is not stored in the head memory PCB Assy.

“ HEAD ID Un-Input ” is displayed on the panel (at the power ON)

�In a case that the head ID is not identical to the ID information in the PCB Assy.

(when a PCB of another head is placed, for example).

As the error is not displayed on the panel, taking care is required at replacing.

Manual ID input is recommended if there is a doubt on agreement between the ID

of a head and the ID information in the memory PCB.

When the head ID is changed, never forget to turn the power OFF with the remort

switch (the front side power switch) to write new ID information in the head memory.

(If the power is turned OFF with the main power SW (back side), as contents of the

headmemory are not updated, changing of IDs is not reflected.

2-29


SERIAL No

Contents:Confirmation and setting of serial ID.

8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input.

Key operation

[�], [�]:Change value (cursor position)

[�], [�]:Moving the cursor

(When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work)

[ENTER]:Setting

[END]:Input cancel

DEALER No

Contents:Confirmation and setting of dealer ID.

8 characters of alphabet and numeral (0~9, A~Z) can be input.

Key operation

[�], [�]:Change value (cursor position)

[�], [�]:Moving the cursor

(When the cursor is in the left end or the right end, key input does not work)

[ENTER]:Setting

[END]: Input cancel

EDGE ADJUST

Contents:Adjust dead space size of both left and right ends of paper

Key operation

[�]:Set adjust value of L, R to default (15.0 mm).

[�]: Execute media width detection to draw an adjust pattern.

[�], [�]:Change adjust values

[END]:Input cancel

Adjust value:0.0~35.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)

Input actual measurement from media end to the pattern as an adjust value.

If the unit is changed to inch, convert the value to inch to adjust.

Fig.2-5

Note: The set value is stored in the system parameter No.2 R GRIP, No.3 L GRIP as “current parameter value + (15mm-input

value)”.

Do not change the serial No in usual.

Media width

15mm 15mm

2-30

Functions

MEDIA ENCODER

Contents:Eccentric compensation of the media encoder is executed.

When the compensation is started, the following operations are executed automatically.

Used media:Using of the following cut media having more than 800mm of feed amount is

recommended.

1. Photo paper

2. Glossy white

3. Media having characteristic of as firm as possible (if media above mentioned can not

be obtained)

MEDIA COMP.2

Contents:Basic feeding amount of media is compensated.

Key operation

[ENTER]:Drawing an adjusting pattern

[�]: Input compensation value without drawing the adjusting pattern

[END]: Complete drawing and input compensation value.

Compensation value:-500 ~ 500

In actual feeding amount compensation, compensation for each media set in the

SET UP function is added to this compensation value.

Fig.2-6

Using of media hard to feed, such as tarpaulin, is not allowed.

Use cut media and not to use roll media.

(Decentering compensation is interrupted by the back tension.)

A pattern having width of media is drawn.Resolution is 720dpi

Compensation value is too large

Compensation value is too small

2-31


EXCHANGE PARTS

Displaying of replacement date history of parts/unit, or registering of replacement date.

� REGISTRATION

Parts replacement history is registered.

Select a part to be registered and input date and part number. Effective part numbers are as the

followings.

�HISTORY

The latest history is displayed at stating. (Switching is allowed with [�], [�])

As for a head, as it is recorded automatically at first starting after replacement, registration is not

required. (Confirmation of history is allowed)

Layout of each part is shown in the following drawing.

Fig.2-7

Type Part number

Pump 1 ~ 4

Cap 1 ~ 4

Damper 1-A, 1-B, 1-C, ... 4-G, 4-H

(combination of head number and nozzle number)

NCU sensor unit Number is not input

JV-5 determines timing of replacement of above parts.

When a part in question is replaced, never forget to register the replacement date.

Cap

Cap 1

Cap 3

Cap 2

Cap 4

Corresponding head No. is equal to cap No.

Damper

A

Designate with head No. (1~4) and nozzle row (A~H)

B C D E F G H

~Top View of Cap~

~Top view of head~

Pump

Pump1

~Front view of the device~

F.BOX Pump2

Pump3

Pump4

Pump1: Ink suction pumpPump2: Ink suction pumpPump3: Cleaning fluid suction pumpPump4: Cleaning fluid suction pump

2-32

Functions

2-2-2. TEST Function

The test function comprises the following items executed in shipping, and the maintenance operation.

<Test function item>

Item ContentReference

page

CHECK PATTERN Drawing of various type of check patterns.

100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25% (Density pattern)NOZZLE CHECK, COLOR CHART,DROP.POS CHK

P.2-34

PARAMETER DRAW Drawing of parameter setting contents.

SYSTEM, MAINTE, CUSTOM, RUNNING, EXCHANGE, INKSYSTEM, INKinfor., INKSEQUENCE, INK TYPE, HEADunit 1 ~ 4 (1 ~ 2 in case of 2 head model), SERVO, TEST, CORRECT, ADJUST, NCU

P.2-35

ALL PATTERN Drawing of adjusting pattern. P.2-35

MOTOR TEST Operation test of various motors.

X SERVO MOTOR, Y SERVO MOTOR, XY SERVO MOTOR, WIPER MOTOR, CAP MOTOR, HEADup/downMTR, PUMP MOTOR, TAKE-UP MOTOR

P.2-36

HEATER TEST Test of media heater

TEMPERATURE, LED, SSR, POWER RELAY SWP.2-39

WARMING TEST Test of head warming heater P.2-39

ACTION TEST Operation Test of various fan motor, cutter, valve

VACUUM FAN, VACUUM FAN, FS FAN, Y-CUTTER, WIPERwashVALVE, HDC FAN, DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN

P.2-40

SENSOR TEST Test of various sensors

SET LEVER, R.PAPER, Y-ORIGIN, STATION, WIPER, FRONT COVER, WasteTANK, HEATER POW,MEDIA JAM, INK LEAK, Interlock CABLE

P.2-40

CAP SENSOR Test of cap sensor P.2-41

PAPER SENSOR Test of media width sensor P.2-41

KEYBOARD TEST Test of panel SW P.2-41

LCD TEST Test of LCD 1, 2 P.2-41

TIMER CHECK Confirmation and setting of device time P.2-42

MEMORY CHECK Check of various memory

MAIN.SDRAM, MAIN.S-RAM, MAIN.F-ROM, BACKUP.SRAM, HEAD.EEPROM

P.2-43

SKEW CHECK Media skew check P.2-44

TEMPERATURE.CHK Display of temperature around head

HEAD TEMP., NOZZLE TEMP., HEAT SINK TEMP., SLIDER TEMP., SIDE TEMP.

P.2-44

VOLTAGE CHECK Confirmation of power source voltage. P.2-44

I/F TEST Interface check

LOOP BACK, SDRAMP.2-45

ENCODER TEST Test of various encoders.

LINEAR ENCODER, CUTTER ENCODER, MEDIA ENCODER, POSITIONencoder

P.2-46

INK CARTRIDGE Test around cartridge.

PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, CARTRIDGE LED, INK-IC CHECK, SolenoidVOLTAGE

P.2-46

WASH CARTRIDGE Test around cleaning cartridge.

PACK&END SENSOR, CARTRIDGE VALVE, IC CHECK, SolenoidVOLTAGE

P.2-47

2-33


CHECK PATTERN

The following 4 types of drawing are allowed in check pattern. Procedure of pattern drawing is shown in

the table below

• Density pattern

• NOZZLE CHECK

• COLOR CHART

• DROP.POS CHK

*1 COLOR CHART, DROP.POS CHK do not have these items.

*2 Density pattern, NOZZLE CHECK and DROP.POS CHK do not have these items.

Fig.2-8

<Check pattern drawing procedure>

No. Item Content

1 Selection of density*2 ALL, 100%, 50%, 25%, 12.5%, 6.25%

2 Selection of resolution 540x 720, 540x 900, 540x1080, 720x 540

720x 720, 720x1080, 720x1440, 1440x1440

3 Selection of can

direction

Bi-D, Uni-D

4 Selection of No. of

passes

Resolution Passes(4 color) Passes(6 color)

540x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32

540x900: 5,10,20,40 5,10,20,40

540x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48

720x540: 3,6,12,24 3,6,12,24

720x720: 2,4,8,16 4,8,16,32

720x1080: 3,6,12,24 6,12,24,48

720x1440: 4,8,16,32 8,16,32,64

1440x1440: 8,16,32 16,32,64

5 Selection of drawing size X size: 10 mm ~ paper length (unit: 10 mm) *Roll paper: 500000mm

Y size: 10 mm ~ paper width (unit: 10 mm)

6 Selection of drawing

color*16 colors: M,C,Y,K,c,m

4 colors: M,C,Y,K

7 Drawing start

(waiting for key input)

[ENTER]: Drawing start

[TEST]: Execution of test drawing

[(JOG)]: JOG operation mode

Press [ENTER] to start drawing with setting the current position as the original

position.

[REMOTE]: Setting of high speed scan ON/OFF

[END]: END of drawingF

ee

d

Scan

<Example of DROP.POS CHK pattern printing>

2-34

Functions

PARAMETER DRAW

Select a parameter to draw setting contents. Selectable parameters are as the followings.

:Standard parameter (Default selection is allowed)

:Quasi disclosure parameter (Selectable only at releasing)

F/W Version, Item No., Item Name, Adjust Value, Initial Value of a selected parameter are drawn.

When DISPLAY setting is “JAPANESE” they are drawn in Japanese, if other language is set, they are

drawn in English.

Fig.2-9

ALL PATTERN

The following check patterns are drawn in the block.

<Parameter drawing>

No. Parameter Selection Notice

1 SYSTEM PARAM.

2 MAINTE PARAM.

3 CUSTOM PARAM.

4 RUNNING PARAM.

5 EXCHANGE PARAM.

6 INKSYSTEM PARAM

7 INKinfor.PARAM.

8 INKSEQUENCEpara

9 INK TYPE PARAM.

10 HEADunit PARAM. Unit–ALL, 1~4 (1~2 in case of 2 head model) to draw

11 SERVO PARAMETER

12 TEST PARAMETER

13 CORRECT PARAM.

14 ADJUST PARAM.

15 NCU PARAMETER

Check patternReference

page

Slant adjusting pattern P.3-20

Stagger adjusting pattern P.3-23

Y-impact position adjusting pattern (FINE Y Si/Re/Bi) P.3-28

2-35


MOTOR TEST

The following 8 motors are tested.

� X SERVO MOTOR

Operation of X-servo motor is executed.

Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective).

� Y SERVO MOTOR

Operation of Y-servo motor is executed.

Operation sequence is as same as that of X-motor test. (See the operation sequence above.)

<Motor>

Motor nameReference

page

X SERVO MOTOR P.2-36

Y SERVO MOTOR P.2-36

XY SERVO MOTOR P.2-37

WIPER MOTOR P.2-37

CAP MOTOR P.2-38

HEADup/downMTR P.2-38

PUMP MOTOR P.2-38

TAKE-UP MOTOR P.2-39

<X (Y)-servo motor test sequence>


1 Speed designation [�], [�]: Speed selection set value

Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at X-motor test)

Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s) (at Y-motor test)

[�], [�]:

Selection of item

2~4

2 Acceleration designation [�], [�]: Acceleration selection

Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50G (unit: 0.01 G) (at X-motor test)

Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00G (unit: 0.05 G) (at Y-motor test)

3 Moving amount

designation

[�], [�]: Moving amount selection

Set value: 1mm ~ paper length (width) (unit: 1 mm)

When media is not detected X-motor: 1 mm~500000 mm

4 Cap OFF Move the station to the lowest position. Only Y-moter

5 Move [ENTER]: Reciprocating motion in the X (Y) direction with designated

conditions is repeated.

6 End [END] : Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to

end.

2-36

Functions

� XY SERVO MOTOR

Operation test of XY-servo motor is executed.

Note: During the test, heater temperature control is allowed (When HEATER key is effective).

�WIPER MOTOR

Operation test of wiper motor is executed.

< XY-servo motor test sequence>


1 X speed designation [�], [�]: Speed selection

Set value: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s)

[�], [�]:

Selection of item

2~4

[ENTER]:

Transit to setting

in the Y

direction (5~)

2 X acceleration

designation

[�], [�]: Acceleration selection

Set value: 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (unit: 0.01 G)

3 X moving amount

designation


Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper length (unit: 1 mm)

When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ 500000 mm

press [ENTER] to start Y-motor setting

4 Y speed designation [�], [�]: Speed selection

Set value: 1 ~ 1500 mm/s (unit: 1 mm/s)

[�], [�]:

Selection of item

5~7

[ENTER]:

Transit to the

following step

[END]: Transit

to setting in the

X direction (2~)

5 Y acceleration

designation

[�], [�]: Acceleration selection

Set value: 0.05 ~ 2.00 G (unit: 0.05 G)

6 Y moving amount

designation


Set value: 1 mm ~ Paper width (unit: 1 mm)

When media is not detected: 1 mm ~ Mechanical limit size

7 Cap OFF Move the station to the lowest position.

8 Moving [ENTER]: The following motion is repeated with the designated

conditions.

(During the motion, No. of Y reciprocation is displayed.)

a ) Y designated distance moving

b ) X designated distance moving, Move to Y starting position

9 End [END]: Return to the motion starting position and execute capping to

end.

<Wiper motor test sequence>


1 Driving speed

designation

[�], [�]: Selection of driving speed of the motor

Set value: 100 ~ 4000 pps (unit: 100 pps)

[�], [�]:

Selection of item

1~32 WAIT designation [�], [�]: Designating operation interval

Set value: 0~60 sec (unit: 1 sec)

3 Count designation [�], [�]: Designating No. of operation times

Set value: CONTINUE, 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count)

4 Carriage state selection [FUNCTION]: Displaying carriage state at test selection menu

IN :Execution at cap position

OUT :Execution after carriage out

5 Test start [ENTER]: Driving the motor with designated conditions

When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with

[END]

6 Test end Wiper is returned to the original position.

2-37


� CAP MOTOR

Operation test of cap motor is executed.

�HEADup/downMTR

Operation test of head up/down motor is executed.

� PUMP MOTOR

Operation test of pump motor is executed.

<Cap motor test sequence>


1 Driving speed

designation



[�], [�]:

Selection of

item 1~32 WAIT designation [�], [�]: Designating operation interval




4 Test start [ENTER]: Cap OFF, carriage out, cap motor is driven with designated conditions

(Moving range: Station lowest position ~Cap ON position)

5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END].

Cap ON to END.

< Head up/down motor test sequence>


1 Driving speed

designation



[�], [�]:

Selection of

item 1~32 WAIT designation [�], [�]: Designating operation interval




4 Test start [ENTER]: Move the station to the lowest position, driving the head up/down

motor with the designated conditions. (Moving range: Head top most

position ~ Lowest position)

5 Test end When CONTINUE is selected in count setting, finished with [END].

Head is returned to the position before the test, Cap ON to END.

<Pump motor test sequence>


1 Pump selection [�], [�]: Pump selection (Move cursor)

[�], [�]: Operation selection

[�], [�]:

Selection of

item 1~32 Rotation direction

selection

[�], [�]: Pump rotation direction selection

Set value: FORWARD, REVERSE

3 Driving speed

designation

[�], [�]: Select driving speed

Set value: 100~4000 pps (unit: 100 pps)

4 Carriage/Cap state

selection

[FUNCTION]: Carriage/cap state at test selection menu is displayed

<Carriage> IN: Execution at cap position / OUT: execution after carriage out

<Cap> ON: execution with cap ON / OFF: execution with cap OFF

5 Test start [ENTER]: Cap OFF, carriage is moved to maintenance position. Pump motor is

driven with designated conditions.

[END]: End

6 Test end Test end

2-38

Functions

� TAKE-UP MOTOR

Operation test of take-up motor is executed.

HEATER TEST

Various tests of the media heater are executed.

Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function.

Note2: A/D conversion value is also displayed.

WARMING TEST

Control test of the head warming heater ON/OFF and the power FET SW is executed.

Note1: Temperature is displayed with a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP function.

<Take-up motor test sequence>


1 Test start [ENTER]: Take-up motor is driven

(Switching of winding direction, or operation stop is allowed

with SW of winding device)

2 Test end [END]: End

<Heater test>

Item Content

TEMPERATURE Control test of heater set temperature is executed.

Temperature settings of Pre, Print, After Heater are executed to control heater.

Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 60 °C (unit: 1 °C After-heater is up to 70 °C)

Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 140 °F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1°F)

LED ON/OFF test of LED is executed.

LED is controlled according to heat LED of Pre, Print, After Heater, ON/OFF designation of constant LED.

SSR ON/OFF of heater is executed.

Heater is turned to ON/OFF according to ON/OFF designation of pre, print, after heater.(Heater temperature control is not conducted)

POWER RELAY

SW

Test of the heater power relay is executed.

Switching the power relay SW according to the ON/OFF designation.Current temperature of the media heater is also displayed.

<Warming test>

Item Content

TEMPERATURE Controlling the heater temperature with the temperature setting of the warming heater (each head).

Temperature and ON/OFF of each heater are displayed during the temperature control.

Set value (Celsius): OFF, 20 ~ 45 °C (unit: 1 °C)

Set value (Fahrenheit): OFF, 68 ~ 113 °F (as converted from celsius, unit is not 1°F)

POWER FET SW Making sure that the FET switch works normally with controlling the power FET SW according to the

ON/OFF designation.

Set value: ON, OFF

2-39


ACTION TEST

Operation of the following parts/units is tested.

SENSOR TEST

Various sensors are tested.

Before starting the test, turn the servo motor and stepping motor to OFF, after finishing the test, initial

operation of original position detection is executed.

<Action test>

Item Content

VACUUM FAN Contents: Operation test of vacuum fan motor

Set value: L.L, LOW, MID, HIGH, OFF

BUILTinDEOD.FAN Contents: Operation test of exhaust fan

Set value: ON, OFF

FS FAN Contents: Operation test of flushing station fan motor

Set value: L.L, Low, MID, HIGH, OFF

Y-CUTTER Contents: Operation test of media cutter.

Set value: UP, DOWN

Operation interval of Y-cutter is set with [FUNCTION]

[�], [�]: Operation interval setting

Set value: 0 ~ 7200 sec (unit: 1 sec)

[ENTER]: UP, Down is repeated with set interval

Number count is displayed during the test.

WIPERwashVALVE Contents: Operation test of wiper cleaning valve

Set value: OPEN, CLOSE

HDC FAN Contents: Operation test of HDC fan

Set value: OPEN, CLOSE

DEOD.FAN & DRY

FAN

Contents: Operation test of dryer/exhaust fan motor.

Set value: ON, OFF

<Sensor test>

Sensor Content LCD display

SET LEVER State display of clamp lever sensor ON/OFF

R.PAPER State display of rear paper sensor ON/OFF

Y-ORIGIN State display of Y-original position sensor. ON/OFF

STATION State display of station lowest position sensor ON/OFF

WIPER State display of wiper sensor ON/OFF

FRONT COVER State display of cover sensor (front, maintenance LR) ON/OFF

WasteTANK State display of waste ink tank full sensor/exist sensor

ON/ON: Full sensor ON / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist)

OFF/ON: Full sensor OFF / exist sensor ON (waste tank exist and near full)

ON/OFF: Full sensor ON / exist sensor OFF (never occur in usual state)

OFF/OFF:Full sensor OFF / exist sensor OFF (no waste tank or tank full)

ON/ON

OFF/ON

ON/OFF

OFF/OFF

HEATER POW Displaying the state of heater SW ON/OFF

MEDIA JAM State display of media jam sensor ON/OFF

INK LEAK Displaying the state of ink leak sensor ON/OFF

Interlock CABLE Displaying existence of a short circuit of the interlock cable. Always ON

(OFF: short circuit)

2-40

Functions

CAP SENSOR

Cap sensor is tested.

Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), state off cap sensor is displayed.

### ( ***

) ### : Sensor state (ON, OFF, Error)

***: Sensor reading

less than 0x00A4, sensor state : OFF

more than 0x0200, sensor state : ON

at 0x00A5~0x01FF, sensor state : Error

Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec).

[END]: After cap ON, cap sensor ends.

PAPER SENSOR

Paper width sensor is tested.

Cap OFF (station moved to the lowest position), reading of paper width sensor is displayed.

*** (@@@,$$$) @@@ : Sensor reading at SLOP-ON

$$$ : Sensor reading at SLOP-OFF

***: Difference between @@@ and $$$

Sensor reading is updated periodically (every 150 msec).

[�], [�]:Head move

[�], [�]:Alternately move to paper existing position and non-existing position in the right end of

media.

[END]:After cap ON, paper sensor ends

KEYBOARD TEST

Panel SW is tested.

When a panel SW is pressed, name of the SW is displayed on LCD.

When no key is pressed, “NONE” is displayed.

When [END] is pressed, “END TEST” is displayed and the keyboard test ends.

LCD TEST

Characters are displayed on LCD 1, LCD 2.

When the LCD Test is started, scrolling of character code of 0x21 ~ 0xFF in one line is repeated. Press

[END] to stop the test.

2-41


TIMER CHECK

Confirmation and setting of date and time of the device.

Inputting of past date is only allowed present day -8H. Other date is an error.

*Machine setting → Same as the time setting

Set value:20YY.MM.DD HH:MM:00

YY : 00~50

MM : 01~12

DD : 01~31

HH : 00~23

MM : 00~59

Returning to the last setting is allowed by pressing [FUNCTION] in the Date, Time Display State (not the

Entering State). (However, the time elapsed after the setting change is added.)

2-42

Functions

MEMORY CHECK

Variety of memory of the device is checked.

Note: No. of counts is displayed during the check.

*1 When data does not agrees, the check process is aborted, and memory address, write/read data at occurrence of the error

are displayed.

*2 As sector 1~10 used by parameter are passed, SUM value is not 0.

<Memory check>

Item Content

MAIN.SDRAM*1 Read/Write check of SDRAM

Select insert/not insert of wait time (30sec) between data write and read.

In the checking the following process is counted as 1 and repeat until [END] is input.

1. 00000000h is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM.

2.Read vacant data from address 0 to all area of SDRAM sequentially to confirm the reading meet the

writing data.

3. FFFFFFFFh is written into from address 0 to all area of SDRAM.


writing data.

5.Write increment data of 00010203h, 04050607h, ... FCFDFE00h into from address 0 to all area of

SDRAM.


writing data.

MAIN.S-RAM*1 Read/Write check of S-RAM


1.Write 00h in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h.

2.Write FFh in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh.

3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of S-RAM, confirm that

read value agrees.

MAIN.F-ROM Hash check of F-ROM.

In the checking, it is confirmed that long ward size SUM value from address 0 of F-ROM is

0001f000H*2, that is counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is input.

If the SUM value is not 0001f000H, the check process is aborted and an error is displayed.

BACKUP.SRAM*1 Read/Write check of back up S-RAM

Before starting the check, save contents of BACKUP.SRAM in F-ROM (sector 1,10).


1.Write 00h in from address 0 of backup S-RAM, confirm that read value is 00h

2.Write FFh in from address 0 of back up S-RAM, confirm that read value is FFh.

3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of backup SRAM,

confirm that read value agrees.

HEAD.EEPROM*1 Read/Write check of HEAD.EEPROM

Select a head unit to be checked.

Before starting the checking, save contents of EEPROM in S-RAM (head unit parameter area).


1.Write 00h in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is 00h

2.Write FFh in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM, confirm that read value is FFh.

3.Write increment data of 00h, 01h, 02h, ..., FDh, FEh, 00h, ...in from address 0 of HEAD.EEPROM,

confirm that read value agrees.

2-43


SKEW CHECK

Skewing of media is checked.

When media is not detected, an operation error (ERROR30) is displayed.

Feed distance is designated to execute feeding.

Feed distance: 1~500 m (unit: 1 m)

During the feeding, remaining of feed distance is displayed with unit of 10mm.

[END]: Feeding abort, [ENTER]: Start feeding again.

� Cut jig function

After the Skew check starts, (feed distance is not designated) the following operation starts the cut jig

function.

[REMOTE] → [FUNCTION]

The cut jig function repeats media cut → feed with designating feed distance and number of cut times.

Number of cut times is displayed in count down during cut.

Feed distance: 10~10000 mm (unit: 10 mm Default: 500 mm)

Number of cut times: 1~1000 count (unit: 1 count Default: 25 count)

TEMPERATURE.CHK

VOLTAGE CHECK

Stipulated voltage and actual voltage of each channel are displayed.

<Temperature check test>

Item Content

HEAD TEMP. Environment temperature of head is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).

Displaying of head temperature uses a unit selected in the UNIT SETUP of the MACHINE SETUP.

NOZZLE TEMP. Nozzle temperature error check is executed.

At Normal: OK is displayedAt error: NG is displayed

HEAT SINK TEMP. Temperature of HDC board heatsink is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).

Displaying of heatsink temperature uses a unit selected in the “UNIT SETUP” of the

MACHINE SETUP.

SLIDER TEMP. Temperature read from the thermistor on the slider PCB is displayed (A/D value is also displayed).

SIDE TEMP. Temperature read from the thermistor on the side board of device is displayed (A/D value is also

displayed).

Input channelStipulated

voltage

Analog input channel 2 3.3 V




2-44

Functions

I/F TEST

*1 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and a path in which the error occurs (CH1/CH2/STATUS) and

Write/Read data are displayed.

*2 When data does not agree, the check process is aborted, and SDRAM address where the error occurs and Write/Read data

are displayed.

<Interface test>

Item Content

LOOP BACK*1 Loop back test with I/F Board is executed.

Operations of 1~6 are counted as 1, the process is repeated until [END] is pressed.

During the check number of counts is displayed.

1.Write check data in REVERSE register.

2.Read check data from CH1 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data.


4.Read check data from CH2 data register, and check whether it agrees the written data.


6.Read check data from STATUS register, and check whether it agrees the written data.

The check prepares the following 6 types of data (size 256 kbs).(The test is conducted successively with 6 types of data per 1 path.)

00010203h,04050607h,08090A0Bh•••FCFDFEFFh

All 55555555h

All AAAAAAAAh

All 5555AAAAh

All AAAA5555h

All 55AA55AAh

MEMORY CHECK*2 Write/Read of I/F Board SDRAM (receive buffer & program area) is checked.

Number of counts is displayed during the check.

2-45


ENCODER TEST

INK CARTRIDGE

<Encoder test>

Item Content

LINEAR ENCODER Linear scale, Linear sensor are tested.

Moving a carriage with designated distance (3 reciprocatings), difference of linear encoder value and

Y-motor encoder value is displayed. If an error arises during the operation, the test is aborted.

Moving distance: 100 mm ~ Maximum actual operation limit (unit: 100 mm)

LCD display is as the following. (M∗: Y-motor encoder, E∗: linear encoder)

• Moving distance: M=∗∗∗∗.∗ E=∗∗∗∗.∗ (unit: 0.1 mm)

• Difference of encoder values before moving and after moving:Mc=∗∗∗∗.∗ Ec=∗∗∗∗.∗ (unit: 0.1 mm)

• Encoder values before moving: Ms=∗∗∗∗∗ Es=∗∗∗∗∗

• Encoder values after moving: Mm=∗∗∗∗∗ Em=∗∗∗∗∗

• Encoder values after moving with designated distance:Mr=∗∗∗∗∗ Er=∗∗∗∗∗

CUTTER ENCODER Linear scale, Linear sensor for media thickness detection are tested.

ON/OFF of Y-cutter is conducted at media exists position and media no-exists position on the platen,

media thickness and reading of linear sensor are displayed.

Media thickness: ∗.∗∗mm

Sensor reading value: Pr=h ∗∗∗∗ Mr=h ∗∗∗∗(Pr: reading on platen, Mr: reading on media)

MEDIA ENCODER Media encoder is tested.

Executing media OREFEED/BACKFEED under conditions shown below, motor encoder value,

media encoder value and their difference are displayed.

Feed speed: 1 ~ 150 mm/s (Default: 60 mm/s)

Feed acceleration: 0.01 ~ 0.50 G (Default: 0.20 G)

Feed distance: 127 mm ~ paper length* (unit: 1 mm Default: 127 mm) *If paper length can not be detected 1 ~ 500000 mm

POSITIONencoder Position encoder is tested

Reciprocating from head top most to the lowest position, encoder values at each of starting position

(Top most), position after moving (Lowest position), and end position (Top most) are displayed.

After the test, head height is returned to the position before test to end.

LCD display is as the following.

Es=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at starting position (Top most)

Em=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at position after moving (Lowest position)

Er=∗∗∗∗: Position encoder value at end position (Top most)

<Ink cartridge test>

Item Content

PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor.

A slot number on which an error (No cartridge, Ink near end) is found is displayed.

[–2–––––––––––––] (Example of LCD display)

CARTRIDGE VALVE Checking open/close of cartridge valve

CARTRIDGE LED Light/Off of cartridge LED is tested.

INK-IC CHECK Ink cartridge IC is checked.

In the check, IC chip data is read, number of occurrence of errors at each cartridge is displayed.

SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.

2-46

Functions

WASH CARTRIDGE

<Wash cartridge test>

Item Content

PACK&END SENSOR Displaying state of cartridge exist/non-exist sensor and end sensor

[ON, OFF] (Example of LCD display)

CARTRIDGE VALVE Open/Close of cartridge valve is checked.

IC CHECK Maintenance cleaning fluid IC is checked.

IC chip data is read to be checked and the number of error occurrences is displayed.

SolenoidVOLTAGE Solenoid voltage is set to 24V to check whether an abnormal voltage can be detected.

2-47


2-2-3. Special Key Function

A function executed with pressing certain key SW at starting the device, the function starts the device

with the following modes.

F/W update mode

Receiving ROM data from the host computer through USB2.0 I/F to update device F/W, or rewriting of

ink information.

Starting method: Starting with pressing [REMOTE]

In JV-5, the following updates are allowed.

• Main board F/W (Contain NCU board F/W)

• I/F board F/W (USB2.0, IEEEE 1394 )

Parameter Up/Down load mode

Parameter data, log data are Up/Down loaded via USB I/F with the Host computer.

Starting method: Starting with pressing [�] + [�].

Upload, Download is instructed by the host PC (F/W update tool) with an exclusive maintenance

command.

Fig.2-10

Maintenance Open Mode

Starts the device in maintenance open state

Starting method: Start with pressing [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION].

System Parameter Input Mode

Starts the device in system parameter input state of #PARAMETER function.

This function is for initializing parameters when starting of device is disabled to start because of

parameter hash error and so on.

Starting method: Starts with pressing [�] + [�] (Or starts with pressing [ENTER] + [END]).

<Special key mode>

Mode Starting operation State after reset

F/W update mode [REMOTE] + Power ON Keeping previous state

Parameter Up/Down load mode [�] + [�] + Power ON Keeping previous state

Maintenance open mode [REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] + Power ON User mode

System parameter input mode [�] + [�] + Power ON

or [ENTER] + [END] + Power ONUser mode

Upload

Download

USB I/F

JV-5 side Host PC side

2-48

Functions

2-2-4. PARAMETER Function

PARAMETER function is a function to confirm and set parameters in the device.

Note: While accessing F-ROM and HEAD.EEPROM, display [F-ROM WRITING] and light up BUSY LED (red).

No.1~6: Default selection is allowed

No.7~15:Selection is allowed only at the maintenance open

<Parameter function item>

No. Item Stored place Notice

1 SYSTEM PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

2 MAINTE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

3 CUSTOM PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

4 RUNNING PARAM. F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAM

5 EXCHANGE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

6 INKSYSTEM PARAM F-ROM sector 2

7 INKinfor.PARAM. F-ROM sector 2,8,9

8 INKSEQUENCEpara F-ROM sector 2,8,9

9 INKTYPE PARAM. F-ROM sector 2,8,9

10 HEADunit PARAM. F-ROM sector 1 /Backup SRAMHEAD.EEPROM

11 SERVO PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2

12 TEST PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2

13 CORRECT PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

14 ADJUST PARAM. F-ROM sector 2

15 NCU PARAMETER F-ROM sector 2

2-49


2-3. Operation Flow

2-3-1. Outline

The followings are items to be operational at the maintenance open. As for the operation flow at the

maintenance close, see the operation manual.

EnglishGermanFrenchSpanishItalianPortuguese

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

PRE PRT POST35°C 40°C 50°C

FUNCTIONSET UP <ENT> [ENTER]

SETUP

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTIONMAINTENANCE <ENT> [ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTIONDISPLAY <ENT> [ENTER]

DISPLAYJapanese <ent>

MAINTENANCE

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTIONMACHINE SETUP <ENT> [ENTER]

MACHINE SET

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTIONNCU <ENT> [ENTER]

NCU

[ENTER]

DISPLAYEnglish <ent>

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTION#ADJUST <ENT> [ENTER]

ADJUST

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTION#TEST <ENT> [ENTER]

TEST

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


FUNCTION#PARAMETER <ENT> [ENTER]

PARAMETER

*Display is switched to the selected language.

FUNCTION

Effective at the maintenance open. (not disclosed to users)

See p.2-51

See p.2-52

See p.2-54

See p.2-57

See p.2-61

See p.2-68

2-50

Operation Flow

2-3-2. SETUP

TYPE 2TYPE 3TYPE 4

[END]

SETUP

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


SET UPSELECT :TYPE 1

[END]


[1]MEDIA COMP. <ent>

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]


[1]MediaFeed SETUP <ent>

[�]/[�]


[1]MediaFeed SETUPFEED METHOD <ent>

[ENTER]/ [END]


[1]MediaFeed SETUPSPEED SWITCHING<ent>


[1]MediaFeed SETUPMOVEMENT TEST <ent>

INPUT RANGE 127 - 50000mm

[1]MOVEMENT TESTFEED LENGTH:150mm

[END]

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]/ [END]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[END]


[1]HEATER <ent>

[ENTER]

* When the feed difference is more than 0.4%, the following recommended settings are displayed.• FeedMETHOD [NORMAL]• Decrease feeding speed.

∗RESULT of MOV.TEST∗ FEED ERROR : 0.2%

[DIRECT]METHOD > OK100% SPEED > OK :ent

∗RESULT of MOV.TEST∗ FEED ERROR :0.5%

Recommendation is specified. :ent

Detecting operation

∗∗ RECOMMENDATION ∗∗

FeedMETHOD>[NORMAL]

or FeedSPEED>loweredCOMPLETED :ent

[1]MOVEMENT TESTTEST START :ent

[END]

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

* Input of FEED LENGTH isallowed at the maintenance open

2-51


2-3-3. MACHINE SET

MACHINE SET

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

STAMP SETUPSTAMP :OFF

MACHINE SETUPDRYNESS FEED <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPCONFIRM. FEED <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[ENTER][END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPTIME SET <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPUNIT SETUP <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPMACHINE NAME <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

STAMP SETUPITEM <ent>

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPSTAMP SETUP <ent>

[END]

[FUNCTION]

TEST DRAW: PAGE No OFF : OFF

STAMP SETUPPRINT :ONLINE

[ENTER][END]

[ENTER]

[ENTER][END]

[ENTER]

:ON

PRINT :ALL

* Test drawing and page No. can be added to the standard stamp items at the maintenance open.Stamping on the built-in drawing is also allowed other than on-line drawing.

MACHINE SETUPMRL COMMAND <ent> [END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SETUPINFORMATION <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

INFORMATIONERROR HISTORY <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

INFORMATIONMAINTE. HISTORY <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

INFORMATIONPRT.modeHISTORY<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

INFORMATIONLIST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

INFORMATIONVERSION <ent>

JV5-160S V1.00 JV5-160S V1.00

USB-I/F V1.00 MRL-III V1.00

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

[END] / [�]

[ENTER] / [�]

FPGA-PDC V1.00 FPGA-HDC V1.00

STAMP SETUPPRINT EXTEND <ent>

MACHINE SETUPDEODORIZE FAN <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

MACHINE SET 2/2 See p.2-53

* Confirmation of FPGA version is also allowed in the maintenance mode.

2-52

Operation Flow

INFORMATIONSerial&DealerNo<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

[END]

[ENTER]

INFORMATIONEVENT LOG <ent>

EVENT LOG [ 0]0823-01-01.0000.0000

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

EVENT LOG [ -1]2307-01-02.0000.0000

[�]/[�]

EVENT LOG [-1234]0000-00-00.0000.0000

[�]/[�]

[END]

[ENTER]

INFORMATIONREPLACE COUNTER<ent>

REPLACE COUNTERCARTRIDGE <ent>

[�]/[�]

[END]

[ENTER]REPLACE COUNTERCART. 1 : 0

REPLACE COUNTERSCAN COUNT <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERSCAN : 0

MACHINE SET 2/2

[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERUSE TIME <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERTIME : 0h[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERWIPING(WIPER) <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERWIPER : 0[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERWIPING(HEAD) <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERHEAD 1: 0[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERSHOT COUNT <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERSELECT :HEAD1

[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERPumpRotationCNT <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERPUMP 1: 0[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERPRINT LENGTH <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERLENGTH : 0m

[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERDRAW AREA <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERAREA : 0m2

[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERSLEEP REFRESH <ent>

[ENTER]

TIME : 0H 00MCNT : 0[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERSLEEP CLEANING <ent>

[ENTER]

TIME : 0H 00MCNT : 0[END]

[�]/[�]

REPLACE COUNTERSLEEP TUBE WASH<ent>

[ENTER]

TIME : 0H 00MCNT : 0

[END]

REPLACE COUNTERINK PIC <ent>

[ENTER]

REPLACE COUNTERCART.1 : 0[END]

CART. 1~16

* Set to 0 at wiper replacement.

HEAD 1~4

* Corresponding number of times is set to 0 at head replacement.

HEAD1~4

[ENTER]

[END]

Head∗-A~H

H1A:ALL =123,456,789 Sdot= 13,579,135

Mdot= 68,024,680 Ldot= 41,852,974

PUMP 1~4

* Corresponding number of times is set to 0 at replacement of the pump.

[�]/[�]

CART.1~16

* Replace counter (operation state of the JV-5) can be confirmed in the maintenance mode.

See p.2-52

* Registered content of the E-LOG parameter is displayed in the maintenance mode for the simplicity.

2-53


2-3-4. NCU

NCU

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

NCUNG ACTION <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

NCUNG JUDGEMENT <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

NCUCOND.INDICATION<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

NCU#TEST <ent>

NCUNOZZLE CHECK <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-52

* The TEST MENU of NCU is added in the maintenance mode.

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

NCU#NCU LD RESET <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#NCU LD RESETLDcons.ELcurr. :RESET

[ENTER]

∗∗ Being LD-reset ∗∗

PLEASE WAIT

∗∗RESET COMPLETION∗∗


!! RESET FAILURE !!


As for the detail of “NCU LD RESET”

( p.2-25) .Normal Abnormal

End

2-54

Operation Flow

� NCU TEST1

NCU TEST

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTNOZZLE CHK TEST<ent>

[�]/[�]

#NOZZLE CHK TESTSEL. : EVEN-NUM. NZL.

Testing operation

[END]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

NCU#TEST <ent>

As for the detail of “TEST” ( p.2-24) .

#NOZZLE CHK TEST EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES

Y-Dpi : Speed 540 : x1

[ENTER]

540dpi. x1Speed EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES

#NOZZLE CHK TESTTEST START :ent

540dpi. x1Speed EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES

∗∗∗ TEST RUNTIME ∗∗∗PLEASE WAIT

#RESULT EVEN-NUM. NOZZLES

Nzl-A:0Nzl-B:0

Nzl-A ~ H

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

(Continued to next page)

(To the previous page )

[END]

#NOZZLE CHK TESTSEL. : ODD-NUM. NZL.

Testing operation

[ENTER]

#NOZZLE CHK TEST ODD-NUM. NOZZLES


[ENTER]

540dpi. x1Speed ODD-NUM. NOZZLES


540dpi. x1Speed ODD-NUM. NOZZLES


#RESULT ODD-NUM. NOZZLES

Nzl-A:0Nzl-B:0

Nzl-A ~ H

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

[END]

#NOZZLE CHK TESTSEL. : EVEN & ODD NZL.

Testing operation

[ENTER]

#NOZZLE CHK TEST EVEN & ODD NOZZLES


[ENTER]

540dpi. x1Speed EVEN & ODD NOZZLES


540dpi. x1Speed EVEN & ODD NOZZLES


#RESULT EVEN & ODD NOZZLES

Nzl-A:0Nzl-B:0

Nzl-A ~ H

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

[END]

#NOZZLE CHK TESTSEL. : ALL NOZZLES

Testing operation

[ENTER]

#NOZZLE CHK TEST ALL NOZZLES

Y-Dpi : Speed :CONT. 540 : x1 : ON

[ENTER]

540dpi. x1Speed. CONT. ALL NOZZLES


540dpi. x1Speed. CONT. ALL NOZZLES


#RESULT ALL NOZZLES

Nzl-A:0Nzl-B:0

Nzl-A ~ H

[ENTER]

2-55


NCU TEST2

[�]/[�]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTSDRAM CHECK <ent>

[�]/[�]

#SDRAM CHECKTEST START :ent

#SDRAM CHECKCNT:1

NCU SDRAM ERRORaddress = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗[END]

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTLDconsu.ELcurr. <ent>

[�]/[�]

#LDconsum.EL-currentTEST START :ent

∗∗ NCU TESTING ∗∗PLEASE WAIT

Testing operation

∗∗∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗∗∗

#LDconsum.EL-currentVALUE = ∗∗.∗mA

∗∗∗∗ ERROR 161 ∗∗∗∗

NCU CONSUMPTION

#LDconsum.EL-currentVALUE = ∗∗.∗mA

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTLINE VOLTAGE <ent>

[�]/[�]

#LINE VOLTAGETEST START :ent


Testing operation


#LINE VOLTAGEVALUE = ∗.∗V

∗∗∗∗ ERROR 162 ∗∗∗∗

NCU LINE VOLTAGE

#LINE VOLTAGEVALUE = ∗.∗V

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTLD&SensorTEST <ent>

[�]/[�]

#LD&SensorTESTTEST START :ent


Testing operation


#LD&SensorTESTSENSOR LEVEL = 255

∗∗∗∗ ERROR 163 ∗∗∗∗

NCU SENSOR DETECT

#LD&SensorTESTSENSOR LEVEL = 0

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTF-ROM CHECK <ent>

#F-ROM CHECKTEST START :ent

#F-ROM CHECKCNT:1

NCU F-ROM CHECK ERROR ROM HASH

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTSERIAL CHECK <ent>

[�]/[�]

#SERIAL CHECKTEST START :ent


Testing operation



∗∗∗∗ ERROR 116 ∗∗∗∗

NCU I/F nn


[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTLASER TEMP.CHK <ent>

#LASER TEMP.CHKTEMP.Acquisition :ent

∗∗TEMP.Acquisition∗∗PLEASE WAIT

#LASER TEMP.CHK 50°C (1234)

[END]

[ENTER]

Testing operation

[END]

[END]

[END]

[END]

[END]

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

~Display of Result~

2-56

Operation Flow

2-3-5. ADJUST

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#ADJUSTHEAD ADJUST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

ADJUST 1/2

#ADJUSTHEAD WASH <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#ADJUSTMANUALhead WASH<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

A head to absorb ischosen.

MANUALhead WASHHEAD SELECT :12.34

[END]

[ENTER]

MANUALhead WASHSUCTION START :ent

Being ABSORBED

MANUALhead WASHCOMPLETED :ent

Waste ink tank error check

Normal[END]

[ENTER]

Abnormal

[ENTER] [ENTER]

Recovered

#ADJUSTDEFAULT SET <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#DEFAULT SETSETUP PARAMETER<ent>

#DEFAULT SETHEADunit PARAM.<ent>

[�]/[�]

#DEFAULT SETSERVO PARAMETER<ent>

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#DEFAULT SETUNIT SELECT :ALL

[ENTER]

SETUP PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK? :ent

[ENTER]

HEAD UNIT-ALL PARAM.INITIALIZE OK? :ent

SERVO PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK? :ent

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

Parameterinitialization

[ENTER]



MAINTE. PARAM. <ent>CUSTOM. PARAM. <ent>RUNNING PARAM. <ent>EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent>INKSYSTEMparam.<ent>INKinfor.PARAM.<ent>INKSEQUENCEpara<ent>INKTYPE PARAM. <ent>

MAINTENANCEparameterCUSTOMIZE PARAMETERRUNNING PARAMETEREXCHANGE PARAMETERINK-SYSTEM PARAMETERINK INFOR. PARAMETERINKsequencePARAMETERINK-TYPE PARAMETER

UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1~4 UNIT-1~4

TEST PARAMETER <ent>CORRECT PARAM. <ent>ADJUST PARAM. <ent>NCU PARAMETER <ent>

TEST PARAMETERCORRECT PARAMETERADJUST PARAMETERNCU PARAMETER

#ADJUSTHEAD ID <ent>

[ENTER]

#HEAD IDSELECT :HEAD-1

#ADJUSTCAPPING <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

UP:^ V:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGLOWER POS. = 0.0mm

[ENTER]

LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGCAPPING POS= 0.0mm

[ENTER]

UP:^ V:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGCAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm

REAR:< >:FRONT (-20 - +20)

#CAPPINGWipwePOS(X)= 0mm

[ENTER]

UP:^ V:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGWiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm

LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGWiperPOS(Y)= 0.0mm

[ENTER] [ENTER]

[ENTER]

#CAPPINGNCU HEIGHT = 0.0mm

End

#ADJUSTBasisHEADheight <ent>

[ENTER]

Height 2.0mm is adjusted by hand.

#BasisHEADheightCOMPLETED :ent

[ENTER]

#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

[ENTER]

#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2) ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

SELECT :HEAD-1~4

See p.2-58

As for the detail of “ADJUST Function” ( p.2-26) .

See p.2-59

See p.2-60

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

No waste ink tank,or a tank is FULL.

<ENT>keyHIT is aftertheTANK set or exchg

Replace awaste ink tank.

<ENT>keyHIT is afterthe TANK exchange.

∗∗ Being ADJUSTED ∗∗PLEASE WAIT

#CAPPINGNCU HEIGHT = ∗.∗mm

2-57


ADJUST 2/2

#ADJUSTMOTOR CURRENT <ent>

[ENTER]

#ADJUSTMEDIA COMP.2 <ent>

[ENTER]

#ADJUSTSERIAL No <ent>

[ENTER]

#SERIAL No ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent>

[^] CurrentValueUP[V] CurrentValueDOWN

X = 0 Y = 0 (∗∗∗∗) (∗∗∗∗)

[ENTER]

0~255

[�]/[�]

#MOTOR CURRENTX MOVING ADJUST<ent>

#X MOVING ADJUST

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

#XmovingADJUST ∗RUN∗

xxx (∗∗∗∗)

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

Operationstart

[ENTER]

[END]

[�]/[�]

#MOTOR CURRENTY MOVING ADJUST<ent>

#Y MOVING ADJUST

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm

#YmovingADJUST ∗RUN∗

xxx (∗∗∗∗)

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm

Operationstart

[ENTER]

[END]

[�]/[�] : Value change[�]/ [�] : Column shift[ENTER] : Setting

#ADJUSTDEALER No <ent>

[ENTER]

#DEALER No ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

[�]/[�] : Value change[�]/ [�] : Column shift[ENTER] : Setting

#ADJUSTEDGE ADJUST <ent>

[ENTER]

#EDGE ADJUSTCLEAR< >PRINT

[�]Adjust pattern drawing

Adjusted value clear[�]

End of drawing/[END]

INPUT RANGE 0.0 - 35.0

#EDGE ADJUST L=15.0 R=15.0

#ADJUSTMEDIA ENCODER <ent>

[ENTER]

#MEDIA ENCODERADJUST START :ent

[ENTER]

Automatic decentering compensation

0:∗∗ 1:∗∗ 2:∗∗ 3:∗∗4:∗∗ 5:∗∗ 6:∗∗ 7:∗∗

8:∗∗ 9:∗∗COMPLETED :ent

Normal

ADJUST FINISHED∗ ORG.DETECT ERROR ∗

#MEDIA ENCODERCOMPLETED :ent

ADJUST FINISHED∗ ENC. COUNT ERROR ∗

#MEDIA ENCODERCOMPLETED :ent

Abnormal

#MEDIA COMP.2PRINT START :ent

INPUT RANGE -500 - +500

#MEDIA COMP.2VALUE = 0

[ENTER]

Adjust pattern drawing

[�]

End of drawing / [END]

#ADJUSTEXCHANGE PARTS<ent>

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

#EXCHANGE PARTSREGISTRATION <ent>

[ENTER]

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :PUMP

[ENTER]

INPUT ITEMDate, PumpNo.

∗PUMP 05.07.?? : No.?

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :CAP

INPUT ITEMDate, CapNo.

∗CAP 05.07.?? : No.?

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :DUMPER

INPUT ITEMDate, HeadNo. NzlNo.

∗DUMPER 05.07.?? : No.?-?

[�]/[�]

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :NCUsensorUNIT

INPUT ITEMDate

∗NCUsensorUNIT 05.07.??

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#EXCHANGE PARTSHISTORY <ent>

[ENTER]

∗∗ There is no ∗∗∗∗ HISTORY ∗∗

History indication

∗HEAD[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2

[�]/[�]

∗PUMP[ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1

∗CAP[ 2] 06.08.15 : No.4

[�]/[�]

∗DUMPER[ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E

[�]/[�]

if there is nohistory record

See p.2-57

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

2-58

Operation Flow

HEAD ADJUST

[END]

[ENTER]

#HEAD ADJUSTSLANT ADJUST <ent>

#HEAD ADJUSTSTAGGER ADJUST<ent>

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#SLANT ADJUSTHEAD SELECT :1234

#STAGGER ADJUSTHEAD SELECT :1-2

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234PRINT START :ent

#STAG ADJ./HEAD=ALLPRINT START :ent

[ENTER]

* JOG operation is allowed


[ENTER]


[ENTER]

HEAD SELECT :2-3 HEAD SELECT :3-4 HEAD SELECT :ALL

#HEAD ADJUSTDROP.POS ADJUST<ent>

[�]/[�]

#DROP POS. MODESELECT :HiSPEED SCAN

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsGAP SELECT :Low

[ENTER] [ENTER]

#HEAD ADJUSTDROPposCONFIRM.<ent>

[�]/[�]

#DROPposCONFIRM.PRINT START :ent

[ENTER] [ENTER]

Confirmation pattern drawing


SELECT :Normal-SCAN GAP SELECT :High

#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT :Y BASE [ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE DRAW :ent

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]


#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE 1-2 : 0. 0

[�]

1-31-4


#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT :DRAFT

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :Y Si

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Si DRAW :ent

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Si H1-H2 : 0. 0

[�]

H1-H3, H1-H4End of drawing/[END]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :Y Re

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Re DRAW :ent

[ENTER]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Re H1-H2 : 0. 0

[�]


[�]/[�]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :Y Bi

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Bi DRAW :ent

[ENTER]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0

[�]


[�]/[�]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :FINE Y Si

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Si DRAW :ent

[ENTER]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Si H1-H2 : 0. 0

[�]


[�]/[�]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :FINE Y Re

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Re DRAW :ent

[ENTER]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Re H1-H2 : 0. 0

[�]


[�]/[�]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :FINE Y Bi

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent

[ENTER]


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Bi H1-H1 : 0. 0

[�]


#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT :BASIS SET

[ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLgBASIS SET :ent

[�]/[�]

SELECT :FINE

H1-H3, H1-H4

H1-H3,H1-H4

H1-H3,H1-H4

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]


ADJUST 1/2

#ADJUSTHEAD WASH <ent>

See p.2-57









2-59


HEAD WASH

Ink discharge.Remove cartridges.

MMCC YYKK KKYY CCMM

Confirmation of the state

NG

OK

Being dischargedPLEASE WAIT

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

End of discharge

NG

OK

Set all washing liquid cartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)

It is being absorbedPLEASE WAIT

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

NG

Remove all wshing liquid cartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

It'sBeingDischarged.PLEASE WAIT

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

Is thewaste ink tank normal

?

Is thedischarging state normal

?

Is the waste ink

tank normal?

End of suction

OK

Isthe suction state

normal?


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)

Is the waste ink tank normal

?

NG

End of discharge

OK

Is the discharge state normal

?

Set all washing liquid cartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG


NG

OK[ENTER]

(Recovered)

It is being absorbedPLEASE WAIT

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––


?

NG

End of suction

OK

Is the suction state normal

?

Remove all wshing liquid cartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG


∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)


?

NG

End of discharge

OK


?

WIPER CLEANING

COMPLETED :ent


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)

It is being absorbed Please Wait

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––


?

NG

End of suction

OK


?

>:TransLiquidAbsorbev: It is washed again

END < >CONTINUE V WASH

[ENTER]

ADJUSTHEAD WASH <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

[�]

[�]

[�]

Set all TRANS liquidcartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

A

A

Remove all TRANSliquid cartridges.

1234 5678 9ABC DEFG


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)


?

Being Discharged. Please Wait

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

(Recovered)

NG

End of discharge

OK


?

Do you discharge amainte.wash.liquid ?

No < > Yes


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)

It is being absorbed Please Wait

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––


?

NG

End of suction

OK


?

Remove a maint.wash. liquid cartridge.

There is a CARTRIDGE

[�]

Set a TRANS liquidcartridges.

CARTRIDGE : none

Remove a TRANSliquid cartridges.



NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)


?

Being Discharged.Please Wait

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

NG

End of discharge

OK


?

[�]

End of discharge

Being Discharged. Please Wait

∗∗∗∗∗∗––––––––––––––

>:TransLiquidAbsorbe

END< >CONTINUE[�]

[�]


NG

OK

Waste tank

WARNING

[ENTER]

(Recovered)


?

End of discharge

Replace a waste ink tank.<ENT>keyHIT is afterthe TANK exchange.

No waste ink tank, or a tank is FULL.<ENT>keyHIT is aftertheTANK set or exchg

Waste tank WARNING

See p.2-57 As for the detail of “HEAD WASH” ( p.2-27) .

Waste tank

WARNING

2-60

Operation Flow

2-3-6. TEST

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTCHECK PATTERN <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

TEST 1/4As for the detail of “TEST Function” ( p.2-33) .

[�]/ [�]

#CHECK PATTERNPATTERN:100%

[END]

[ENTER]

PATTERN:50%PATTERN:25%PATTERN:12.5%PATTERN:6.25%PATTERN:NOZZLE CHECK

DPI :360x360SCAN:Uni-D / PASS:1

X=123450 Y=1234COLOR :KMCY

[ENTER]

[�]/ [�]

#CHECK PATTERNPATTERN:COLOR CHART

[END]

[ENTER]


X=123450 Y=1234DENSITY :ALL

[ENTER]

6 colors= :KMCYmc8 colors= :KMCY1234

#CHECK PATTERNPATTERN:DROP/POS CHK

[END]

[ENTER]


X=123450 Y=1234[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTPARAMETER DRAW <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[�]/ [�]

#PARAMETER DRAWSYSTEM PARAM. <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

MAINTE PARAM. <ent>CUSTOM PARAM. <ent>RUNNING PARAM. <ent>EXCHANGE PARAM.<ent>INKSYSTEM PARAM<ent>INKinfor.PARAM. <ent>INKSEQUENCEpara <ent>INK TYPE PARAM. <ent>

PARAMETER

DRAWING

#PARAMETER DRAWDRAW(SYSTEM) :ent

[ENTER]

[�]/ [�]

#PARAMETER DRAWHEADunit PARAM. <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

UNIT SELECT :UNIT-1UNIT SELECT :UNIT-2UNIT SELECT :UNIT-3UNIT SELECT :UNIT-4

#PARAMETER DRAWUNIT SELECT :ALL

[END]

[ENTER]

DRAW(UNIT-1) :entDRAW(UNIT-2) :entDRAW(UNIT-3) :entDRAW(UNIT-4) :ent

#PARAMETER DRAWDRAW(UNIT-ALL) :ent

[ENTER]

#PARAMETER DRAWSERVO PARAMETER<ent>

TEST PARAMETER <ent>CORRECT PARAM. <ent>ADJUST PARAM. <ent>NCU PARAMETER <ent>

DRAW(TEST) :entDRAW(CORRECT) :entDRAW(ADJUST) :entDRAW(NCU) :ent

#PARAMETER DRAWDRAW(SERVO) :ent

[ENTER]

DRAW(MAINTE) :entDRAW(CUSTOMIZE) :entDRAW(RUNNING) :entDRAW(EXCHANGE) :entDRAW(INKSYSTEM) :entDRAW(INKINFO) :entDRAW(INKSEQ.) :entDRAW(INK TYPE) :ent

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTALL PATTERN <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#ALL PATTERNDRAW :ent

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

TEST DRAWING

[TEST][ENTER]/ [END]

#CHECK PATTERN100%Hi-SPEED SCAN :OFF

:ON

PRE PRT AFT 35°C 40°C 50°C

#CHECK PATTERN/100%DRAW :ent

[ENTER]PATTERN

DRAWING


360x360. W1. 4P.Unix1. H1234 0.00m

Alternatively displayed at drawing

JOG operation is allowed

[REMOTE]


40°C 50°C 35°C ( 35 40 50 )

[HEATER] / [END] / 30sec / Error

[HEATER]


[�]/ [�] : Select (Pre/Print/After)[�]/[�] : Adjust temperature

Range PRE : OFF, 20~60PRT : OFF, 20~60AFT : OFF, 20~70

PARAMETER

DRAWING

PARAMETER

DRAWING

2-61


[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTMOTOR TEST <ent>

TEST 2/4


#HEATER TESTTEMPERATURE <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-65

#TESTHEATER TEST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]


40°C 50°C 35°C ( 35 40 50 )

[HEATER]

[ENTER]


#HEATER TESTLED <ent>

#HEATER TEST /LED PRE PRT AFT

HEAT :OFF OFF OFFCONST.:OFF OFF OFF

[HEATER]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�] : Select (Pre/Print/After)[�]/[�] : Switch (ON/OFF)

[�]/[�]


#HEATER TESTSSR <ent>


<15F> <1E2> <1F0> OFF OFF OFF

[HEATER]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]


#HEATER TESTPOWER RELAY SW<ent>


#POWER RELAY SW ON

[HEATER]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�] : Switch (ON/OFF)

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

HD1 HD2 HD3 HD4 40 40 40 40 [°C]

40 40 40 40:R-SW . o . o : ON

#TESTWARMING TEST <ent>

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

Change conditionIN UP/DOWN KEY.

#ACTION TESTVACUUM FAN :LOW

#TESTSENSOR TEST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

:MID :HIGH :L.L. :Poff [�]/[�]


#ACTION TESTBUILTinDEOD.FAN :OFF

[END]

[ENTER]

:ON [�]/[�]

[�]/[�]


#ACTION TESTFS FAN :LOW

[END]

[ENTER]

:MID :HIGH :L.L. :Poff

#ACTION TESTY-CUTTER :DOWN

:UP

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#ACTION TESTSUCK VALVE-1 :CLOSE

:OPEN

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#ACTION TESTSUCK VALVE-2 :CLOSE

:OPEN

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#ACTION TESTWIPERwashVALVE:CLOSE

:OPEN

[�]/[�]

#ACTION TESTHDC FAN :OFF

:ON

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

DEOD.FAN & DRY FAN OFF OFF

ON ON

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#SENSOR TESTSET LEVER :OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTR.PAPTER :OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTY-ORIGIN :OFF

#TESTACTION TEST <ent>

[ENTER]

[END]

[END]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTSTATION :OFF

#SENSOR TESTWIPER :OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTFRONT COVER :OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTWasteTANK :OFF/OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTHEATER POW :OFF

[�]/[�]

#SENSOR TESTTAKE-UP :OFF

[�]/ [�]

#SENSOR TESTMEDIA JAM :OFF

[�]/ [�]

#SENSOR TESTINK LEAK :OFF

[�]/ [�]

#SENSOR TESTInterlock CABLE :OFF

[�]/[�] [�]/[�](Continued to next page)


[�]/[�] : Select (Pre/Print/After)[�]/[�] : Switch (ON/OFF)

* Heater temperature control is cut off.Temperature and AD input value are displayed in a range of 0~100 °C.

[�]/[�] : Select (Pre/Print/After)[�]/[�] : Adjust temperature


2-62

Operation Flow

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTCAP SENSOR <ent>

TEST 3/4

Indication of a name of the pushed key.

#KEYBOARD TESTKey-> NONE

[END]

[ENTER]

#TESTKEYBOARD TEST <ent>

[ENTER]

Test is finished.

#KEYBOARD TEST[END]-> END TEST

#CAP SENSOR ON (∗∗∗)

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTPAPER SENSOR <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#PAPER SENSOR ∗∗∗( ∗∗∗, ∗∗∗) JOG operation

is allowed

[END]

#KEYBOARD TESTKey->[USER TYPE]Key->[INFORMAITION]Key->[ST.MAINTE]Key->[HEATER]Key->[TEST]Key->[LEFT]Key->[UP]Key->[DOWN]Key->[RIGHT]Key->[CLEANING]Key->[FEED COMP.]Key->[CLEAR]Key->[FUNCTION]Key->[REMOTE]Key->[ENTER]

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

#TESTLCD TEST <ent>

[ENTER]

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

""""""""""""""""""""

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

""""""""""""""""""""

####################

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

""""""""""""""""""""

####################$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

[END]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

* Displayed items are changed at predetermined interval and at 1 line unit.[END]

Push and Change ENTER key.

#TIMER CHECK2005.01.01 01:23:45

#TESTTIMER CHECK <ent>

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[END]

[ENTER] KEY : SET UP[END] KEY : CANCEL

#TIMER CHECK2005.01.01 01:23:00

[ENTER]/[END]

2006.11.23 09:15-> 2005.12.13 11:50

#TIMER CHECKDoYou change it? :ent[�]/[�] : Changing values

[�]/[�] : Shifting columns[ENTER] : Set ( Starting at 0 second)

FUNC. It's returned before the change.

#TIMER CHECK2006.11.23 09:15:00

2006.11.23 09:15-> 2005.12.13 11:50

#TIMER CHECKDoYou return it?:ent

[ENTER]/[END]

[FUNCTION]

* A display after setting a future time

ON:30secWaitAftWrite(SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB)

#MEMORY CHECKWAIT TIME :OFF

#TESTMEMORY CHECK <ent>

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[END]

#MEMORY CHECKCHECK:MAIN.SDRAM

[ENTER]

∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗(SDRAM SIZE = 0.5GB)

#MAIN.SDRAM CHECKCOUNT= 1

[ENTER]

[END]

RESTART

∗ MAIN.SDRAM ERROR ∗address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

(ERROR)

[�]/[�]

#MEMORY CHECKCHECK:MAIN.S-RAM

∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗

#MAIN.S-RAM CHECKCOUNT= 1

[ENTER]

[END]

RESTART

∗ MAIN.S-RAM ERROR ∗address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗


(ERROR)

:ON

[�]/[�]

#MEMORY CHECKCHECK:MAIN.F-ROM


#MAIN.F-ROM CHECKCOUNT= 1

[ENTER]

[END]

RESTART

∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 85 ∗∗∗∗∗ ROM HASH

(ERROR)

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

HALT !



* Returning to the setting before previous setting is allowed.

Change-1 → Change-2 → Return ⇒ Returning to Change-2 can be allowed (returning to Change-1 is not allowed).However, elapsing time after changing to the time before changing is added.

2-63


TEST 4/4

#MEMORY CHECKSELECT :HEAD-1

#MEMORY CHECKCHECK:HEAD.EEPROM

[ENTER]


#HEAD-1.EEPROM CHECKCOUNT= 1

[ENTER]

[END]

RESTART

∗HEAD1.EEPROM ERROR∗address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

(ERROR)

#MEMORY CHECKCHECK:BACKUP.SRAM


#BACKUP.SRAM CHECKCOUNT= 1

[ENTER]

[END]

RESTART

∗BACKUP.SRAM ERROR∗address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

WriteData=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

Read Data=h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗

(ERROR)

SELECT :HEAD-2SELECT :HEAD-3SELECT :HEAD-4

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#TESTSKEW CHECK <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#SKEW CHECKFEED :1m

[ENTER]

#SKEW CHECK∗∗ FEED :1m ∗∗

INPUT RANGE 10 - 10000mm

#MEDIA CUTTING TOOLLENGTH :500mm

INPUT RANGE 1 - 1000

#MEDIA CUTTING TOOLCOUNT :10

#MEDIA CUTTING TOOLCOUNT :10

[ENTER][ENTER]

[REMOTE] + [FUNCTION]* A cycle of 1 ~ 3 is repeated

predetermined times.1. Designated length feed2. Width detection3. Cut#TEST

TEMPERATURE.CHK<ent>[END]

[ENTER]

#TEMPERATURE.CHKHEAD TEMP. <ent>

HEAD-1= ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD-2= ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

HEAD-3= ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD-4= ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

[�]/ [�]

#TEMPERATURE.CHKNOZZLE TEMP. <ent>

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

#TEMPERATURE.CHKHEAT SINK TEMP.<ent>

HEAD1-1=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD1-2=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

HEAD2-1=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD2-2=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

[ENTER]

HEAD-1=OK HEAD-2=NGHEAD-3=OK HEAD-4=OK

HEAD3-1=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD3-2=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

HEAD4-1=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)HEAD4-2=∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

[�]/ [�]

#TEMPERATURE.CHKSLIDER TEMP. <ent>

[ENTER]

#SLIDER TEMP. ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

[�]/ [�]

#TEMPERATURE.CHKSIDE TEMP. <ent>

[ENTER]

#SIDE TEMP. ∗∗∗°C (∗∗∗∗)

#TESTVOLTAGE CHECK <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

3.3V -> 3.3V (∗∗∗∗) 5V -> 5.0V (∗∗∗∗)

24V -> 24.0V (∗∗∗∗)42V -> 42.0V (∗∗∗∗)

#TESTI/F TEST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

#I/F TESTLOOP BACK <ent>

[�]/ [�]

#I/F TESTMEMORY CHECK <ent>

∗I/F.LoopBack ERROR∗

ABN.COURSE=> CH1(DMA)


∗ I/F.MOMORY ERROR ∗address = h'∗∗∗∗∗∗∗∗


[ENTER]I/F.LOOP BACKCOUNT=1

I/F.MEMORY CHECKCOUNT=1

[ENTER]

(ERROR)

(ERROR)

#TESTENCODER TEST <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-66

#TESTINK CARTRIDGE <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-67

#TESTWASH CARTRIDGE <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-67


[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

2-64

Operation Flow

�MOTOR TEST

#TESTMOTOR TEST <ent>

#MOTOR TESTX SERVO MOTOR <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-62

#X SERVO MOTOR

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[ENTER]

Operation start

[ENTER]

#X SERVO ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[END]


40°C 50°C 35°C ( 35 40 50 )

#MOTOR TESTY SERVO MOTOR <ent>

#Y SERVO MOTOR

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#Y SERVO ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[END]

[�]/[�]

#MOTOR TESTXY SERVO MOTOR<ent>

#XY SERVO MOTOR

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#XYservo ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GX=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[�]/[�]

[ENTER][END]

#XY SERVO MOTOR

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm

[ENTER] #XYservo ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

S=∗∗∗mm/s A=∗.∗∗GY=∗∗∗∗∗mm[END]

[FUNCTION]

#MOTOR TESTWIPER MOTOR <ent>

100pps : 0s :1,CONT4000 : 60 :1000

SPEED :WAIT :COUNT 100 : 0 :CONT.

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

WIPER ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0


[END]

[�]/[�]

Return to the state before starting the test

(End of count)

#MOTOR TESTCAP MOTOR <ent>

100pps : 0s :1,CONT4000 : 60 :1000


[ENTER]

[ENTER]

CAP ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0


[END]

(Head moving•cap ON)

(End of count)

* Terminate with END key at CONTINUE

[HEATER]/[END]/30second/Error

[HEATER]

[�]/[�]

#MOTOR TESTHEADup/downMTR <ent>

100pps : 0s :1,CONT4000 : 60 :1000


[ENTER]

[ENTER]

Headup/down∗RUNNING∗COUNT= 0


[END]

(Return to the state before starting the test)

(End of count)[�]/[�]

#MOTOR TESTPUMP MOTOR <ent>

PUMP MOTOR SELECT.

PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW. SPD=1017

[ENTER]

Cap OFF• valve close test operation start

[ENTER]

PUMP ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

PUMP=1234 DIR=FORW. SPD=1017

[END]

(Return to the state before starting the test)

(End of count)[�]/[�]

*1 *1

FORW. / REVR.

100 - 4000pps

A guide corresponding to the cursor set position is dis-

#MOTOR TESTTAKE-UP TORQUE <ent>

1000pps: 0s4000 : 60

SPEED :WAIT100 : 0

[ENTER]

TORQUE ∗ RUNNING ∗COUNT= 0

SPEED :WAIT100 : 0

[�]/[�]

[ENTER]

#MOTOR TESTTAKE-UP MOTOR <ent>

#TAKE-UP MOTORSTART :ent

∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ [PROPER ROTATION]

#TAKE-UP MOTORSTART :ent

[�]/[�]

Test Operation start

[ENTER]

∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ [REVERSE ROTATION]

∗∗∗ RUNNING ∗∗∗ [STOP]

Operation start

Operation start

Test Operation start

100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit)




FORW. / REVER. CONT. /100~4000

100~4000 pps (at 100 pps unit)CONTINUE, 1~1000 times (at 1 time unit)

Moving to the sta-tion lowest positionoperation start

Cap OFF• head movingtest operation

Cap OFFtest operation start



[�]/[�] : Select (Pre/Print/After)[�]/[�] : Adjust temperature


2-65


� ENCODER TEST

#TESTENCODER TEST <ent>

#ENCODER TESTLINEAR ENCODER <ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-64

#LINEAR ENCODERActiveWIDTH :∗∗∗∗mm

[ENTER]

Check operation:3 times

reciprocating

[ENTER]

#ENCODER TESTResult of a test

M =∗∗∗∗.∗ E =∗∗∗∗.∗Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0

#ENCODER TESTCUTTER ENCODER<ent>

#CUTTER ENCODERCHECK :ent

[�]/[�]∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 08 ∗∗∗∗∗LinearENCODER :SENSOR

#ENCODER TESTActiveWIDHT :∗∗∗∗mm

<< Coord.Of point >>Ms =∗∗∗∗∗∗ Es= ∗∗∗∗∗

Mm=∗∗∗∗∗∗ Em=∗∗∗∗∗Mr =∗∗∗∗∗∗ Er= ∗∗∗∗∗

(Normal END) [FUNCTION]

<<CommonCoord.SYS>>ERR(ME-LE) = ∗∗.∗∗mm

MotorENC = ∗∗∗∗.∗∗mmLinearEND = ∗∗∗∗.∗∗mm

[�]/[�]

#MEDIA ENCODERInput feed parameter

S= 60mm/s A= 0.50GL= 127mm

[ENTER]

#CUTTER ENCODERResult of a test

THICK = ∗.∗∗mmPr=∗∗∗∗ Mr=∗∗∗∗

∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 59 ∗∗∗∗∗ CUTTER ENCODER

#CUTTER ENCODERCHECK :ent

#ENCODER TESTMEDIA ENCODER <ent>

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#MediaENCODER/RESULTERR(M-E)=∗∗.∗∗∗mm

MTR = ∗∗∗∗∗ENC = ∗∗∗∗∗

[�]/[�]

#ENCODER TESTPOSITIONencoder <ent>

#POSITIONencoderCHECK :ent

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#POSITIONencoderResult of a test

St =∗∗∗∗Mv=∗∗∗∗ Rt=∗∗∗∗

∗∗∗∗∗ ERROR 58 ∗∗∗∗∗ POSITIONencoder

#POSITIONencoderCHECK :ent

[�]/[�]

(Abnormal)

Check operation

[ENTER] (Normal END)

(Abnormal)

(Normal END)

(Normal END)

(Abnormal)

Feed operation

Check operation

2-66

Operation Flow

INK CARTRIDGE TEST

WASH CARTRIDGE TEST

#TESTINK CARTRIDGE <ent>

#INK CARTRIDGEPACK&END SENSOR<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-64

[ENTER]

PACK SENSOR1-3- 56-- --BC -E-G

END SENSOR-2-4 --78 9A-- D-F-

[�]/[�]

Check end operation

#INK CARTRIDGEINK-IC CHECK <ent>

[ENTER]

#INK-IC CHECK1234 5678 9ABC DEFG

SLOT. No -> NG_-> OK , x -> None

CNT=∗12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_

[ENTER]

#INK CARTRIDGECARTRIDGE VALVE<ent>

#CARTRIDGE VALVEo = OPEN / . = close

o.o . o . .o .oo . .o .o

[�]/[�]

#INK CARTRIDGECARTRIDGE LED <ent>

[ENTER]

ERROR-LED (o=ON)o. .o . oo . o .o . .o .o

ACTIVE-LED (o=ON). . . . o . .o .o .o o .o .

[�]/[�] : Slot selection[�]/[�] : LED pattern changing[FUNCTION] : Switching ERROR/ACTIVE

[�]/[�]A cursorlsMoved. NGnum.ofTimes confirm.

CNT=∗ NG=∗12__ _67_ 9__C D_F_

[END]

#INK CARTRIDGESolenoidVOLTAGE <ent>

[ENTER]

#SolenoidVOLTAGECHECK START :ent

[END]

[�]/[�]∗DURING THE ∗

∗UNUSUAL DETECTION∗


Check operation

[ENTER]

Check end operation

Unusual detection !! FAILURE !!

#SolenoidVOLTAGETEST END :ent

An unusual detection ∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗


[ENTER][ENTER]

* When an unusual signal is detected within 2 minutes after starting the check (success buzzer)

* When an unusual signal is not detected within 2 minutes after starting the check (failure buzzer)

#TESTWASH CARTRIDGE<ent>

#WASH CARTRIDGEPACK&END SENSOR<ent>

[END]

[ENTER]

See p.2-64

[ENTER][�]/[�]

Check end operation

#WASH CARTRIDGECARTRIDGE VALVE<ent>

#WASH CARTRIDGEIC CHECK <ent>

[ENTER]

[�]/[�] : State change OPEN/close

#WASH CARTRIDGESolenoidVOLTAGE<ent>

[ENTER]


[END]

[�]/[�]∗DURING THE ∗

∗UNUSUAL DETECTION∗


Check operation

[ENTER]

Check end operation

Unusual detection !! FAILURE !!


An unusual detection ∗∗ SUCCESS ∗∗


[ENTER][ENTER]

PACK SENSOR :ON END SENSOR :OFF

#CARTRIDGE VALVE OPEN

[ENTER]

[ENTER]


#IC CHECKCNT=1 NG=0

[�]/[�]

#IC CHECK o

[ENTER]

#IC CHECKCNT=1 NG=0

* When an unusual signal is detected within 2 minutes after starting the check (success buzzer)

* When an unusual signal is not detected within 2 minutes after starting the check (failure buzzer)

2-67


2-3-7. PARAMETER

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#PARAMETERSYSTEM PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER]

PARAMETER 1/2As for the detail of “PARAMETER Function” ( p.2-49) .

SYSTEM PARAMETER000:COMP. X = 0

----> 1000:COMP. X = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

(If INITIAL=1) ALL PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent

[ENTER] Initialization of all parameters

#PARAMETERMAINTE PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER]MAINTENANCEparameter000:DIR = 0

----> 1000:DIR = 0

[ENTER]

SYSTEM PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent

[ENTER] Initialization of system parameters

CLOSED PARAMETER INITIALIZE OK ? :ent

[ENTER] Initialization of non-disclosed

MAINTENANCEparameterINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERCUSTOM PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER]CUSTOMIZE PARAMETER000:EDGE LV = 50

----> 100000:EDGE LV = 50

[END]

[ENTER]

CUSTOMIZE PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERRUNNING PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER] RUNNING PARAMETER000:CAPC.H1 = 0

----> 3000000:CAPC.H1 = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

RUNNING PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETEREXCHANGE PARAM.<ent>

[ENTER]EXCHANGE PARAMETER000:Hd.nn01 = 0

----> 3000:Hd.nn01 = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

#PARAMETERINKSYSTEM PARAM<ent>

[ENTER]INK-SYSTEM PARAMETER000:LEVELsw = 0

----> 1000:LEVELsw = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

INK-SYSTEM PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERINKinfor.PARAM.<ent>

[ENTER]INK INFOR. PARAMETER000:VERSION = 100

----> 101000:VERSION = 100

[END]

[ENTER]

#PARAMETERINKSEQUENCEpara<ent>

[ENTER]INKsequencePARAMETER000:POWON.F = 0

----> 12345000:POWON.F = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

INKsequencePARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERINKTYPE PARAM.<ent>

[ENTER] INK-TYPE PARAMETER000:DE0D0sw = 0

----> 0x0060000:DE0D0sw = 0x0040

[END]

[ENTER]

INK-TYPE PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERHEADunit PARAM.<ent>

[ENTER]#HEADunit PARAMHEAD SELECT :UNIT-1

#HEADunit-1 PARAM.RANGE SEL. :0 - 511

[END]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]HEADunit-1PARA/ 0 +000:SHOT1.0 = 0

----> 1000:SHOT1.0 = 0

HEADunit-1 PARAM.INITIALIZE OK ? :ent

* Displayed only on filled ink type

[ENTER]

HEAD SELECT :UNIT-2

HEAD SELECT :UNIT-3

HEAD SELECT :UNIT-4

RANGE SEL :512-1023

[ENTER]


(If INITIAL=2)

(If INITIAL=3)



[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

2-68

Operation Flow

PARAMETER 2/2(To the previous page )

#PARAMETERSERVO PARAMETER<ent>

[ENTER] SERVO PARAMETER000:Cycle = 0x000c

----> 0x000d000:Cycle = 0x000c

[END]

[ENTER]

SERVO PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

#PARAMETERTEST PARAMETER<ent>

[ENTER] TEST PARAMETER000:H1A.drv = 0

----> 1000:H1A.drv = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

TEST PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERCORRECT PARAM.<ent>

#CORRECT PARAM.SELECT :USER CRCT

[END]

[ENTER]

#PARAMETERADJUST PARAM. <ent>

[ENTER] ADJUST PARAMETER000:RESERVE = 0

----> 0000:RESERVE = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

ADJUST PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#PARAMETERNCU PARAMETER <ent>

[ENTER] NCU PARAMETER000:RESERVE = 0

----> 0000:RESERVE = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

NCU PARAMETERINITIALIZE OK ? :ent

#USER CORRECT PARAM.

SELECT :TYPE-1[END]

[ENTER]

SELECT :TYPE-2

SELECT :TYPE-3

SELECT :TYPE-4

SELECT :Y BASE

USER CRCT./ TYPE-1000:MODE1NR = 0

[END]

----> -1000:MODE1NR = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

#CORRECT PARAMETERSELECT :USER BASIS

USER BASIS PARAMETER

000:LoMD1NR = 0[END]

[ENTER]

#CORRECT PARAMETERSELECT :HEAD CRCT

#HEAD CORRECT PARAM.

SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Lo[END]

[ENTER]

SELECT :Hi.SPEED/Hi

SELECT :Std.SPEED/Lo

SELECT :Std.SPEED/Hi

SELECT :Y BASE

HEAD CRCT./HsLo.MD-1000:RESERVE = 0

[END]

----> 0000:RESERVE = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

----> -1000:LoMD1NR = 0

[END]

[ENTER]

[�]/[�]

[�]/[�]

#HEAD CORRECT /HsLoSELECT :MODE-1

SELECT :MODE-2

SELECT :MODE-3

SELECT :MODE-4

[ENTER]

[END]

[ENTER]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

[FUNCTION]or

[�]/[�]

2-69


2-70

CHAPTER 3 Overhaul / Adjustment

3-1

Contents

3-1. Outline ......................................................................... 3-2

3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly ...... 3-2

3-1-2. Tools and jigs ........................................................... 3-3

3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure ................. 3-4

3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts ................................... 3-6

3-3. Overhaul of PCBs ..................................................... 3-69

3-4. Overhaul of Sensors ............................................... 3-109

3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161

3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts ..................................... 3-161


3-1. Outline

This chapter describes disassembly and reassembly of JV5-130S/160S. The description given here is chiefly of

disassembly procedures. As a rule, reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly. For reassembly, however,

description is added as needed, for example, if the procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure or

if any precautions are to be taken.

Where any adjustment is to be made in reassembly process, the adjustment procedure is described with the heading

“Adjust/Confirm”.

3-1-1. Precautions for disassembly and reassembly

Be sure to follow the precautions shown below before starting disassembly and reassembly.

Be sure to turn off the main power switch (behind the printer) unless otherwise instructed, to prevent

human electric shock or circuit damage. (Turning off the power switch on the front panel is

insufficient.)

For disassembly and reassembly, be sure to wear gloves to avoid injury.

For servicing, place the printer on a firm floor with sufficient space around it.

Take great care to handle the printer, which is very heavy. At least five persons must cooperate to

install or remove the leg assembly to or from the main body.

Use only the specified tools. (See P.3-3 )

Do not use any lubricants or adhesives other than specified.

When handling a PCB assembly, never touch any elements on the PCB assembly with your bare hand;

otherwise static electricity may arise to damage elements.

To touch any element, be sure to use a grounding band.

In reassembly, put wiring for every electric part in position.

(Otherwise, a cable may come in contact with a sharp edge or the noise resistance margin may

decrease.)

If it is needed to operate the printer with cover removed, take care not to get injured with any moving

part.

Be very careful to handle cutter blade to avoid human injury or damage of peripheral elements. It is

very sharp.

Be sure to certainly join connectors and FPCs. Be careful to avoid insufficient or skewed insertion.

To remove a part for which procedure is not described, carefully observe its installation status in

advance. Refer to the part catalog as needed.

3-2

Outline

3-1-2. Tools and jigs

Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly

Adjustment tools

Name Remarks

Phillips screwdriver Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

For M2

For M3 to5 (L=260 or more)

for M3 to 5

Slotted screwdriver Long side 2.5mm for removing E-rings

Spanner (Box wrench) Width across flats: 5 mm

Width across flats: 5.5 mm

Width across flats: 7 mm

Hexagon wrench 1.5mm for M3 SSWP

2.0mm for M4 SSWP

2.5mm for M3 cap bolts (L=170)



Spanner Width across flats: 5.0mm

Width across flats: 5.5mm for M3 nuts and hexagon stud

Width across flats: 7.0mm for M4 nuts

Tweezers To prevent the cable from being pulled when disconnecting the connector.

Long-nose pliers

Nippers

Soldering iron, Solder

Scale 150, 500mm

Loupe About 50x to 60x magnification

Protection glasses

Gloves To keep hands clean, and for safety.

Adhesive agent LOCKTITE242 (for locking screws)

Insulation lock L=150 or less (UL-approved product)

Nitroflon tape or acetate fabric tape As required (UL-approved product)

Name Code Remarks

Trimmer adjustment screwdriver For adjustment of trimmers on the power supply PCB.

Tester

Bar type tension gauge 500 g

Ink line airtight tester OPT-J0094



All Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0098

A Cap base positioning tool OPT-J0099

Media Jam/ Cutter unit height positioning tool

OPT-J0108

3-3


3-1-3. Disassembly and Reassembly Procedure

The chart below shows the disassembly procedure.

MF cover C

USB PCB(p.3-79)

Main PCB(p.3-70)

HDC PCB(p.3-77)

IO PCB(p.3-78)

Pump cover T

S Pump Assembly(p.3-33)

Pump Motor Assembly(p.3-35)

Sucker BOX(p.3-61)

BOX Relay PCB(p.3-90)

Maintenance cover L

Maintenance Cover Sensor L(p.3-151)

Left cover

B Rear cover L

Heater PCB(p.3-88)

X-axis Motor Assembly(p.3-162)

X Pulley, X Belt(p.3-165)

A Heater Cover Assy.(p.3-193)

P Heater Cover Assy.(p.3-198)

Media Rotary Encoder Assembly(p.3-139)

R Heater Cover Assy.(p.3-204)

Paper Sensor(p.3-136)

Overhaul of Ink-related Parts(p.3-6)

Overhaul of PCBs(p.3-69)

Overhaul of Driving Parts(p.3-161)

Overhaul of Sensors(p.3-109)

Covers

Overhaul of Driving Parts(p.3-161)

Waste Tank Sensor(p.3-158)

Drying Fan Fork PCB(p.3-106)

Waste ink tank bracket assy. Drying FAN assy.

Ink Leakage Sensor L(p.3-153)

Take-up cover

Take-up PCB(p.3-105)

M Motor(p.3-186)

ICU cover F

ICU cover RInk Unit PCB(p.3-98)

LED PCB(p.3-103)

Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly(p.3-42)

MF cover R

Power PCB(p.3-85)

SSR(p.3-209)

3-4

Outline

Open & Close cover(Dry fan assy.)

Front cover L

Y cover F Front Cover Sensor R(p.3-149)

Front Cover Sensor L(p.3-147)

Head Cover Jam Sensor(p.3-121) A

Head Unit(p.3-7)

Damper Assembly(p.3-57)

Cutter Unit Assy.(p.3-189)

Paper Width Sensor(p.3-119)

Paper Thickness Encoder(p.3-125)

Y Encoder(p.3-129)

Head Up/Down Encoder(p.3-132)

Maintenance cover R

Cap Head assy.(p.3-37)

Cap Base 1H(p.3-38)

Head Relay PCB(p.3-81)

C

Wiper Wash Solenoid(p.3-206)

Cap Sensor(p.3-117)

Origin Sensor(p.3-110)

Wiper Sensor(p.3-112)

Maintenance Cover Sensor R(p.3-152)

Right cover D

Keyboard PCB(p.3-92)

Dot Detection PCB(p.3-96)

KB cover

D

Rear cover R

Clamp Sensor(p.3-113)

Bottom Point Sensor(p.3-115)

Station Motor(p.3-182)

NCU(p.3-63)

Wiper Motor(p.3-179)

Slider PCB(p.3-82)

Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly(p.3-51)

Side Relay PCB(p.3-99)

ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)(p.3-101)

Head UD Motor(p.3-184)

Y-axis Motor Assembly(p.3-167)

Y Drive Belt(p.3-175)

Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt(p.3-171)

B

A

Ink Leakage Sensor S(p.3-153)

Ink Leakage Sensor R(p.3-153)

AC

3-5


3-2. Overhaul of Ink-related Parts

Ink-related parts of JV5-130S/160S are shown below.

Part Reference page Part Reference page

3-2-1. Head Unit p.3-7 3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly p.3-42

3-2-2. S Pump Assembly p.3-33 3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly p.3-51

3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly p.3-35 3-2-8. Damper Assembly p.3-57

3-2-4. Cap Head assy. p.3-37 3-2-9. Sucker BOX p.3-61

3-2-5. Cap Base 1H p.3-38 3-2-10. NCU p.3-63

Valve Base

Solenoid Valve

Near End Sensor

ID Point of Contact PCBPresence Sensor

~Ink Cartridge Assembly ~ ~ HEAD Assy ~

Damper Assembly (x32)

Head Unit (x4)

NCU

S Pump Assembly (x4) Pump Motor Assembly (x4)

Sucker BOX

Cap Head assy. (x4)

Cap Base 1H (x4)

Wash Cartridge Assembly

3-6

Overhaul of Ink-related Parts

3-2-1. Head Unit

GeneralProcedures and instructions for Head Unit Replacement are described here.

Tools and Jigs

•IIH47V Head unit Assembly. (M007034)•Head inside washing tool (M005027) ←Equivalent to JV3

•Washings for replacement of S-head (M005026) ←Equivalent to JV3

•Phillips screwdriver (No.2 M3-M5)

•Hexagon wrench (Opposite side: 2.5 mm Bondhus type magnetized)

•Small slotted screwdriver

•Scope (approx. 50x)

•1.5mm Head gap check tool (OPT-J0097)

•Media for adjustment (Glossy type media)

•Waste cloth (non-woven paper, etc.)

Item (Page) Description

1. Preparation (Cleaning within Head) (p.3-8)

Head is filled with water-based liquid (S-46) that has been charged on shipment. Use S Head Changing Wash (MS Wash) to clean the head before replacement.

Otherwise Solvent Ink will react with the liquid to produce precipitates.

2. Head Unit Removing (p.3-9) Take off Damper and remove Head Unit.

3. Reassemble Head Unit (p.3-11) Put on a new Head Unit.

4. BasisHEADheight (p.3-12) Adjust the height of replaced head using a tool based on the platen face.

5. Capping adjusting (p.3-14) Execute adjusting of all seven items related to capping.(Sequential flow)

6. Enter Head ID (p.3-18) Enter ID of each Head specified on shipment to equalize variations between Heads.(As the ID is input automatically, this process is not required in usual state.)*Manual input of ID is required when a head unit only (without head memory PCB) is replaced.

7. Filling of Ink (p.3-19) Choose ink charge procedure according to change or no-change of Damper, and execute “TEST DRAW” after ink charge is completed.

8. Adjustment of the head angle (p.3-20) Mechanically adjust the angle of Head Unit.

9. Adjust Head Stagger (p.3-23) Mechanically adjust Head Stagger.

10. Drop Position Correction (p.3-26) Correct dot positions.

11. Reassemble Covers (p.3-32) Put on covers.

Use protection glasses and gloves during works.

In some working conditions, ink may reach your eye or contact with ink may get your skin

roughed.

Head Unit Replacement procedure is principally the same as for JV3. Damper construction is the

same, while the appearance of Head is different.

3-7


* Main washing must be done before the replacement of head assembly.

1a. Charge Head Changing Washing.

Remove Damper Assembly from Washing Jig, and charge Syringe with 12-16 cc of S-head Changing Washing.

1b. ~ Types of Wash ~

ES3 Ink:MILD SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0294)HS Ink:SOLVENT WASHING LIQUID (SPC-0352)

1. Preparation

(Cleaning within

Head)

SyringeS-dumper Assembly

Caution:Confirm the type of current

ink to choose washing. Type of washing depends on ink.

A washing jig must be exclusive to a washing. Do not use the jig for another

washing.

2a. Connect Damper to Head.

Reassemble S-damper assembly with Syringe and join it with Damper Connector on Head.

2b. ~ Caution for connection ~ 3a. Slowly pour the washing.

Pour 3-4cc of washing to a nozzle in about 30 seconds.

Caution: Be careful of MS washing dripping on the operation of the damper. Wet of FPC

connector may damage the head.

Caution:Pour washing slowly, or Head may be damaged.

3b. Use waste cloth to receive liquid

split out of nozzle.

* Conduct the above for every

nozzle (x8). (Charge syringe with washing every 4 nozzles.)

Caution:Do not touch the nozzle surface with waste cloth,

nor rub the nozzle surface. Both may cause discharge failure.

3-8


1a. Execute Carriage Out.

Turn on the power, select [ST.MAINTE] →[ENTER] to move Carriage to above Platen, and turn off the power.

1b. ~ Caution for Power-off ~

2. Head Unit

Removing

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]

Execute CARRIAGE OUT.

Power ON. Behind

Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit

breaker on the back to prevent unex-

pected move.

2a. Remove Open and close cover

Assy.

Shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove left side of the cover.

2b. ~ Remove Open/Close cover~

Take out fulcrum pin on the left side of cover from from frame to remove open/close cover.

3a. Remove Front Cover L.

Open the cover, move the right side fulcrum pin inside, and remove it from the pin hole.

Right

Open/Close Cover Assy (M007138/9)

Right

Moving fulcrum pin inside and remove it from the pin hole.

Right

3b. ~ Remove Front Cover L ~

Remove a pin from the left shaft hole to remove the front cover.

4. Remove Y Cover F.

Remove screws in both sides (x6), and remove the Y cover F.

* Take care not to drop the cover.

Operation with more than 2 persons

5. Remove Maintenance Cover R.

Front Cover L (M601940/41)Left Right

P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Maintenance Cover R (M601943)

3-9


6. Remove the head cover.

Remove screw in both sides to remove the head cover.

7. Lay Media on Platen to prevent

from dirt.

8a. Confirm the Head to be removed.

* Hereafter the procedure for Head

4 is described.

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)

Head Cover (M507559)

Lay Media.

(Front)

1

3

2

4

8b. ~ Remove back head ~

* To remove Heads 1 and 2, take off Quick

Valve in the near side.

9a. Remove Damper Lock SP (x2).

Revolve the left and right ends toward you to remove.

9b. ~ Remove Damper Lock SP ~

Revolve the left and right ends toward back side to remove.

Damper Lock SP (M800894) x2

Turn toward you. Turn backward.

10a.Remove Damper Assembly.

Pull up every Damper Assembly (x8) out of Head Unit.

10b.~ Caution for damper ~ 10c.Lay waste cloth

Lay waste cloth under dampers, while ink won’t leak out of them, since they are each equipped with self top valve.

Damper Assembly Caution: Be careful that pressing

transparent film spills ink.Keep it from something with sharp tip.

Don’t push

3-10


11a.Remove Head Unit.

Loosen screws (x3) and remove Head Unit from Head Base.

12. Remove Head Unit Holder B. 13. Disconnect FPC.

P3x10 SMW (x3)

Head Unit Assembly

Head Unit Holder B (M507370)

Pull FPC (x2)

14. Remove connector. Reverse the disassembly procedure to Step8 for reassembly.

* Write down the head ID (24 digits)

before replace of head when a head unit (without head memory PCB) is replaced.

Remove connector

3. Reassemble

Head Unit

Head ID

* Insert carefully not to be upside down at connecting FPC (x2) to

the head.Nozzle face side : 35 wire(one side 3 wires are not used)

Damper side : 32 wire

* Lightly shift Head to the right back and tighten the screws in the

order shown above (diagonally). Be careful that too much shift affects print quality.

* Mount damper lock SP so that projrctions of both sides push up

coupler of the damper.

Notice: Align terminal sides to avoid

wrong side connection and insert

firmly at FPC connection

1

23

Shift to right back

3-11


4. BasisHEADheight

Manual adjusting of the head height. Set contents are stored in the system parameter.

<Basis head height operation sequence>

No. Item Content

1 Start 1.Cap OFF

2.Move the carriage to the head UP/Down position, and move to the top position of the head height.

3.Carriage Out

2 Manual adjusting Adjust the head height in manual. Read values of the position encoder during adjusting.

3 End Press [ENTER] to store position encoder values from the top to the adjusted position, and finish the

operation.

Platen face

Head

1.5 mm

Head height top position

X mm(Position encoder value)

Place the head height on the position 1.5 mm from the platen face.(Encoder value: distance from the head height top position: X mm)

* Conduct this adjusting with keeping the clamp lever down

1. Execute “BasisHEADheight”.

Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and execute “BasisHead-height ”.

2a. Adjust the gap 1.5mm from platen

with manual operation

[ENTER] : Store adjust value to end[END] : Cancel to end

Outline Adjust head height to the

standard height (1.5mm)

mechanically with the tool.

Tools 1.5mm Head gap check tool

(OPT-J0097)

1.5mm Head gap check tool(OPT-J0097)

[FUNCTION]L.*> [JV5-01]


[ENTER]#ADJUSTBasisHEADheight<ent>

[FUNCTION]or [�]

[REMOTE]+[FUNCTION]+Power ON

(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)

(Carriage moves over platen)

Height 1.5mm isadjusted by hand.


*Being Initialized*PLEASE WAIT

[ENTER] :adjust value stored

[END] :the value not stored

End operation after initialization

3-12


2b. ~ Arrangement of tool ~

Arrange the tool as the following

3. Insert the tool from the side face 4. Push the head of the tool to the

head frame.

Platen face

1.5 mmTool

Turn with hand to up/down

carriage

* Place the tool so that it can contact

to metal frames in both sides of the head.

3-13


5. Capping adjusting

Adjusting capping, wiping position. adjusting values are stored in the system parameter.

Note1: Press [ENTER] to determine adjust value, then move to the following adjust item.

<Capping adjusting >

No. Item Content

1 LOWER POS. Contents: The lowest point of the station is adjusted

Down the station to the lowest sensor detection

Adjusting operation: [�], [�] (Station up/down movement)

Adjust value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)

2 CAPPING POS Contents: Adjust cap Y-position

Up the station to the cap Y-position adjusting height to adjust carriage position.

Adjusting operation: [�], [�] (Carriage horizontal movement)

Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0 mm (unit: 0.1 mm)

3 CAP HEIGHT Contents: Adjust cap height

Up the station to the gap height adjusting position to adjust



4 WipwePOS(X) Contents: Adjust wiping X position

Down the station to the lowest position, after moving the carriage to the wiping

adjusting position, the wiper ON to execute

Adjusting operation: [�], [�] (Wiper back and forth movement)

Press [FUNCTION] to execute wiping operation once.

Set value: -20.0 ~ 20.0mm (unit: 1.0 mm)

5 WiperHEIGHT Contents: Adjust wiper height

Up the station to the wiper height to adjust

Adjusting operation: [�], [�] (Station UP/DOWN movement)



6 WiperPOS(Y) Contents: Adjust wiping Y-position

Adjusting operation: [�], [�] (Carriage horizontal movement)


Press [ENTER] to determine adjusting value, and wiper OFF


7 NCU HEIGHT Contents: Adjust NCU height.

(Not executed when the NCU is not installed, “No.8 F.BOX height” starts.

Down the station to the Lowest position, and move the carriage to the NCU height

adjusting position.

Down the station until laser of NCU OFF, down the station at 2.5mm from that

position. (Automatic operation)

If adjusting is failed, “No.8 F.BOX height” starts automatically.

Press [ENTER] to return the carriage to the cap position to execute capping.

The cap moving amount at this moment is the NCU height based on the cap height.

8 F.BOX height Contents: Height of the flushing BOX is adjusted.

Execute when NCU is not installed or “No.7 NCU height” is failed.



In this adjustment, as adjusting items form a chain of mutually related adjusting items, cor-

rect adjusting parameter values are not entered until adjusting is executed to the end. There-

fore, once adjusting is started, it must be done to the end.

3-14


1. Execute “Capping”.

Start with Maintenance Open Mode and execute“Capping ”.



[ENTER]#ADJUSTCAPPING <ent>

[FUNCTION]or [�]


(Start with the Maintenance Open Mode)

2. Adjust the lowest point of the

station.

Up and down the station to adjust to the lowest position.

UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGLOWER POS. = 0.0mm

[�]/ [�] : Station up/down

[ENTER] : Next item

[END] : Previous item

[END]

NCU

Carriage

Station

Adjust a chevalet to the low-est position of lift slider

3. Adjust head Y position at capping.

Adjust with moving the carriage horizontally so that center of cap agree with center of head seeing from front.

LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGCAPPING POS= 0.0mm

[�]/ [�] : L/R move carriage

[ENTER] : Next item

[END] : Previous item :

[END]

NCU

Carriage

Station

Station height at adjusting is the position where cap sen-

sor “ON“

3-15


4. Adjust station cap height at

capping.

Adjust the position where cap con-tacts to the head with moving the station horizontally.

UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGCAP HEIGHT = 0.0mm

[�]/ [�] :Station Up/Down n

[ENTER] : Next item


[END]

NCU

Carriage

Station

Notice: Take care not to push too much

Adjust to eliminate gap between all heads and caps.After adjustiong, push at 3mm with F/W.

The position is “CAP HEIGHT POSITION”.

5. Adjust wiper X position at wiping.

Adjust with moving the wiper rear and front so that center of wiper agree with center of head seeing from side.

* Position confirmation is allowed in

wiping operation with [FUNCTION]

REAR:^ v:FRONT (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGWiperPOS (X)= 0mm

[�]/ [�] : Wiper R/F move

[FUNCTION]: Wiping

[ENTER] : Next item


[END]

NCU

Wiper

Station

Head 1

Head 3Head to be adjusted is 1

and 3.Adjust so that the center of wiper and center of

head 1&3 agrees in side view.

6. Adjust station wiper height at

wiping.

Adjust so that wiper top contacts to head at 1mm with moving the sta-tion up and down.

* Position confirmation is allowed in wiping operation with [FUNCTION]

UP:^ v:DOWN (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGWiperHEIGHT= 0.0mm

[END]

[�]/ [�] : Up/Down stattion

[FUNCTION]: Wiping operation

[ENTER] : Next item


NCU

Carriage

Station

1mm

3-16


7. Adjusting head wiper Y position

at wiping.

Adjust carriage with moving hori-zontally to the position that head comes out at wiping operation.

* Position confirmation is allowed in wiping operation with

[FUNCTION].

LEFT:< >:RIGHT (-20.0 - +20.0)

#CAPPINGWiperPOS (Y)= 0.0mm

[END]

[�]/ [�] : Carriage L/R move

[FUNCTION]: Wiping operation

[ENTER] : Next item


NCU

Carriage

Station

8. Automatic adjusting of NCU

height .

* Adjust to position at 1mm from

claws on 4 corners of cap when no NCU or at failure of automatic adjusting.

** Being ADJUSTED **PLEASE WAIT

#CAPPINGNCU HEIGHT = *.*mm

[�]/ [�] : Station Up/Down

[ENTER] : Next item


[END]

NCU

Carriage

Station

2.5mm

Laser beam

NCUStation

Carriage1mm

~NCU~

~No NCU~

Automatic adjusting to position at 2.5mm from laser beam.

Adjust to position at 1mm from cap claw.

* “F.BoxHEIGHT= 0.0mm ” is displayed at no NCU

9. Storing adjusted values in system

parameters to end.

#ADJUSTCAPPING <ent>

[ENTER] : Storing adjusted

value to end.

3-17


* Execute only at replacement of head unit (without head memory PCB).

Head of JV-5 supports automatic ID wntering.

1. Execute “HEAD ID”.

Start with Maintenance Open Mode and execute “HEAD ID ”.

2a. Choose Head.

Choose the substitute head and press [ENTER] to fix it.

6. Enter Head ID



[ENTER]#ADJUSTHEAD ID <ent>

[FUNCTION]

or [�]

(Start with Maintenance Open Mode)


#HEAD IDSELECT :HEAD-1



[�]/ [�] :SW

[ENTER]: Set

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

2b. ~ Head Layout ~ 3a. Enter Head ID (24 digits).

* Input head ID without making a mistake, and confirm the numeric

value.

3b. ~ Head ID ~

Head ID consists of 3 lines of 8-digit string. The sequence is from left to right and from upper to lower.

(Front)

1

3

2

4

#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(1/2) ******** ********

#HEAD ID/HEAD-1(2/2) ********


[�]/ [�] :Cursor Move

[�]/ [�] :NV input

[�]/ [�] :Cursor Move

[�]/ [�] :NV input

[END] : End

3 7 B 7 B 4 5 4

7 6 0 6 5 MW 0

Z U T T QM 0 3

1

2

3

4. Turn the remote SW (front power

switch) to OFF to write the ID.

Turn the power OFF with front power SW to update head ID.

Notice: As updated head ID is overwrit-

ten at power OFF, turn the

power OFF after inputingID.

Turn the power OFF with the

remote SW (on front side).

If the power is turned OFF with

the main Power (on back side),

the head ID is not updated and

overwriting is not executed.

3-18


* Note: In order to save ink, use the proper ink filling procedure and improve the work efficiency.

1. Set media and turn the power ON. 2. Execute “FILL UP INK”.

7. Filling of InkL.*> [JV5-01]

Set Media

Power SW ON

Main Power ON (Back)[FUNCTION]

L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTIONMAINTENANCE <ENT>

[ENTER]

MAINTENANCEHD.MAINTENANCE <ent>

HD.MAINTENANCEFILL UP INK <ent>

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

3. Choose Head and fill ink.

* Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or Heads 3 and 4.

4. Execute test drawing. 5a. Confirm the result of draw.

* Repeat until nozzle skip is removed.

FILL UP INKHEAD SELECT :12.34

[�] / [�]: Cursor Move

[�] / [�]: Head Choice

:12-- :--34

FILL UP INK*****---------------


[END] :Endó¼

[TEST DRAW]

TEST DRAW<ENT>

** TEST DRAW **

[ENTER] : Execute

L.*> [JV5-01]width:****mm

Power off

Draw Result

Nozzle skip OK

Re-cleaning(Step. 5b)

5b. Conduct cleaning.

Select a set of [HARD] ⇒

[NORMAL].

[CLEANING]L.*> [JV5-01]

CLEANINGHEAD SELECT 1234

12-- --34

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

CLEANING ACTIVE*******-------------

CLEANINGTYPE :NORMAL

TYPE :SOFT

TYPE :HARD

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

Notice: [HARD] or [NORMAL] of clean-

ing is selected according to noz-

zle missing state.

When the number of nozzle

missing is a few, select[NOR-

MAL].

3-19


8. Adjustment of the head angle

General

A pattern for mechanical adjustment of head slanting is drawn.

Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting

pattern.

The Pattern is drawn only with B & H rows. (In every other nozzle)

Head selection: 1234 (A head does not draw is indicated with “–” “123–”)

<Adjusting pattern><Head side>

3-20


1. Select “SLANT ADJUST ”.

Start with Maintenance Open mode and execute “SLANT ADJUST ”.

2. Select a head and execute “PRINT

START”.

* Drawing pattern varies according to selected head.(See the drawing below)Move carriage over platen after pattern drawing to adjust.



[ENTER]#HEAD ADJUSTSLANT ADJUST <ent>

(Start with Maintenance Open mode)

[ENTER]


#SLANT ADJUSTHEAD SELECT :1234

#SLNT ADJ./HEAD=1234PRINT START :ent

[�] / [�]: For cursor

[�] / [�]: For Head[ENTER]: Fix (Next)

Set Media (or confirm)

[ENTER]: Printing start

[�] : Carriage move

When all heads are selected

HEAD 4

HEAD 3

HEAD 2

HEAD 1

Slant Adjustment: Printing samples

HEAD 3

HEAD 1

When an individual head is selected (at selecting head 1.3)

3-21


For fixing

For adjustment

(For Head 1 adjustment)

C line

Procedures

1. Loosen 3 screws (for fixing of slant)

indicatedby an arrow in the figure.

2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust

theslant. A color of Magenta is shifted by this

operation.

�Adjustment procedures

Example) In the case of Head 3

For fixing

For fixing

M line

Reference : Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 µm /1 rotation

Rotating direction of Adjusting screw

The followings are patterns seen through the scope. Adjust so that dots of cyan and magenta are layed on the

same line in the scan direction with wrapping over.

Good sample Bad sample 1 Bad sample 2

Bad sample 1 (Magenta dots are at the lower than cyanogen do ts.)

Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. Magenta dots move

forward.

Caution: The moving direction of

magenta dots is assuming the case of observation with a scope.

Bad sample 2 (Magenta dots are at the upper than cyanogen dots.)

Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise. Magenta dots move

backward.

3-22


9. Adjust Head Stagger

General

A pattern for mechanical adjustment of positional deviation of each head is drawn.

Move the head height to the position of 1.5 mm print gap, and select a head to draw the adjusting

pattern.

The pattern is drawn with only D (Black) raw of each head.

Head selection: 1-2, 2-3, 3-4, ALL

<Adjusting pattern><Head side>

Align this line of each head.

3-23


1. Execute “STAGGER ADJUST”. 2. Select the head to be adjusted.

* Printing pattern depends on the

head selected.

3a. Execute “PRINT START”.

Moving the carriage over platen after pattern drawing to adjust.

#HEAD ADJUSTSLANT ADJUST <ent> [�]

#HEAD ADJUSTSTAGGER ADJUST <ent> [ENTER]

#STAGGER ADJUSTHEAD SELECT :1-2

[�] / [�]: For Head

[ENTER]: Fix (Next)

*Head Set :1-2

2-3

3-4

ALL

#STAG ADJ.PRINT START :ent

[ENTER]: Print start

[�] : Carriage move


�When all heads are selected;

HEAD 4

HEAD 3

HEAD 2

HEAD 1

Stagger Adjustment: Printing samples

�When Head 1-2(2-3, 3-4) are selected;

HEAD 1

HEAD 2

3-24


For fixing

For adjustment

Procedures

1. Loosen 4 screws(for fixing of stagger) indicated by

an arrow in the figure.

2. Rotate a screw for adjustment to adjust the

stagger as shown in below.

Adjustment procedures

For fixing

For fixingFor fixing

Reference: Adjustable range 30 ~ 50 µm /1 rotationMoving direction by 1 rotation of screw Counter-clockwise Clockwise

Rotating direction of Adjusting screw

There is a gap at the right end of pattern on the joint of each head. Adjust it using this gap. The joint of head is

observed by a scope as the following.

Good sample Bad sample 1 Bad sample 2

Head 2

Head 1

Approx. 140 µm

Head 2

Head 1

Head 2

Head 1

Bad sample 1 (The gap is wider than 140µm)

Rotate the adjusting screw counter-clockwise.

The position of Head 2 moves backward.

Bad sample 2 (The gap is narrower than 140µm)

Rotate the adjusting screw clockwise. The position of Head 2

moves forward.

3-25


10. Drop Position Correction

� General

Impact position between heads is adjusted. Setting values are stored in the CORRECT PARAM.

<Dot Position Adjust>

Item Set value

Selection of scan speed Set value: Normal-SCAN, HiSPEED SCAN

Selection of head gap Set value: Low 1.5 mm

High 2.5 mm

Selection of Y-base, mode Set value: Y BASE, DRAFT/FINE

Selection of adjusting item Set value: Y Si, Y Re, Y Bi, FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re, FINE Y Bi

This function can not be executed when head 1 is set to “HEAD1 is Not-USE” in

Head Selection or Machine Configuration.

(Take care that when there is an error on head 2 in the Machine Configuration, head

1 is also a head not to be conterolled.)

Y BASE

Head 1D raw is set to be standard; adjusting value for D raw of each head is input.

(Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)

Adjusting item: Head1-2, Head1-3,

Head1-4

Adjusting value: -50.0 ~ 50.0 dot

(unit: 0.1 dot)

3-26


Y Si, Y Re

Adjusting patterns of Head 1-2, Head 1-3, Head 1-4 are drawn successively.


(Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing)


Head1-4

Adjusting value: -50.0~ 50.0 dot

(unit: 0.1 dot)

Compensation value

Y Bi

Impact position adjusting value of approach route/backhaul route is input.

Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.

Adjusting item: Head1-1

Adjusting value: -50.0~50.0 dot

(unit: 0.1 dot)

Compensation value

Back

Front

FINE Y Si, FINE Y Re


Only D raw of each head is used for the pattern drawing.


Head1-4


(unit: 0.1 dot)

3-27


FINE Y Bi

Only D raw of Head 1 is used for the pattern drawing.

� DROPposCONFIRM.

Drop impact of the same head is confirmed. When this is selected, the following pattern is drawn.

Impacts among each color at 4 color mode and impacts against the standard D line can be confirmed.

Adjusting item: Head1-1


(unit: 0.1 dot)

As they are patterns for confirmation, position compensation is not allowed.

Pattern diagram

Fine mode high speed back Fine mode high speed approach

Draft mode high speed back Draft mode high speed approach

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

3-28


1. Execute “DROP.POS ADJUST”. 2. Select a scan speed for the

standard.

* As of April 28, 2006, select “HiSPEED SCAN”.

3. Select a Head Gap for the

standard.

* As of April 28, 2006, select “Low”.

#HEAD ADJUSTSLANT ADJUST <ent> [�]

#HEAD ADJUSTSTAGGER ADJUST <ent> [�]

#HEAD ADJUSTDROP.POS ADJUST<ent> [ENTER]

#DROP POS. MODESELECT :HiSPEED SCAN

[�] / [�]: For Scan Speed

[ENTER]: Fix (to Next)

:Normal-SCAN

#DROP POS. HsGAP SELECT :Low

[�] / [�]: For Gap


:High

4a. Select the aimed correction mode

to be adjusted.

4b. ~ Print Mode List ~

#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT Y BASE

[�] / [�]: For Mode


DRAFTFINE

BASIS SET

Caution: First select Y-BASE, which

is the base for all

adjustments.

HsLg: High speed scan/LowHsHg: High speed scan/High

SsLg: Normal speed scan/Low

*Standard Mode

Select mode Available print mode

Y-BASE All

DRAFT Y-direction 540dpi

FINE-Lo Y-direction 720, 1440dpi

Caution: Effective adjustment values depend

on print modes. Conduct

adjustment for every mode, or Y

Drop Position may be displaced in

an unavailable print mode.

* Dot position correction at Y base.(As this is the standard, execute

first.)

1. Execute “Y BASE DRAW”. 2. Check pattern with scope.

Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from Head 1 as shown above.

10-1. Y Base Drop

Position

Correction

#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT Y BASE [ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE DRAW :ent

[ENTER]: Print (to Next)

[�]: Correction

Set Media(or confirm)

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

1-21-31-4

3-29


~ OK: Lines are overlapped ~

It is judged OK when the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for Lead 1.To “10-2. Drop Position Correction for other than Y Base”

~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~

Conduct adjustment if the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one for Head 1.

3. Conduct adjustment.

Enter a positive value when the shift is as shown above.

~OK~

Head 1 LineHead 2 Line

~NG~


#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE 1-2 :0.0

[�] / [�]: Correction

[ENTER]: Fix

Head 2 Line

*Correction: “1” for 1 dot

(Approx. 35µm)

Head 1 Line

+

4. Execute adjusting of 1-3, 1-4

similarly, and draw pattern again.

Repeat this until lines are

wrapped over.

* Drop Position Correction for

DRAFT, FINE and BASIS SET

1. Change mode and fix it.

#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE DRAW :ent [ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLgY BASE 1-2 :0.0 [ENTER]



10-2. Drop

Position

Correction for

other than Y Base

#DROP POS. HsLgSELECT Y BASE

[�] / [�]: For mode


DRAFTFINE

BASIS SET

2a. Select the item to be corrected.

Refer to the next table to adjust the items for each mode.

2b. ~ Correction Item List ~

* As of 2006.04.28,correct only “FINE Y Si”, “FINE Y Re” and “FINE Y Bi”.

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTADJUST :Y Si

[�] / [�]: Change item


:Y Re:Y Bi

:FINE Y Si:FINE Y Re:FINE Y Bi

DRFT: DRAFTF-Lo: FINE-LoF-Hi: FINE-Hi*Base + Correction Mode

Mode Items

DRAFT Y Si

Y Re

Y Bi

FINE Y Si

FINE Y Re

FINE Y Bi

FINE-Lo Y Si

Y Re

Y Bi

FINE Y Si

FINE Y Re

FINE Y Bi

FINE-Hi Y Si

Y Re

Y Bi

FINE Y Si

FINE Y Re

FINE Y Bi

Note: Hereafter describe correction

procedures for the following two

modes. Procedures for others are

common to them.

• FINE Y Si & Re

• FINE Y Bi

FINE Y Si

FINE Y Re

FINE Y Bi

3-30


3. Execute drawing of Y forth

(back).

* Hereafter, correction procedure is basically the same as for Y Base.

4. Check pattern with scope.

Check gaps of Heads 2, 3 and 4 from Head 1 as shown above.


It is judged OK when the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is agreed with one for Lead 1.

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Si DRAW :ent


[�]: Correction


Y Si DRAWY Re DRAWFINE-Y Re DRAWFINE-Y Bi DRAW

Head1

Head2

Head3

Head4

1-21-31-4

~OK~


~ NG: Lines are shifted each other ~

Conduct adjustment if the line of Head 2, 3 or 4 is disagreed with one for Head 1.

5. Execute Forth (back) adjust.


6. Execute adjusting of H1-3H, H1-

H4 similarly, and draw pattern

again. Repeat this until lines are

wrapped over.

~NG~


#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Si H1-H2 : 0.0


[ENTER]: Fix

Head 2 Line

*Correction:

“1” 1 dot (Draft: Approx.

45µm, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx. 35µm)

Head 1 Line

+

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Si DRAW :ent [ENTER]

#DROP POS. HsLgY Si H1-H2 : 0.0 [ENTER]



7. Conduct reciprocation printing. 8. Check pattern with scope.

Check the overlaps of forward and return lines with scope.


It is judged OK when forward and return lines are agreed.Complete adjusting.

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTFINE-Y Bi DRAW :ent


[�]: Correction


Y Si DRAWY Re DRAWFINE-Y Si DRAWFINE-Y Re DRAW

Forward

Return

~OK~

Return lineForward line

3-31


~ NG: Lines are disagreed. ~

Conduct adjustment if forward and return lines are disagreed.

9. Conduct adjustment.


10. Repeat pattern printing until the

lines are overlapped.

~NG~

Return lineForward line

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFTY Si H1-H2 : 0.0


[ENTER]: Fix

Forward line

*Correction:

“1” for 1 dot (Draft: Approx.

45µm, Fine-Lo/Hi: Approx.

Return line

+

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT

FINE-Y Re DRAW :ent

#DROP POS. HsLg/DRFT

Y Si H1-H2 : 0.0

[ENTER]

[ENTER]

Execute drawing

Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

11. Reassemble

Covers

3-32


3-2-2. S Pump Assembly

1. Raise Clamp Lever. 2. Remove Pump Cover T.

1. Remove S

Pump Assembly

Raise Clamp Lever

P4x12 SMW (x5)

Pump Cover T(M507253)

Loosen (x3)

3a. Take off Pump Tubes (x4).

* Caution: Be careful not to dirty the periphery with waste or

washing.

3b. ~ Pump Layout ~

* Confirm the above layout to remove the aimed pump.

4. Remove S Pump Assembly.

Loosen the screws to separate S Pump Assembly.

Washing PumpInk Pump Pump1

Pump2

Pump3

Pump4

Pump 1: Ink PumpPump 2: Ink PumpPump 3: Washing PumpPump 4: Washing Pump

P3x6 SMW

S Pump Assembly(M004868)


* Conduct adjustment after reassembly.

* Referring to the removed pump, cut the tubes in the same way.

* See the connection diagram above to certainly connect tubes.

2. Reassemble L

Pump Assembly

from cleaning fluid cartridgeto Sucker fan box assy.

3-33


Pump 1: Ink Pump

Pump 2: Ink Pump

Pump 3: Washing Pump

Pump 4: Washing Pump

1. Enter into#ADJUST MODE

and select “EXCHANGE

PARTS”.

* Start with Maintenance Open Mode.

3. Register Part

Change Record

Content Register No. of changed part

for S Pump Assembly and the

date of the change.

Layout

Tools –

Pump1

Pump2

Pump3

Pump4

[FUNCTION]

FUNCTION#ADJUST <ENT>

#ADJUSTEXCHANGE PARTS <ent>

[�] / [�] :SW[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

L.*> [JV5-01]



[�] / [�] :SW

[ENTER] :Fix (to Next)

2. Select “PUMP” in

“REGISTRATION”, and input

replaced date and pump number.

3. Confirm registered value.

After the confirmation, turn the power OFF to end.

[�] / [�] : SW

[�] / [�] : Change value

[ENTER] : Set

INPUT ITEMDate, PumpNo.

*PUMP 2006.08.?? :No.?

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :PUMP

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set


[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

#EXCHANGE PARTSHISTORY <ENT>

[�] / [�] : SW

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

History indication

*HEAD[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2

*PUMP[ 1] 06.09.15 : No.1

Push [END] several times to end

3-34


3-2-3. Pump Motor Assembly


1. Remove Pump

Motor Assembly

Raise Clamp Lever

P4x12 SMW (x5)


Loosen (x3)

3. Confirm the pump mortar to be

removed.

* Remove corresponding pump mortar with checking above layout drawing.

4. Loosen the screws (x2) for General

Pump Motor Assembly.

Loosen the screws for the aimed pump motor assembly.

5a. Remove General Pump Motor

Assembly.

Slide up the pump motor assembly and remove it together with bracket.

Pump1

Pump2

Pump3

Pump4

Pump 1: Ink Pump motorPump 2: Ink Pump motorPump 3: Washing Pump motorPump 4: Washing Pump motor

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

Wash SideInk Side

Slide up for removal.

5b. ~ General Pump Motor Assembly ~ 6. Remove the pump motor

assembly.

Loosen the screws (x2) and remove Pump Motor Assembly from Pump Motor Bracket LOW.

7. Remove connector.

P3x6 SMW (x2)

Pump Motor Bracket LOW (M507237)

Connector

Pump Motor Assembly (M007175)

3-35



* When multiple pump mortars are replaced, connect connectors referring to above drawing.

2. Reassemble

Pump Motor

Assembly

Pump1

Pump2

Pump3

Pump4

to BOX relay PCB (CN3)

Pump 1: Ink Pump motorPump 2: Ink Pump motorPump 3: Washing Pump motorPump 4: Washing Pump motor

to BOX relay PCB (CN4)

3-36


3-2-4. Cap Head assy.




1. Remove Cap

Head

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Cap Tension Spring G.

* Take care not to lose or give damage on parts, and use tweezers

or long-nose plier.

4. Release the joint between Cap

Head and Cap Base.

Press Cap Head along the arrow to remove.

Maintenance Cover R (M601943) Care to loss & damage

Cap Tension Spring G (M800862)

Cap head assy. (1427776)

Cap Base

Press to remove

5. Take off tubes (x2).

* As the position of cap base is adjusted, do not loosen or remove screws.

6. Remove Cap Stopper. Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

Take off tubes

Cap Stopper(M700426) 2. Reassemble

Cap Head

3-37


3-2-5. Cap Base 1H

* Remove Cap Head before removing Cap Base.

(Removing of a cap space on head 3 position is described here.)

1. Remove

Cap Base

Content When only cap base is

replaced, place a jig before

replacement and conduct

positioning using the tool as a

standard after the replace-

ment.

Tools A Cap base positioning tool

(OPT-J0099)

Notice: Place the jig before removing the

cap base.

If the standard cap base position

is lost before placing the tool

because of removing another cap

bases and so on, conducting of a

large scale adjusting is required.

See “3. Cap Base Position

Adjusting”(p.3-39)



1b. ~ Caution for Power-off ~ 2. Remove Maintenance Cover R.

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


3. Plase the A Cap base positioning

tool.

Moving the jig under left side of cap base and tighten screws (x4).

4. Remove Cap Tension Spring G.

* Take care not to lose or give damage on parts, and use tweezers or long-nose plier.

5. Release the joint between Cap

Head and Cap Base.

Press Cap Head along the arrow to remove.

A Cap base positioning tool

Cap Tension Spring G (M800862)

Care to loss & damage

Cap head (1427776)

Cap Base 1H

Press to remove

3-38


6. Remove cap head.

Rmove tubes (x2), and remove cap head.

7. Remove Cap Spring G ø27. 8. Remove Cap Base.

Loosen the screws (x2), and remove Cap Base from Station Base.

Take off tubes

Cap Spring G ø27 (M800864)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Cap Base (M601839)


* At replacing of front and back cap bases at the same time or replacing whole, execute the following adjusting.“3. Cap Base Position Adjusting”(p.3-39)

1. Assemble with pushing the cap

base to the jig.

Fit Cap Base to Changing Jig and press the Base against the left corner.

~ Top View ~

Remove the Jig after tightening screws. Hereinafter, assemble with reversed procedures from Step 6.

2. Reassemble

Cap BaseBase

* This adjusting is conducted when positioning with A Cap base positioning tool is not allowed.As this is the large scale adjusting, positioning must be conducted the method above mentioned as much as possible.

1a. Remove Right Cover.

Lossen screws back and front screws on bottom side to remove the fol-lowing screws.Bottom side : 2qty

3. Cap Base

Position

Adjusting

Content Conduct at replacing of front and back cap bases at the same time or replacing whole,or adjusting cap position

against head..

Tools All Cap base positioning tool

(OPT-J0098)

Right Cover (M507493)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

3-39


1b. ~ Remove Right Cover ~

Right side face: 4qtyRight top side : 3qty

2a. Lower Station to Bottom End. ~ Station Up/Down ~

Up: CCW (Counterclockwise)Down: CW (Clockwise)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Bottom End

CW: Down

3. Loosen all screws for Cap Base. 4. Temporarily fix All Cap base

positioning tool.

Mount the Jig to Station Base Bracket, and tighten screws (x2).

5a. Manually move Carriage (Head

Base) to Block A.

Loosen (x8)

Temporary (x2)

All Cap base positioning tool

Block B(x2)

Block A

Head BaseSide

Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B on

moving Head Base.

5b. ~ Front View ~ 6. Press the jig backward. 7. Up the station so that block B top

face approaches to carriage

bottom face.

* Take care that other parts do not contact

Contact Head Base with Block

A at the side.

Accessing

Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B on

moving Head Base.

3-40


8. Slowly pull the jig toward you to

contact Block B with the back end

of Head.

9. Tighten the screws for temporary

fixing of the jig.

* Keep the jig at the position on tightening screws.

10. Lower Station to Bottom End and

move Carriage.

Contact

Caution: Protect Head Nozzle from Block B

on moving Head Base. Tighten (x2)


Lower Station to move Carriage

11. Press Cap Base against the left

corner to fix.

Press every Cap Base against the left corner to fix with screws.

12. Loosen the screws (x2)to remove

the jig.

Tighten (x8)Screw(x2)


3-41


3-2-6. Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly

ContentMethod of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle and ID terminal PCB that form a cartridge Assy, is explained.

Tools and Jigs

•Syringe (for sucking ink)•Tape (a little)•Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.)•Gloves

Work Flow

1. Remove Cartridge

Assembly (P.3-42)3. Reassemble Presence &

Near End Sensors (P.3-46)

8. Reassemble Cartridge

Assembly (P.3-49)

4. Remove Solenoid and Nee-

dle (P.3-47)

3. Reassemble Presence &

Near End Sensors (P.3-46)

2. Remove Presence & Near

End Sensors (P.3-45)

7. Reassemble ID Point of Con-

tact PCB Assembly (P.3-48)

6. Remove ID Point of Con-

tact PCB Assembly (P.3-48)

9. Supply and Confir-

mation of Ink (P.3-49)

10. Reassemble Cov-

ers (P.3-50)

1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove ICU Cover F and ICU

Cover R together.

Right side face : 2qtyLeft side face : 2qtyBack face bottom : 2qty

1. Remove

Cartridge

Assembly Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit


pected move.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x2)

ICU Cover F (M507574)

No need to remove

2b. ~ Remove ICU Cover F & R ~ 2c. ~ ICU Cover F & R ~ 3. Remove Maintenance Cover R.

No need to remove

P4x12 SMW (x2)

ICU Cover R (M507575)


3-42


4. Pull out the aimed Ink Cartridges

(x2).

Remove the aimed pair of ink cartridges.


Remove right and left screws to remove the head cover.



Remove 2 cartridges

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)

Head Cover (M507559)Damper Lock SP (M800894) x2

Turn toward you.


Revolve the left and right ends backward to remove.

7a. Remove Damper Assembly.

Pull the concerned Damper Assembly out of Head Unit.

7b. ~ Caution for Damper ~

Turn backward.Damper Assembly

Caution: Do not push clear film to avoid ink leakage.Protect it from tools with a sharp edge.

Do not press.

7c. ~ Damper arrangement(4 color) ~

Arrangement layout of damper and cartridgesat 4 colors in front view.

7d. ~ Damper arrangement(6 color) ~

Arrangement layout of damper and cartridgesat 6 colors in front view.

8. Set a syrunge to the damper.

* This process is conducted for each head (x4).

M M C C Y Y K K K K Y Y C C M M

Ink Cartridges

Damper

HEAD

M M C C Lc Lc K K Y Y C C M M LmLm

Damper

HEAD

Ink Cartridges

syringe

Fixing

3-43


9. Fix a lever of solenoid with tape.

Push down and fix corresponding solenoid (x2) with tape to turn ON (valve open) in manual.

10a.Suck ink in a tube

Discharge ink in a tube with pulling the syringe while pushing damper.

* Suck ink again at assembling process.

10b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~

Tape

Fix Solenoids to “ON”.

Suction with pushing

Notice: Never push the syringe at ink

suction. Ink will leak from the

needle and inside of slot will be

contaminated.

11. Remove the tubes (x2) for the

concerned cartridges.

* Be careful not to lose RS O-ring on removing tubes.

12. Remove Cartridge Coupling

Plates (x2).

13a.Remove Cartridge Assembly.

Loosen screws (x2), and remove the concerned Cartridge Assembly from IC Slot Bracket R.

Remove (x2)

RS O-ring(M700326)

Cartridge Coupling Plate (M507201) x2

P3x5 SMW (x32)

P3x6 SMW (x2)

13b. ~ POINT ~

To make the removal from IC Slot Bracket R easier, a little loosen the screws for the left (keyboard side) cartridge and widen it as shown above.

13c. ~ Cartridge Assembly ~

* Be careful of cables to place on waste cloth.

* Ink Unit PCB Bracket must be removed for some cartridge

position.

Widen a little.

3-44


* Hereinafter, steps are divided according to parts.Refer to corresponding parts.

Presence SensorP.3-45

Near End Sensor

Solenoid ValveP.3-47

Needle

ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly

P.3-48

* Presence sensor, near end sensor

Remove (connector included).

1a. Disconnect the cable from Clamp. 1b. ~ Release cable. ~

2. Remove

Presence & Near

End SensorsRelease cable.

2. Remove Presence Sensor. 3. Remove Near End Sensor. 4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit

PCB.

Identify No. of the concerned sensor to remove from PCB.

TP 2x8

Presence Sensor

Near End Sensor

P3x10 SMW

12316 15 14 ......

Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are assigned numbers within 1-16 for each sensor and solenoid aside from CN No.Assignment is as shown below.

3-45


4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection List

(Presence/Near End Sensors)

* Each sensor has 4 pins and gray cable. Connector is on the upper

left of PCB

No. CN No. Destination

1 CN10 Presence/Near End Sensor 1

















* Keep Near End Sensor Cable from

Cartridge Frame.(See above photo.)

3. Reassemble

Presence & Near

End Sensors

1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.

~ Cable Work 1 ~ ~ Cable Work 2 ~

Keep from frame.

Keep from frame.

3-46


* Remove in the order of valve solenoid, ink needle (valve base).

1. Remove the cable for ID Point of

Contact PCB from clamp.

2. Loosen the screws for Solenoid

Valve.

4. Remove

Solenoid and

Needle Release Clamp.

P3x6 SMW (x2)

3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly

from Valve Base.

4a. Remove connector from Ink Unit

PCB.

Identify No. of the concerned solenoid to remove connector from PCB.

4b. Ink Unit PCB Connection Table

(Solenoid Valves)

* Each solenoid has 2 pins and red and black cable. Connector is on the upper right of PCB

12316 15 14 ......

Connector and cable for Ink Unit PCB are assigned numbers within 1-16 for each sensor and solenoid aside from CN No.Assignment is as shown below.

No. CN No. Destination

1 CN28 Solenoid Valve 1
















4c. ~ Solenoid Valve ~ 5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for

Valve Base and Cartridge Frame

V.

6. Remove Solenoid Bracket.

B3x8 (x2)

Fix nut and loosen screw

Solenoid Bracket(M507348)

TP3x8 F

3-47


7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6

Assembly.

7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly (M007124)

5. Remove

Solenoid and

Needle

1. Release Clamp.

Release the clamp for ID Point of Contact PCB Cable.

2. Remove cable from ID Point of

Contact PCB.

6. Remove ID

Point of Contact

PCB Assembly Release clamp

Remove connector

3a. Loosen the screws (x2).

Loosen the screws (x2) for ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly, and slide it out to remove from Cartridge Frame.

3b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB

Assembly ~

* Replace Contact PCB if the head

of either contact is worn.


Loosen (x2)

TP3x8 F (x2)

Slide out

ID Point of Contact PCB Assembly (E103704)

OK NG

7. Reassemble ID

Point of Contact

PCB Assembly

3-48



* Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube Retaining Screw as pressing O-ring. If O-ring is hanging out,

tighten over again. It is too tight.

8. Reassemble

Cartridge

Assembly

Tube Retaining Screw M6(1033482)

RS O-ring (M700326)

Tighten as pressing O-ring

After ink suction with a syringe, execute cleaning and test drawing to make sure that there is no nozzle missing.

1. Set removed ink cartridge (x2).

Set 2 removed ink cartridge.

2. Set a syringe to damper.

* Execute this process for each head (x4).

9. Supply and

Confirmation of

Ink

Set 2 cartridges

Syringe

Fixing

3. Fix lever of solenoid with tape

Push down and fix corresponding solenoid (x2) with tape to ON ‘valve open) in manual.

4a. Suck ink to fill damper (x4) with

ink

Pull syringe to fill dampers with ink while pushing the dampers.

4b. ~ Caution at using syringe ~

Tape

Fix Solenoids to “ON”.

Suck with pushing

Notice: Never push the syringe at ink

suction. Ink will leak from the

needle and inside of slot will be

contaminated.

3-49


5. Execute hard cleaning

Turn the main power (back side) to ON to execute hard cleaning.

6. Set media to execute test drawing. 7. Check the result of drawing.

* Repeat Test Draw until nozzle skip

is removed.



CLEANINGTYPE :HARD


12----34

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

:NORMAL :SOFT

[TEST DRAW]

TEST DRAW<ENT>

** TEST DRAW **

[ENTER] : Execute



Power OFF

Check result

Nozzle skip OK

Cleaning(Execute several

times)If not improved

goto “9-1. Check Ink Route”(p.3-50)

goto “10. Reassem-ble Covers”(p.3-

50)

* When there is problems on print

quality such as nozzle missing, check ink supply path(in a tube).

1. Remove Rear Cover R. 2a. Visually check tubes.

Visually check whether tubes are filled with ink and free of air bubbles.

9-1. Check

Ink Route

Rear Cover R (M507496)

P4x12 SMW (x11)

Loosen (x4)

2b. Check the loosening of fittings.

* Check 5 couplers at each of 4 branchesx 8 = 40 parts.


10. Reassemble

Covers

3-50


3-2-7. Major Parts for Wash Cartridge Assembly

ContentMethod of replacing presense/near end sencor, solenoid, ink needle that form a cleaning cartridge Assy, is explained. As for ID terminal PCB, see “ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)”(p.3-101).

Tools and Jigs

•Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.)•Gloves

Work Flow

2. Remove Wash car-

tridge Assembly (P.3-52)

7. Reassemble Wash cartridge

Assembly (P.3-56)

4. Reassemble Presence

& Near End Sensors

(P.3-54)

3. Remove Presence

& Near End Sensors

(P.3-53)

8. Filling Washing (P.3-56)

1. Drain Washing

(P.3-51)4. Reassemble Presence

& Near End Sensors

(P.3-54)

5. Remove Solenoid

and Needle (P.3-54)

1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to

enter the Maintenance Menu.

2. Select “DISCHARGE” of

maintenance washi liquid.

1. Drain

Washing

L.*> [JV5-01]

MAINTENANCEST.MAINTENANCE <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[�]/[�]

MAINTENANCEHD.MAINTENANCE <ent> [ENTER]

Power SW ON

HD.MAINTENANCEFIll UP INK <ent> [�]/[�]

HD.MAINTENANCEMaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER]

MaintWashLiquidFILLING UP <ent> [�]/[�]

MaintWashLiquidDISCHARGE <ent> [ENTER]

3. Remove washi fluid cartridge to

discharge washi fluid.

Remove washi fluid cartridge




******--------------

3-51


1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Maintenance Cover R.

2. Remove

Wash cartridge

Assembly Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit


pected move.

Behind Maintenance Cover R (M601943)


Loosen back and front screws on the bottom side to remove the following screws.Bottom side : 2qty


Right side face : 4qtyRight top side : 3qty

4. Disconnect cable from Clamp.

Release the clamps (x3) for Side Relay PCB Cable.


P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Release clamp (x3)

Side Relay PCB

5a. Remove Wash Cartridge.

Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly together with Base to temporarily place to the position shown above.

5b.

* Caution: Lay protection sheet to protect cover from flaw or dirt, and place Wash Cartridge

Assembly there.

6. Disconnect tube.

Loosen fitting screw and disconnect tube from Valve Base.

* Caution: Be careful not to lose RS

O-ring.

P4x12 SMW (x3)

Lay protection sheet.

Tube Retaining Screw M6(1033482)

RS O-ring (M700326)

3-52


* Hereinafter steps are divided according to parts.Rferer to corresponding parts.

Presence SensorP.3-52

Near End Sensor

Solenoid ValveP.3-54

Needle

* Remove presence sensor and near

end sensor(connector included).

1. Release cable from clamp. 1b. ~ Release cable. ~

3. Remove

Presence & Near

End SensorsRelease cable

2. Remove Presence Sensor. 3. Remove Near End Sensor. 4. Disconnect connector (CN7).

Disconnect the connector from Side Relay PCB.

TP 2x8

Presence Sensor

Near End Sensor

P3x10 SMW

Side Relay PCB(E104352)

Disconnect CN7

3-53



* Keep Near End Sensor cable from Cartridge Frame.(See above photo.)

4. Reassemble

Presence & Near

End Sensors

1. Split cable for each sensor. 2. Remove loosening of cable.

~ Cable Work 1 ~ ~ Cable Work 2 ~

Keep from frame.

Keep from frame.

1. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB

Cable from clamp.

2. Loosen screws for Solenoid Valve.

5. Remove

Solenoid and

Needle Release clamp

P3x6 SMW (x2)

3-54


3. Remove Solenoid Valve Assembly

from Valve Base.

4a. Disconnect the connector (CN6)

from Side Relay PCB.

4b. ~ Solenoid Valve ~


Disconnect CN6

5. Loosen nuts and screws (x2) for

Valve Base and Cartridge Frame

V.

6. Remove Solenoid Bracket. 7a. Remove Valve Base N-3 M6

Assembly.

B3x8 (x2)

Fix nuts and loosen screws

Solenoid Bracket

(M507348)

TP3x8 F

Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly (M007124)

7b. ~ Valve Base N-3 M6 Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

6. Remove

Solenoid and

Needle

3-55



* Caution: Be sure to tighten Tube Retaining Screw as pressing O-ring. If O-ring is hanging out,

tighten over again. It is too tight.

7. Reassemble

Wash cartridge

Assembly

Tube Retaining Screw M6

RS O-ring (M700326)

Tighten as pressing O-ring.

1. Turn the power of JV-5 ON to

enter the Maintenance Menu.

2. Washi liquid filling.

* As for detailes of screen transitions at filling, see the

Instruction Manual.

8. Filling

Washing

L.*> [JV5-01]


[ST.MAINTE]

[�]/[�]


Power SW ON

Main Power ON (Back)

HD.MAINTENANCEFIll UP INK <ent> [�]/[�]

HD.MAINTENANCEMaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER]

MaintWashLiquidFILLING UP <ent>

[ENTER]

Execute washi liquid filling

3-56


3-2-8. Damper Assembly




1. Remove

Damper

Assembly

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCECARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, move right side ful-crum pin to inword and remove it from pin hole.

Right


Right

Move fulcrum pin inword, and remove it from pin hole.

Right


Remove a pin from left sgaft hole to remove the front cover.


Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y cover F.

* Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons


Remove right and reft screws to remove the head cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-57


6. Lay media on Platen to prevent

from dirt.

7a. Identify the Head to be removed. 7b. ~ To remove back Damper ~

* To remove Dampers for Heads 1 and 2,

disconnect quick valve for the front head

for servicing.

Lay Media.

(Front)

1

3

2

4




Revolve the left and right ends backward to remove.

9. Turn coupler screw to remove a

tube from coupler valve Assy.

* Conduct the operation with placing waste cloth, though there is no ink dropping basically.

Damper Lock SP (M800894) x2

Turn toward you. Turn backward.

Joint Valve Assembly (M006954)

10a.Remove Damper Assembly.

Remove damper Assy with coupler valve Assy.

10b.~ Caution for Damper ~

* As the damper is filled with ink, take care not to contaminate other parts with ink dropped from the

damper.

Damper Assembly

Caution: Do not push clear film to avoid ink leakage.Protect it from tools with a sharp edge.

Do not press.

3-58



* ~ Caution for Damper ~ * Place damper lock SP so that protrusions on both sides push up coupler part of the damper.

2. Reassemble

Damper AssemblyNot to cut

Caution: Protect film from a sharp edge of a tool.

* Caution: Take the right procedure

to save ink and improve work efficiency.

1. Set media and turn the power ON. 2. Execute “FILL UP INK”.

3. Filling InkL.*> [JV5-01]


Power SW ON

Main Power ON (Back)[FUNCTION]

L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTIONMAINTENANCE <ENT>

[ENTER]

MAINTENANCEHD.MAINTENANCE <ent>


[ENTER]

[ENTER]

3. Choose Head and fill ink.

* Choose a set of Heads 1 and 2 or Heads 3 and 4.

4. Execute test drawing. 5a. Confirm the result of draw.


FILL UP INKHEAD SELECT :12.34

[�] / [�]: Cursor Move

[�] / [�]: Head Choice

:12-- :--34

FILL UP INK*****---------------


[END] : End

[TEST DRAW]

TEST DRAW<ENT>

** TEST DRAW **

[ENTER] : Execute


Power off

Draw Result

Nozzle skip OK


3-59




[NORMAL].



12-- --34

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set


CLEANINGTYPE :NORMAL

TYPE :SOFT

TYPE :HARD

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL] of

cleaning according to nozzle

missing state.

Select [NORMAL] at a few noz-

zle missings.

~ Damper Layout ~

* Designate Head No. (1-4) - Nozzle Row (A-H)

4. Register Part

Change Record

Content Register No. of changed

Damper Assembly and the

date of the change.

Layout See below.

Tools –

A B C D E F G H

(Front side)

1

32

4

~Head Top View~

1. Select “EXCHANGE PARTS“ in

#ADJUST MODE

* Start with the Maintenance Mode.

2. Select “DAMPER“ in

“REGISTRATION”, and input

exchange date and No.

3. Confirm registrations.



[FUNCTION]



[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

L.*> [JV5-01]

(Start with Maintenance Open Mode )

INPUT ITEMDate. HeadNo.-NzlNo.

*DAMPER 2006.08.31:No.1-H

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :DAMPER

[�] / [�] :SW

[ENTER] : Set

[�] / [�] : SW[�] / [�] : Change

value[ENTER] : Set


[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set


[�] / [�] : SW

[�] / [�] : SW[ENTER] : Set

History indication

*HEAD[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2

*DAMPER[ 3] 06.07.23:No.3-E

Push [END] several times to

3-60


3-2-9. Sucker BOX


1. Remove

Sucker BOX

Raise Clamp Lever

P4x12 SMW (x5)


Loosen (x3)

3. Remove cables of FB fan from

clamp.

4. Remove FB Box Fan Assembly.

Remove screws (x4), remove FB BOX fan Assy with a fan guard.

5. Remove pump tube holding

member U.

TP4x50 (x4)

FB Box Fan Assembly(ME104398)

Pinch Screw (x2)

Pump Tube Holder U(M601993)

6. Remove pump tube (x4) from the

suction fan BOX.

7. Remove screws (x3) of fan BOX

stay (A&B) fixing suction fan

BOX.

8. Loosen screws (x3) of fan BOX

stay (A&B) and turn at 90° to

down.

Notice: Place waste cloth not to contaminate other parts with waste liquid dropping. Fan BOX Stay B (M507542)

TB4x10 (x3)

Fan BOX Stay A (M507541) x2

Turn stay at 90°.

3-61


9. Keep lifting Sucker BOX and pull

toward you to remove.

* Take care not to contaminate the floor with waste ink.

Sucker BOX(M601848)


* ~ Cautions for Handling ~

2. Reassemble

Sucker BOX

Notice: Take care not to cut film with

tools having sharp head.

3-62


3-2-10. NCU

ContentAfter replacement of NCU, reset NCULD, register the history of parts exchange, and executetest of NCU.

Tools and Jigs

• Mini-driver (having short handle)

Work Flow

1. Remove NCU

(P.3-63)

3. Reset NCU LD

(P.3-65)

2. Reassemble NCU

(P.3-65)

4. Register Part Change Record

(P.3-66)

5. NCU Test (P.3-67)

* The order of NCU LD reset and exchange history regis-

tration can be changed.




1. Remove NCU

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCECARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole.




Remove right and left screws (x6), and remove Y cover F.

* Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 persons.

Move fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.

RightFront Cover L (M601940/41)

Left RightP4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

3-63


4. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 5. Remove Rear Cover R. 6. Down Clamp Lever



P4x12 SMW (x11)

Loosen (x4)

Down Clamp Lever

7a. Remove KB Cover.

Loosen 4 screws on the right side.

7b. ~ Removeing KB Cover 2 ~

Remove screw on front cover sensor R, loosen a screw on bottom side, tilt to front, and remove lower screws fixing KB cover in the drwaing above.

7c. ~ Removing KB Cover 3 ~

Loosen screws (x3), take out KB Cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.

KB Cover (M601945)

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x4)

Left Right

Front coversensor L

Tilt

Left

P4x12 SMW

P4x12 SMW

Loosen

Not to hit

Left

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x3)

KB Cover (M601945)

8. Disconnect connector from Dot

detection PCB.

Release the clamp for NCU cable and disconnect connector (CN2) from Dot detection PCB.

9a. Loosen screws (x4) for NCU.

Loosen the screws for NCU.

9b. ~ Loosen NCU screws ~

Dot detection PCB

CN2

P4x12 SMW (x4)

3-64


10. Remove NCU. 10b. ~ NCU ~ 10c. ~ Interior after NCU has

removed ~

NCU (E300469)


2. Reassemble

NCU

* Make sure that JV-5 is in the Local Idling State (initializing

operation is completed and being capped) before conducting this adjustment.

1. Select “NCU LD RESET” in

FUNCTION Menu.

* Start with the Maintenance Open

Mode.

3. Reset NCU LD

Content Initialize LD consumption

current value of NCU

As JV-5 issues NCU

exchange message or stops

operation from the LD con-

sumption current value, not

to forget to reset after

exchange.

Tools –

[FUNCTION]


#NCUNCU LD RESET <ent>

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

L.*> [JV5-01]



3-65


2a. Press [ENTER] to reset LD con-

sumption current.

After normal end, press [END] sev-eral times to end.

2b. ~ Error Display ~

Above error display indicates that reset is not completed in normal.Make sure that JV-5 starts with the Maintenance Open mode, and reset again.

2c. ~ Action at Error ~

** Being LD-reset **PLEASE WAIT

#NCU LD RESETLDcons.ELcurr.:RESET

**RESET COMPLETION**

#NCU LD RESETLDcons.ELcurr.:RESE [END] : End

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)!! RESET FAILURE !!

#NCU LD RESETLDcons.ELcurr.:RESE

Error Out-

line

If NCU reset is not conducted

in capping state after starting

the system and initialization

operation is completed,

“RESET FAILURE” error

arises.

Ex.) When reset is executed

in cover open state, it does

not end in normal.

Action Check initializing operation

and capping are in normal.

1. Select “EXCHANGE PARTS“ in

#ADJUST Mode

* Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.

4. Register Part

Change Record

Content Register the date of NCU

change.

Tools –


[FUNCTION]




(to Next)

L.*> [JV5-01]



(to Next)

2. select “NCUsensorUNIT” in

REGISTRATION and input

exchanged date.

3. Confurm Registrations.


INPUT ITEMDate

*NCUsensorUNIT 2006.08.31

#REGISTRATIONPARTS :NCUsensorUNIT

[�] / [�] :SW[�] / [�] :Change

Value[ENTER] :Fix



(to Next)

[�] / [�] :SW

[ENTER] :Fix(to Next)


[�] / [�] : SW

History indication

*HEAD[ 0] 06.10.10 : No.2

*NCUsensorUNIT[ 4] 06.07.23

Push [END] several times to

[�] / [�] :SW


3-66


1. Execute test drawing

5. NCU Test

Content Make sure that replaced NCU

functions in normal with

NCU FUNCTION in FUNC-

TION MENU.

As this function assumes that

there is no nozzle missing,

nozzle missing check must be

done beforehand.

Tools –

[TEST DRAW]

TEST DRAW

<ENT>

** TEST DRAW **

[ENTER] : Execute


2a. Confirm the result of draw.




[NORMAL].

Power off

Draw Result

Nozzle skip OK



CLEANING

HEAD SELECT 1234

12--

--34


CLEANING

TYPE :NORMAL

TYPE :SOFTTYPE :HARD

[�] / [�] :SW



(to Next)

Notice: Select [HARD] or [NORMAL]of

cleaning according to nozzle

missing state.

Select [NORMAL] at a few noz-

zle missing.

3. Select “TEST“ in NCU

FUNCTION Of FUNCTION

MENU.


4a. Execte tests of above 8 items.

* As for detailes of operation flow, see p.2-54 .As for detailes of NCU, see p.2-23 .

4b. ~ NCU Test Screen Configuration 2 ~

After the test is completed, press [END] several times to turn the power OFF.

[FUNCTION]


#NCU

TEST <ent>

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

L.*> [JV5-01]


[REMOTE]+[FUNCTION]+Power ON#TESTNOZZLE CHK TEST<ent>

[ENTER] : Execute[�] / [�] : SW

[END] : To Menu

#TEST

SDRAM CHECK <ent>

[ENTER]Execute[�] / [�] : SW

[END] : To Menu

#TESTF-ROM CHECK <ent>

[ENTER] : Exec

[�] / [�] : SW[END] : To Menu

#TEST

LDconsu.ELcurr.<ent>

[ENTER] : Exec

[�] / [�] : SW[END] : To Menu

#TESTLINE VOLTAGE <ent>

[ENTER] : Exec[�] / [�] : SW[END] : To Menu

#TEST

LD&SensorTEST <ent>

[ENTER] : Exec[�] / [�] : SW

[END] : To Menu

#TESTSERIAL CHECK <ent>

[ENTER] : Exec

[�] / [�] : SW[END] : To Menu

#TEST

LASER TEMP.CHK <ent>

[ENTER] : Exec[�] / [�] : SW[END] : To Menu

3-67


3-68

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3. Overhaul of PCBs

PCBs to be used for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.


3-3-1. Main PCB p.3-70 3-3-10. Keyboard PCB p.3-92

3-3-2. HDC PCB p.3-77 3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB p.3-96

3-3-3. IO PCB p.3-78 3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB p.3-98

3-3-4. USB PCB p.3-79 3-3-13. Side Relay PCB p.3-99

3-3-5. Head Relay PCB p.3-81 3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge) p.3-101

3-3-6. Slider PCB p.3-82 3-3-15. LED PCB p.3-103

3-3-7. Power PCB p.3-85 3-3-16. Take-up PCB p.3-105

3-3-8. Heater PCB p.3-88 3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB p.3-106

3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB p.3-90

~ Head Assy ~

ID Point of Contact

PCB (Wash Cartridge)

~ Left ~Ink Unit PCB

LED PCB (x2)

Heater PCB

Drying Fan Fork PCB (x2)

Slider PCB

Head Relay PCB (x4)

Keyboard PCB

Side Relay PCB

IO PCB

USB PCBMain PCB

Take-up PCB

BOX Relay PCB

HDC PCB (x4)

Power PCB

Dot Detection PCB

3-69


3-3-1. Main PCB

ContentIn changing Main PCB, parameters must be registered to Main PCB ROM after the change. In the view of work efficiency and print quality and to save the time for re-adjusting and re-setting them, make a copy of (upload) the parameters before the change in PC and write (download) them into the new Main PCB after the change.

Tools & jigs

•PC•F/W Upload Tool•USB Cable

Work Flow

1. Upload Parame-

ters (P.3-70)

2. Remove Main PCB

(P.3-71)

3. Reassemble Main

PCB (P.3-73)

4. Download Parameters

(P.3-73)

5. Adjust Main PCB Motor

Current (P.3-75)

* If upload of parameters is unavailable, conduct Parameter Draw to note the values. Then manually register them after

changing Main PCB.

1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/

Down load Mode.

Turn the power ON with pressing [�]+[�].

2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.

1. Upload

ParametersUp& Download Ready!

[�] + [�] + Power ON

(Start with parameter Up/Down load Mode)

2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu ~ 3. Select [Upload] Tab. 4. Select interface.

In [Device] section, check the inter-face connecting printer.

3-70

Overhaul of PCBs

5. Select [JV5.PRM].

Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File].

6a. Execute [Upload!!]. 6b. ~ Indication during upload ~

* Click [Abort] Button to cancel.

PC

JV5

***UPLOADING***

7. Save Parameter File.

Parameter Save Window automati-cally appears when Upload is suc-cessfully completed.Enter file name to save parameters.

8. Turn off the power of JV5.

Confirm the above indication on Operation Panel of JV5 before shut-ting down.

Up & Download ENDPower Off

Power OFF

Note:

If upload is failed or impracticable, conduct Parameter Draw to note the parameter values and manually register them after the work is completed.

1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove MF Cover R.

Don’t take off the screws (x6) but just loosen, and reassembly will be easier. (Be careful not to fall Cover.)

2. Remove

Main PCB



pected move.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x6)

MF Cover R (M507164)

3-71


3. Remove USB Protection Bracket. 4. Remove Surface Cover RS. 5. Remove IF Bracket.

USB Protection Bracket (M507828)

P3x10 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Surface Cover RS (M507507)

IF Bracket (M507318)

B3x6

6. Release HDC PCB Connectors.

Loosen the screws (x8) for HDC PCBs (x4) and pull a little toward you to disconnect from Main PCB.

7a. Disconnect Main PCB Connec-

tors.

7b. ~ Release connectors (Upper) ~

Release HDC PCB connector

P3x10 SMW (x8)

Release connector.

Release connectors

8. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB

PCB Assembly.

9. Remove USB PCB Assembly.

Remove USB PCB Assembly from Main PCB Connector together with IF Relay.

10a.Remove Main PCB Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x8) and the hexagon studs (x4) to take laterally out of printer.

P3x10 SMW (x4)

USB PCB Assembly(E103711)


IF Relay PCB

P3x10 SMW (x8)

SQ-30 (x4)

3-72

Overhaul of PCBs

10b.Remove memory PCB Assy (x2).

Remove memory PCB Assy(x2) from main PCB.

10c. ~ Memory PCB Assembly ~ 10d. ~ Main PCB Assembly ~

MemoryPCB Assy(E104090) x2

MemoryPCB Assy (E104090) Main PCB Assy

(E104082)

* To connect USB PCB (IF Relay

PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit the connector to the bottom.

* Put cover inside of loosened

screws to tighten them.

3. Reassemble

Main PCB

OK

A washer of screw is outside of the

cover

A washer of screw is inside of the

cover.

NG

1. Start JV5 with parameter Up/

Down load Mode

Turn the power ON with pressing [�]+[�].

2a. Start F/W Upload Tool.

4. Download

ParametersUp& Download Ready!

[�] + [�] + Power ON

(Start with parameter Up/Down load Mode)

3-73


2b. ~ F/W Upload Tool Menu~ 3. Select [Download] Tab. 4. Select Interface.

In [Device] section, check the inter-face connecting printer.

5. Select [JV5.PRM].

Select [JV5.PRM] in [PRM File].

6. Select the file to be downloaded.

Click [Browse] Button to select the file uploaded before PCB change.

7a. Execute [Download!!]

7b. ~ Indication during download ~

* Click [Abort] Button to cancel.

8. Confirmation of success

Above dialog appears when down-load is successfully completed.Click [OK] Button.

9. Shut down JV5.

Confirm the above indication to appear on JV5 Operation Panel before shutting off the power.

PC

JV5

***DOWNLOADING***

Up & Download ENDPower Off

Power OFF

3-74

Overhaul of PCBs

~ Motor Current Adjust Outline ~

* Adjust value varies on each motor and each machine

* Adjustable range is within 130~160 on each motor.

5. Adjust Main

PCB Motor

Current

Content Adjust electric current of X-

motar and Y-motor.

3 adjust items are shown in

the right. 2 adjustments are

conducted on each motor.

Adjusting

contents

Set to minimum motorHunt-

ing noise at operation of each

motor.

Tools –

STOP ADJUST

Y MOVING ADJUST

X MOVING ADJUST

On X-Motor: Stop adjust

X moving adjust

On Y Motor: Stop adjust

Y moving adjust

1. Select “MOTOR CURRENT” in

#ADJUST MODE


2. Execute “STOP ADJUST”.

Adjust electric current value of X-motor and Y-motor so that Hunting noise of both motor is minimized on the station in not carriage out.

3a. Execute “X MOVING ADJUST”.

[FUNCTION]



[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

L.*> [JV5-01]


(Start with Maintenance Open Mode) #MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [ENTER] : Set


X = 0 Y = 0 (****) (****)

0~255 (Input Range)

[�] / [�] : CV[�] / [�] :SW

[ENTER] : Ret

#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [�] / [�] : SW

#X MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : CV[�] / [�] :Set

[ENTER] : Return

#MOTOR CURRENTX MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

3b. Input test conditions to execute

* Input the following conditions.Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/sAcceleration (A) : 0.2 G

Length (X) : approx. 50 ~ 100 mm

3c. With listening to Hunting noise at

X-motor driving, adjust value to

minimize the noise.

Check the noise of X-motor at the left back side of JV-5.

4a. Execute “Y MOVING ADJUST”.

#X MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : CV [�] / [�] : Move[ENTER] : Exec

[END] : Return

X-axis consecutive drive (X-mortar drive)

* * Not Cap OFF

#XmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx)

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC

[END] : Ret

(At X-motor drv.)

Input values with target-ting 130~160 . (Input range 0~255)[END]



#Y MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GY= 100mm

[�] / [�] : CV[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Return

#MOTOR CURRENTY MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

3-75



* Input the following conditions.

Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/sAcceleration (A) : 1.0 GLength (Y) : approx.

50 ~ 100 mm


Y-motor driving, adjust value to

minimize the noise.

Check the noise of Y-motor at the right back side of JV-5.

5. Press [END] prulal of times to end.

#Y MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GY= 100mm

[�] / [�] : CV[�] / [�] : Move

[ENTER] : Exec[END] : Return

(Carriage out)

Y-axis consecutive drive

(Y-motor drive)

#YmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx)

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GY= 100mm

[�] / [�] : CV[END] : Return

(At Y-motor drv.)

Input values with target-ting 130~160 .

(Input range 0~255)[END]


#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [END] :Return

End

3-76

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-2. HDC PCB



1. Remove

HDC PCB



pected move.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x6)


3. Release FPC Clamp. 4. Loosen the screws (x2) and slide

HDC toward you.

Loosen the screws (x2) for the aimed HDC and draw out HDC toward you to release connector.

5. Remove FPC(x4) to take out.

Release clamp.

P3x10 SMW (x2)

HDC4 (CN14)

HDC2 (CN12)

HDC3 (CN13)

HDC1 (CN11)

Loosen screws and draw out.

Remove FPC(x4)

6. Remove HDC Bracket from HDC

PCB Assembly.


* Put cover inside of loosened screws to tighten them.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

HDC PCB Assembly (E104083)

HDC Bracket (M507162)

2. Reassemble

HDC PCBA screw washer is outside of the

cover.

Screw washer is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-77


3-3-3. IO PCB



1. Remove

IO PCB



pected move.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x6)


2a. Release clamps (x2) to remove

connectors.

Release upper and lower clamp to disconnect all connectors for II/O PCB.

2b. ~ Remove clamps and connectors. ~ 3a. Remove IO PCB Assembly.

Clamp

ClampP3x10 SMW (x5)

IO PCB Assembly (E104085)

3b. ~ IO PCB Assembly ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.


2. Reassemble

IO PCBA screw washer is outside of the

cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-78

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-4. USB PCB



1. Remove

USB PCB



pected move.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x6)


2. Remove USB Protection Bracket. 3. Remove Surface Cover RS. 4. Remove IF Bracket.

USB Protection Bracket (M507828)

P3x10 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Surface Cover RS (M507507)

IF Bracket (M507318)

B3x6

5. Loosen the screws (x4) for USB

PCB Assembly.

6. Remove USB PCB Assembly.

Remove USB PCB Assembly from Main PCB Connectors together with IF Relay PCB.

7a. Remove IF Relay PCB.

P3x10 SMW (x4)



IF Relay PCB

IF Relay PCB

(E103701)

3-79


7b. ~ USB PCB Assembly ~

USB PCB Assembly (E103711)


* To connect USB PCB (IF Relay

PCB) with Main PCB, certainly fit the connector to the bottom.

* Put cover inside of washers for

loosened screws to tighten them.

2. Reassemble

USB PCBA screw washer is outside of the

cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-80

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-5. Head Relay PCB


1. Remove Head

Relay PCB



pected move.


2a. Release 2 Clamps (upper left,

lower right).

Release the clamps for the aimed Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB.

2b. ~ PCB Layout ~ 3. Remove Head Relay PCB.

Remove Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB Assembly.(Inter-board Connector)

Head Relay PCB (E104237)

Release upper & lower clamps.

Head1

Head3

Head2

Head4

Inter-board Connector

4. Disconnect connectors and FPCs.

Disconnect the connector (CN3) and FPCs (CN1,2) from Head Relay PCB.


* To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider PCB, first hang the lower right

clamp as shown above.

Connector

FPC (x2)

2. Reassemble

Head Relay PCB

Right bottom first

3-81


3-3-6. Slider PCB


1. Remove

Slider PCB



pected move.


2. Remove Rear Cover R. 3. Remove the head cover.


4. Fix FPCs with tape.

Bind 2 places shown in the picture with tape for avoiding a mess at removing FPC.


P4x12 SMW (x11)

Loosen (x4)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


Fix with tape.

5. Disconnect all FPCs. 6a. Remove all of Head Relay PCBs.

Release clamps (upper left & lower right) on Slider PCB fixing Head Relay PCB.

6b. ~ Remove Head Relay PCB~

Disconnect Head Relay PCB from Slider PCB Assembly.(Inter-board Connection)

Disconnect FPC

Head Relay PCB (E104237)

Release U/L Clamps.

Inter-board Connector

3-82

Overhaul of PCBs

7. Release all connectors.

Release all connectors and ground-ing wires from the lower left of Slider PCB.

8a. Loosen the screws (x6) for Slider

PCB.

Loosen all the screws including grounding wire on the lower left of Slider PCB.

8b. ~ Disconnect grounding wire. ~

Release connectors

P3x10 SMW (x6)

Grounding Wire

Disconnect grounding wire.

9a. Remove Slider PCB.

Shift Slider PCB left to remove.

9b. ~ Slider PCB ~


* Caution: To connect FPC, align the surface of terminal and

certainly insert to the bottom. Be careful of wrong connection. There are many connectors.

* Layout of each Head Relay PCB is shown above. Be careful of wrong

connection.

2. Reassemble

Slider PCB

Head1 Head3 Head2 Head4

CN6

CN7

CN8

CN9

CN10

CN11

CN12

CN13

CN14

CN15

CN16

CN17

HDC2 HDC4HDC3HDC1

Head

1

Head

3

Head

2

Head

4

3-83


* To fix Head Relay PCB to Slider PCB, first hang the lower right clamp as shown above.

* Do not forget to remove tape applied on FPCbefore placing the cover.

* Put cover inside of washers for loosened screws to tighten them.

Right bottom firstRemove tape (x2)

A screw washer is outside of the

cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-84

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-7. Power PCB

1. Shut off the main power.

* Be sure to shut the main circuit

breaker on the back to prevent unexpected move.

2. Remove MF Cover C.

Take off Cap Station Covers behind the printer.130S: MF Cover C 130 (M507418)160S: MF Cover C 160 (M507165)

1. Remove

Power PCB

Behind

Warning: Start operation after 5 min-utes elapssing from the main power OFF.Residual high voltage may cause electric shock.

MF Cover C 160/130

P4x12 SMW (160:12, 130:10)

Loosen (160:8, 130:6)

3. Release all connectors.

Remove 3 connectors(CN 1, 4, 5) connected to the Power PCB.

4a. Remove Power PCB Assembly.

Remove screws (x9), and remove the PCB with taking care not to get electrich shock.

4b. ~ Warning st Removing the PCB ~

Power PCB Assembly(E300428)

P3x10 SMW (x9)

Warning: Take care not to get electric shock!!Never touch to solder behind power PCB.Residual high voltage may cause electrick shock.

4c. ~ Removing PCB ~

* Hold the PCB as shown in the picture above not to touch the back surface of the PCB.

4d. ~ Power PCB Assembly ~

3-85


1. Select “VOLTAGE CHECK” in

#TEST MODE


2. Adjust Power

PCB Voltage

Content Use volume for each power

source for adjustment.

Volume No. +42V : VR4

+24V : VR1

+5V : VR2

+3.3V : VR3

Tools Slotted screwdriver

Warning: The power in ON at this adjust. Use above tools, and touch only instructed parts.

[FUNCTION]

#TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ent>

#TEST

VOLTAGE CHECK <ent>

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

L.*> [JV5-01]



2a. Adjust volume with checking dis-

plays on LCD.

2b. Turn volume checking LCD. VR1 Adjustment

3.3V -> 3.3V (****) 5V -> 5.0V (****)

24V -> 24.0V (****)42V -> 42.0V (****)

VR2 VR4

VR1

VR3

VR1 : +24VVR1: +24V

VR2 Adjustment VR3 Adjustment VR4 Adjustment

VR2: +5V VR3: +3.3V VR4: +42V

3-86

Overhaul of PCBs


* Caution: Reassemble MF Cover C in the same height so that adjacent Guide Rails come into flat. And

check whether Roll Base slides smoothly.


3. Reassemble

Power PCB

Sliding must be smooth.

Roll Base Possible same height


cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-87


3-3-8. Heater PCB


* As the front power switch does not

stop the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover L.

1. Remove

Heater PCB

Behind

Warning: Take care not to get electric shock!! Be sure to turn the power OFF with rear power SW.

Maintenance Cover L (M601944)

3. Remove Left Cover.

Loosen screws (x2) on bottom side to remove the cover.

4. Remove Rear Cover L.

Loosen screws (x3) on bottom side, and remove screws shown in the pic-ture above to remove the cover.

5. Disconnect all connectors.

P4x12 SMW (x11)

Left Cover (M507494)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)

Rear Cover L (M507497)

Heater PCB Assembly(E104043)

6a. Remove Heater PCB Assembly.

Release the hook on the top of Lock-ing Guard Spacer (x4) to remove.

6b. ~ Heater PCB ~

Locking Guard Spacer

Pinch to release

Heater PCB Assy(E104043)

3-88

Overhaul of PCBs


* See the above illustration for right connection.

~ Connection ~

2. Reassemble

Heater PCB

Red: Pre-heater

Upper: To SSR

Blue:Printheater

Black:After-heater

Lower: To thermostat of each Heater Assembly

Any of same colors will do.




cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-89


3-3-9. BOX Relay PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 2. Raise Clamp Lever.

1. Remove

BOX Relay PCB



pected move.

Behind

Raise Clamp Lever.

3. Remove Pump Cover T.

Loosen bottom side screw (x3), and remove top right and left screws (x3).

4. Remove connectors (x2) on

bottom side of the printer.

Remove connectors for the dryer fan and the exhaust duct connected to the relay BOX.

5. Disconnect all connectors (x7).


P4x12 SMW (x5)

Loosen (x3)

BOX Relay PCB Assembly (E104351)

6a. Remove BOX Relay PCB Assem-

bly.

6b. ~ BOX Relay PCB ~ 6c. ~ BOX Relay PCB (Connector) ~

P4x12 SMW (x4)

L: Exhaust ductAssy side

R :Dryer FANAssy side

3-90

Overhaul of PCBs


* Connector connections on the bottom side of the printer are shown in the picture above.


2. Reassemble

BOX relay PCB

L: Exhaust ductAssy side (white)

R :Dryer FANAssy Side (black)


cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-91


3-3-10. Keyboard PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove Front Cover L.

Open the cover, move the right ful-crum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole.

1. Remove

Keyboard PCB



pected move.

Behind

Move flucrum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole

Right

Front Cover L (M601940/41)


Remove the pin from the left shaft hole to remove the front cover.






P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)


5. Down Clamp Lever 6a. Remove KB Cover.

Loosen right 4 screws.

6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~

Remove ascrew over thr front cover sensor R, loosen a bottom screw, and remove lower screws fixing the KB cover shown in the picture above.

Down Clamp Lever

KB Cover (M601945)

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x4)

Right

Front cover Sensor R

Tilt

Left

P4x12 SMW

P4x12 SMW

Loosen

3-92

Overhaul of PCBs


Loosen screwa (x3), remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.

7a. Remove KB Panel.

Loosen the screws (x4) and discon-nect connectors from Keyboard PCB.

7b. ~ Disconnect connectors of KB

Panel. ~

Turn KB Panel 180° toward you to disconnect connectors (x4).

Not to hit

Left

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x3)

KB Cover (M601945)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

KB Panel (M601980)

Disconnect connectors.

8a. Remove Keyboard PCB Assembly.

* Caution: Lay KB Panel down to remove Keyboard PCB so as to prevent KB Top from losing or

falling.

8b. ~ Behind KB Panel ~ 8c. ~ Keyboard PCB Assembly ~

TP3x8 F (x6)

Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104089)

* Caution: Check the surface and within window of LCD for dirt

and dust before reassembly.

1. Reassemble Keyboard PCB

Assembly.

* Point: Lay thick things left and

right under KB Panel to make fixing of KB Top easier.

2. Reassemble

Keyboard PCB

Keep from dust or dirt.

Keyboard PCB Assembly Behind KB Panel

3-93


2. Check clicking touch of buttons.

Press each button to check clicking touch.

3a. Reassemble KB Panel.

Join connectors (x4) to Keyboard PCB Assembly.

3b. ~ Reassemble KB Panel. ~

Tighten the screws (x4).

Join connectors.

P4x12 SMW (x4)

KB Panel (M601980)

* Execute test of a keyboard and

LCD with “TEST“ of “MAINTENANCE MODE”.

1. Turn on the power in Maintenance

Mode.

[REMOTE] + [FUNCTION] + Power ON

Table3-1. Troubleshooting

If JV-5 can not be started or an error is displayed, see the table above.

3. Test

Keyboard and

LCD


(Rear) Power switch ON


Error Action

Cover Open Error appears.

Check the designated sensor to keep “ON”.

No indication on LCD

Check connectors to LCD.

Doesn’t enter Maintenance Mode.

Wrong recognition of any key due to excess tightening

Key entry isn’t recognized →(See Table3-2. )

2. Call Test Mode Menu. 3. Start “KEYBOARD TEST”.

Press any key, and the name will be displayed on LCD. (“NONE” is dis-played if no key is pressed.)

4. Close “KEYBOARD TEST”.


FUNCTIONSET UP <ENT>

[ENTER]FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>


[FUNCTION]or [�] x6

[�] x2

(Test Mode Menu)




[ENTER]

Indication of a nameof the pushed key.

#KEYBOARD TESTKey-> NONE

Press all

keys includ-ing JOG.


Test is finished.

#KEYBOARD TEST[END]-> END TEST [END] :

to close

#KEYBOARD TESTKey->[ENTER]

[END] :to close

Press all keys including JOG,

and finally [END].

3-94

Overhaul of PCBs

Table3-2. Troubleshooting 1 Table3-3. Troubleshooting 2 5. Start “LCD TEST”.

LCD TEST automatically scrolls strings within 0x21~0xFF line by line.

Failure Action

Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the same trouble occurs.

Update firmware.

Connector disconnection (Keyboard PCB)

Check the connection (CN3).

KB Top mounting failure

Check key touch. if any is rubbing, disassemble KB Top to assemble over.

Keyboard PCB SW failure

Directly press SW on Keyboard PCB to check.recognization.

Failure Action

Connector disconnection (Main PCB)

Check the connection (CN5). (See P.3-70 )

Cable failure Check Keyboard Cable Assembly for disconnection.

Part failure Replace parts below.• KB Top• Keyboard Cable Assembly (E104362)• Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104087)• Main PCB Assembly (E104082)


#TESTLCD TEST <ent>


[ENTER]

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!””””””””””””””””””””

(Test Start)

6. End “LCD TEST”. Table3-4. Troubleshooting 1 Table3-5. Troubleshooting 2

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

””””””””””””””””””””####################

!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!””””””””””””””””””””

####################$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$

[END]

to end test

#TESTLCD TEST <ent>

Failure Action

Firmware failure? Restart JV-5 to reconfirm the same trouble occurs.

Update firmware.

Connector disconnection (Keyboard PCB)

Check the connection (CN3).

Connector disconnection (Main PCB)

Check the connection (CN5). (See P.3-70 )

Cable failure Check Keyboard Cable Assembly for disconnection.

Failure Action

Part failure Replace parts below.• Keyboard Cable Assembly (E104362)• Keyboard PCB Assembly (E104087)• Main PCB Assembly (E104082)

Reverse he disassembly procedure to Step 7 for reassembly.


4. Reassemble

Covers


cover.


cover.

OK NG

3-95


3-3-11. Dot Detection PCB


Open the cover, move right fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.

1. Remove

Dot Detection

PCB Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit


pected move.

Behind

Move fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole

Right



Remove the pin from the left shaft hole to remove the cover.


Loosen right and left screws (x6), to remove Y cover F.




P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)


5. Down Clamp Lever 6a. Remove KB Cover.

Loosen right screws (x4).

6b. ~ Removing KB Cover 2 ~

Remove a screwover of the front cover sensor R, loosen lower screw, and remove a lower screw fixing the KB cover shown in the drawing above.

Down Clamp Lever

KB Cover (M601945)

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x4)

Right

Front cover Sensor R

Tilt

P4x12 SMW

P4x12 SMW

Loosen

Left

3-96

Overhaul of PCBs


Loosen screws (x3), remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.

7. Disconnect connectors (x2). 8a. Remove Dot Detection PCB

Assembly.

Not to hit

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x3)

KB Cover (M601945)

Left

Dot Detection PCB Assembly (M507497)

P3x10 SMW (x4)

8b. ~ Dot Detection PCB Assembly ~

Dot Detection PCBAssembly (E104091)


2. Reassemble

Dot Detection

PCB

3-97


3-3-12. Ink Unit PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 2a. Remove ICU Cover R.

Right side face : 2qtyTop face side : 4qty

1. Remove Ink

Unit PCB



pected move.

Behind P4x12 SMW (x6)

ICU Cover R (M507575)

2b. ~ Removing ICU Cover~

Left side face : 2qtyRear face bottom : 2qty

3. Disconnect all connectors. 4a. Remove Ink Unit PCB Assembly.


P4x12 SMW (x4)

Ink Unit PCB Assembly (M507497)

Locking Guard Spacer

Pinch to release

4b. ~ Ink Unit PCB ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

* Be careful of right connection. There are many connectors.

Ink Unit PCB Assembly (E104086)

2. Reassemble

Ink Unit PCB

3-98

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-13. Side Relay PCB


1. Remove

Side Relay PCB



pected move.



Loosen bottom back and front screws, and remove screws described below.Bottom side : 2qty


Right side face : 4qtyRight top face : 3qty

4a. Disconnect all connectors.


P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

4b. ~ Disconnection of connectors ~ 5a. Remove Side Relay PCB.


5b. ~ Side Relay PCB ~


Locking Guard Spacer (x4)

Pinch to release

Side Relay PCB assy. (E104352)

3-99




2. Reassemble

Side Relay PCBA screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

Screw washer is

inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-100

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-14. ID Point of Contact PCB (Wash Cartridge)


1. Remove

ID point of

Contact PCB Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit


pected move.



Loosen screws on bottom side back and front, and remove screws described bwlow.Bottom side : 2qty


Right side face : 4qtyRight top face : 3qty

4. Release clamp.

Release the clamp for ID Point of Contact PCB.


P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Release clamp.

5. Disconnect connector.

Disconnect the connector of ID Point of Contact PCB.

6a. Remove ID Point of Contact PCB

Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x2) and slide lat-erally to remove from Cartridge Frame.

6b. ~ ID Point of Contact PCB ~

Disconnect connector.Loosen (x2)

TP3x8 F (x2)

Slide


3-101



* Replace Contact PCB if the head of either contact is worn.


2. Reassemble

ID point of

Contact PCB


OK NGA screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

Screw washer is

inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-102

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-15. LED PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 1. Remove Maintenance Cover L.

1. Remove

LED PCB



pected move.

Behind


2a. Remove ICU Covers F and R

together.

Loosen 6 screws:2 on left side, 2 on right side,2 on bottom of back side

2b. ~ Loosen the screws on the right side. ~ 2c. ~ Loosen the screws on the bot-

tom of back side. ~

P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

2d. ~ ICU Covers F and R ~ * POINT: Lift a little and pull toward you for easy removal.

3a. Remove IC Slot Bracket F.

Loosen the screws (x6) to remove IC Slot Bracket F.

P4x12 SMW (x6)

3-103


3b. ~ Remove IC Slot Bracket F. ~ 4a. Remove LED PCB Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x3) to remove LED PCB Assembly.

4b. ~ LED PCB Assembly ~

* Procedure is common to 2 sets of

LED PCB.

IC Slot Bracket F (M507203)

P3x10 SMW (x3)

LED PCB Assembly (E104088)


* After reassembly, check whether

every LED illuminates on startup.

2. Reassemble

LED PCB

3-104

Overhaul of PCBs

3-3-16. Take-up PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Take-up Cover.

1. Remove

Take-up PCB



pected move.

Behind

P3x6 SMW(x3)

Take-up Cover(M507538)

3. Disconnect all connectors. 4. Remove Take-up PCB.

Loosen the screws and remove Take-up PCB Assembly (E104087) together with Take-up PCB Bracket (M507584).

5a. Remove Take-up PCB.

Loosen the screws (x4) and remove Take-up PCB Assembly from Take-up PCB Bracket.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

P3x10 SMW (x4)

5b. ~ Take-up PCB ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

* When winding PCB BKT to the winding unit, do not forget to

place ground wire on the place shown in the picture above, and fasten together.

Take-up PCB Assembly (E104087)

2. Reassemble

Take-up PCB

Tighten with ground

P4x12 SMW

3-105


3-3-17. Drying Fan Fork PCB

1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove a black connector on

lower part of the printer.

Remove a connector for the dryer fan connected to BOX relay PCB.

1. Remove

Drying Fan Fork

PCB Caution: Be sure to shut the main circuit


pected move.

Behind


Assy.




4a. Remove dryer FAN Assy from

right and left stays.

Remove right and left mini-knobs, and remove a belt lock screw.

Right


Right

Left

Mini knob x2(KS-15x16-A)

Belt Screw x2 (M400140)

4b. ~ Removing Druer FAN Assy ~

* Take care not to drop the dryer FAN Assy. Operation with 2 persons.

5a. Remove right and left FAN cover

reinforcer plates.

6. Removing Dryer FAN Cover R

Remove screws to remove the FAN label side cover.

Right

Mini knob

Fan cover reinforcement plate (M507907) x2

B3x6 (x12)

B3x6 (x2/4)

Drying fan cover 130/160 R(M504817/5285)

3-106

Overhaul of PCBs

7. Removing All Connectors

Remove all connectors for the dryer FAN from the dryer FAN fork PCB.

* 2 same PCBs are placed on both sides.

8a. Removing Dryer FAN Fork PCB 8b. ~ Dryer FAN Fork PCB ~

Remove connectors

P3x6 SMW (x2)

Drying Fan Fork PCB Assembly(E103646) x2


* At assembling Dryer FAN Assy,

confirm the front side, and assemble with 2 persons with taking care that the front fase

comes top.

2. Reassemble

Drying Fan

Fork PCB

Frontwithout fan label

Backwithout fan label

3-107


3-108

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4. Overhaul of Sensors

Sensor parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.


3-4-1. Origin Sensor p.3-110 3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder p.3-132

3-4-2. Wiper Sensor p.3-112 3-4-11. Paper Sensor p.3-136

3-4-3. Clamp Sensor p.3-113 3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly p.3-139

3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor p.3-115 3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L p.3-147

3-4-5. Cap Sensor p.3-117 3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R p.3-149

3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor p.3-119 3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L p.3-151

3-4-7. Jam Sensor p.3-121 3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R p.3-152

3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder p.3-125 3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor p.3-153

3-4-9. Y Encoder p.3-129 3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor p.3-158

~ Head Assy ~ ~ LEFT ~

Front Cover Sensor L

Maintenance

Cover Sensor L

Ink Leakage Sensor L

Y Encoder

Cap Sensor

Paper

Thickness

Paper Width Sensor

Jam Sensor

Head Up/Down Encoder

Ink Leakage Sensor R

Ink Leakage Sensor S

Bottom Point Sensor

Origin Sensor

Clamp Sensor

Wiper Sensor

Paper SensorMedia Rotary

Encoder Assembly

Front Cover Sensor

Waste Tank Sensor (x2)

Maintenance Cover Sensor

3-109


3-4-1. Origin Sensor




1. Remove

Origin Sensor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Origin Sensor.

Loosen the screw to remove Origin Sensor.

4. Disconnect connector from Origin

Sensor.


P4x12 SMW

Origin Sensor(0J-6505-N2)

Connector


* On reassembling the sensor, confirm that the sensor is kept

from Origin Sensor Shade Plate on Carriage.When it contacts, loosen a screw to

adjust.

2. Reassemble

Origin Sensor

Sensor

Origin sensor shade plate(M507222)

3-110

Overhaul of Sensors

* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)

1. Select “TEST ”

Start with the Maintenance Open Mode.

2. Select “SENSOR TEST” to

display “Y-ORIGIN”.

3. Test

Origin Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TESTSENSOR TEST <ENT>

#TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] :SW

#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :OFF


[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

3a. Checking ON/OFF Display

Move the carriage manually to check the sensor display on LCD.

* When it is normal, pussh [END] several times to end.

3b. ~ Confirmation at Abnormal ~

If there is a problem on LCD dis-play, make sure that fixing of sensor, positioning of a shade plate and the sensor, and connection of connectors are correct.


#SENSOR TEST

Y-ORIGIN :ON

Carriage is on the original position

Carriage is not on the origi-nal position

Sensor

Origin sensor shade plate(M507222)

3-111


3-4-2. Wiper Sensor

1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2. Remove Wiper Sensor.

1. Remove

Wiper Sensor

Maintenance Cover R (M601943)P4x12 SMW

Wiper Sensor(0J-6505-N2)

3. Disconnect connector from Wiper

Sensor.


* On reassembling Wiper Sensor,

confirm that the sensor is kept from Shade Plate of Wiper Holder Base.

Connector

2. Reassemble

Wiper Sensor

Sensor

Shade Plate

* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE

MODE).

1. Select “TEST ”.

Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and select “TEST”.

2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD

with “WIPER”.

Move the wiper manually, and check sensor display on LCD.

3. Test

Wiper Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW


#TESTCHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] : SW

#TEST

SENSOR TEST <ENT>


#SENSOR TEST

WIPER :OFF

[�] / [�] : SW


#SENSOR TEST

WIPER :ON

Move wiper to checkON/OFF

3-112

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-3. Clamp Sensor

1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2a. Remove right cover and rear

cover R.

Loosen back and front screws on lower part of right cover, and remove screws shown in the picture above.

1. Remove

Clamp Sensor



Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

2b. ~Remove Right Side Cover ~

Remove screws in the picture and take out from the right cover.

* Take care not to drop the cover at removing.

3. Loosen the screw and remove the

sensor together with Clamp

Sensor Bracket.

4. Disconnect connector from Clamp

Sensor.

Rear Cover R(M507496)

Loosen (x4)P4x12 SMW (x16)

P4x12 SMW

Connector

5. Remove Clamp Sensor .

B4x10

Clamp Sensor Bracket (M507806)

Clamp Sensor (PE01130)

3-113



* After reassembling Clamp Sensor, confirm that the sensor is kept from CL Link.


2. Reassemble

Clamp Sensor

Sensor

Shade Plate

OK

A washer of screw is outside of the

cover

A washer of screw is inside of the

cover.

NG

* Check eith “SENSOR TEST” of

“TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)



2. Confirm ON/OFF display on LCD

with “SET LEVER”.

Up/Down lever to check ON/OFF.

3. Test

Clamp Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW


#TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] : SW

#TEST

SENSOR TEST <ENT>


[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :ON

Up/Down lever to checkON/OFF

3-114

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-4. Bottom Point Sensor

1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2a. Remove right cover and rear

cover R

Loosen front and back screws on lower part of the right cover, and remove screws shown in the picture.

1. Remove

Bottom Point

Sensor



Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

2b. ~Remove Right Cover ~

Remove screws shown in the pic-ture, and take out them from the right cover.


3. Remove Bottom Point Sensor

together with Bracket.

Remove Bottom Point Sensor on the back side of printer together with Bracket.

4. Disconnect connector to remove

Bottom Point Sensor from

Bracket.



Bottom PointSensor Bracket

(M507239)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

P4x12 SMW

Bottom PointSensor (0J-6505-N2)


* Caution: On reassembling Bottom Point Sensor Bracket, fix the

bracket so that Shade Plate on Station comes in the center of sensor.

(Procedure is described next.)

1. Temporarily fix Bottom Point

Sensor Bracket.

2. Reassemble

Bottom Point

Sensor Bottom Point Sensor Shade

Plate

Bottom Point Sensor

Bottom PointSensor Bracket

(M507239)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

3-115


2. Turn the pulley and vertically shift

Shade Plate (Station) to the height

as high as the sensor. (CW: down)

3a. Trim the position of the bracket so

that Shade Plate comes in the cen-

ter of sensor, and fix with a screw.

3b.

CW

Down

Sensor

Shade Plate

* Put cover inside of loosened

screws to tighten them.

OK

A washer of

screw is outside

of the cover

A washer of

screw is inside of

the cover.

NG

* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE

MODE)



2. Check ON/OFF display on LCD

with “STATION”.

Up/Down the station manually to check the sensor display on LCD.

3. Test

Bottom Point

Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW



#TEST

SENSOR TEST <ENT>


#SENSOR TEST

STATION :OFF

[�] / [�] : SW


#SENSOR TEST

STATION :ON

Up/Down the station tocheck ON/OFF

3-116

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-5. Cap Sensor




1. Remove

Cap Sensor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3. Remove Station Sensor Protection

Cover.

4. Remove Cap Sensor and

disconnect the connector.


Station Sensor Protection Cover (M507412)

P3x10 SMW

Cap Sensor(0J-6505-N2)

B3x10


* Caution: Fix Cap Sensor so as to keep from Head Height Sensor

Shield Plate.

2. Reassemble

Cap sensor

Head Height Sensor Shield Plate (M507243)

Sensor

3-117


* Checking with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)



2a. Check display on LCD with “CAP

SENSOR”

When “CAP SENSOR” is executed, the station moves to the lowest posi-tion.

3. Test

Cap Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST


#TEST

CAP SENSOR <ent> [ENTER] : Set

#CAP SENSOR

OFF (001)

Sensor read value

Sensor state(OFF, ON, Error)

CAP OFF (Station lowest position)

2b. ~ Cap OFF State ~ 3a. Check LCD display and actual

state, and press [END] plural of

times to end.[END]

3b. ~ Cap ON State ~

#CAP SENSOR OFF (001)

CAP ON

[END] : End

#TEST

CAP SENSOR <ent>

Press [END] several times to end

3-118

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-6. Paper Width Sensor




1. Remove

Paper Width

Sensor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, shift fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.

Right


Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole

Right




Remove right and left screws (x6) and remove Y Cover F.



Remove roght and left screws to remove the head cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-119


6. Remove a Screw of Paper Width

Sensor

Insert a driver into a place on the Cutter Assy shown in the picture to remove a screw fixing the sensor.

7. Remove Paper Width Sensor

Remove the paper width sensor from the cutter Assy.

8. Remove the connector

P3x10 SMW

Insert driver

Cutter Unit Assy. (M006952)

Remove connector

Paper Width Sensor (E103960)


2. Reassemble

Paper Width

Sensor

3-120

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-7. Jam Sensor




1. Remove

Jam Sensor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole.

Right


Right


Right


Remove the pin from the keft shaft hole to remove the front cover.


Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y Cover F. Take care not to drop the cover.

* Operation with more than 2 persons.




P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-121


6. Remove JAM Unit

Remove screws (x2) of JAM Unit Holder BKT, and remove the Jam sensor with the head protection BKT.

7. remove Jam Sensor

Remove a screw and take out the Jam sensor from the head Protection BKT.

JAM Unit

JAM Unit Support Bracket (M507257) P3x10 SMW (x2)

Jam Sensor(0J-6505-N2)

B4x10


* After assembling the Jam sensor

to the Head protection BKT, confirm that shielding part of the Head protection arm does not

touch to the sensor.

2. Reassemble

Jam SensorShielding

Sensor

* If the jig can not be arranged, using of an intervenient having

height of 7.5mm in the JAM unit side and height of 7.0mm in the cutter unit side is allowed.

1. Set screws of both units at tempo-

rary joint state.

* Temporary joint state is that both

units are held lightly.

3. JAM

UNIT&CUTTER

UNIT HEIGHT

Content Adjust assembling positions

of JAM unit (vertical) and

cutter unit (vertical, horizon-

tal) using a jig.

Tools Height adjust jig (Media Jam/

Cutter unit height position-

ing tool)

: OPT-J0108

Note: When only JAM unit is replaced,

adjust the cutter unit at the same

time

Temp. joint

JAM Unit Cutter Unit

3-122

Overhaul of Sensors

2. Down Clamp Lever 3. Set the Jig to Platen

Set 4 bosses of the jig in slots in slots back and front for platen media plate as shown in the drawing above.

4. Push the jig to the end

After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop).

Down clamp lever

Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjust-

ing.

PG setting should be 1.5mm.

Set bosses(x4) in platen slot

Push to end

5. Adjust JAM unit height and fix

fith screws (x2).

* Adjust JAM unit position only vertically. Back-front adjust is not required.

6a. Adjust cutter unit height 6b. Adjust the cutter unit position

back-front.

Decide the unit position so that the cutter tool meets the slot (with push down the cutter tool), anf fix it with a screw.

Height adjust jig

JAM Unit

Height adjust jig

Cutter Unit

Height adjust jig

Push down cutter tool

Slot for cutter tool

6c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supplement ~

* Execute the following cutter tool position check manually before turning the power ON.

7a. Cutter Tool Position Check

Move the head unit to each right, center and left end on the platen, and push down the cutter tool Assy to check back-front positioning.

7b. Re-adjusting of the Cutter Tool

back-front positioning.

Note : Cutter tool positioning slot has

width wider than that of the tool.

Adjust the position within the

range.

Note : When there is no jig, push down

the cutter toolAssy to the platen

face and adjust using the cutter

slot of platen.

Head Unit

R endCenterL end

Check cutter tool position at 3 points

Note : On rare occasions, the tool comes

out of the slot because of assem-

bling accident errors or deiffer-

ences of part accuracies.

In such a case, adjust again to the

back-front optimum position

where the tool always in whole

slot on the platen.

3-123


* Execute “SENSOR TEST” of

“TEST” (MAINTENANCE

MODE).


Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select “TEST”.

2a. Confirm ON/OFF display of the

LCD with “MEDIA JAM”.

Check the sensor display of LCD with pushing the head protection arm manually.

4. Test

Jam Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] : Sw


#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :OFF

#SENSOR TESTMEDIA JAM :OFF

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#SENSOR TESTMEDIA JAM :ON

Push head protection arm to check ON/OFF.

2b. ~ Confirm JAM sensor ON/OFF

~

Head protection arm

Push to confirm sensor ON


4. Reassemble

Covers

3-124

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-8. Paper Thickness Encoder




1. Remove

Paper Thickness

Encoder

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, move the right ful-crum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole.

Right


Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from pin hole.

Right





* Take care not to drop the cover. Oper-ation with more than 2 persons.


Remove roght and left screws to remove the head cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-125


6. Remove the Cutter Assy 7a. Remove the Paper Thickness

Encoder PCB

Remove screws (x2), and remove the paper thickness encoder from Cutter Sensor Bracket

7b. ~ Paper Thickness Encoder PCB ~

P3x10 SMW (x2)

Cutter Unit Assembly

(M006952)

P2x8 SMW (x2)

Paper Thickness Encoder PCB (E103961)


* Assemble the encoder as shown in

the drawing in which it does not contact to the encoder scale.(Set the encoder scale at the center

position.)

2. Reassemble

Paper Thickness

Encoder

Caution: Be careful not to damage Encoder

Scale.

Paper Thickness Encoder

Encoder Scale

* After assembling the paper thickness encoder, execute the

following adjustments.

* When the jig can not be arranged, using an intervenient having

7.0mm of cutter unit side height is alloed.

1. Set the screw of cutter unit to tem-

poral joint state.

* Temporary joint state is that the

units is held lightly.

3. Cutter Unit

Positioning

Content Adjust fixing position of cut-

ter unit (vertically, horizon-

tally) using a jig.



ing tool)

: OPT-J0108

Temp. joint

Cutter Unit

3-126

Overhaul of Sensors

2. Down the Clamp Lever. 3. Set the Jig to Platen


4. Push the Jig to the head side to the

end.

After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop).

Down clamp lever

Notice:Keep the clamp lever down at

adjusting.

PG setting should be 1.5mm.


Push to the end

5a. Adjust the Cutter Unit Height 5b. Adjust the Cutter Unit position

back-front.


5c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supplement ~

* Execute the following cutter tool position check manually before

turning the power ON.

Height adjust jig

Cutter Unit

Height adjust jig

Push down cutter tool

Cutter tool slot




range.




slot of platen.

6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position



back-front positioning.

Head Unit

R endCenterL end









slot on the platen.

3-127


* Execute “ENCODER TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)

* If the media is too thin to read, use a media within the specifications range.



4. Encoder

Test

Content Measure each of media pres-

ence position and no presence

position with downing..

Tools • Media



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST


2. Execute “CUTTER ENCODER”.

Select “CUTTER ENCODER” of “ENCODER TEST” to execute.

3. Check the test results and if there

is no error, finish the test.

#TEST

ENCODER TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set

#ENCODER TEST

LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [�] / [�] : Sw

#ENCODER TEST

CUTTER ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Fix

#CUTTER ENCODER

CHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exce.

[END] :End

#CUTTER ENCODER

Result of a test.

THICK = 0.5mm

Pr=-247 Mr=-231

Pr : Measurement of platenMr : Measurement on media


5. Reassemble

Covers

3-128

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-9. Y Encoder




1. Remove

Y Encoder

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, move the right ful-crum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.

Right


Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from pin hole

Right


Remove the pin from the left sgaft hole to remove the front cover.



* Take care not to drop the cover. Operation with more than 2 per-sons.




P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-129


6. Remove Y encoder BKT.

Remove screws to remove Y encoder sensor with Y encoder sen-sor BKT.

7. Remove connector of the encoder. 8. Remove Y Encoder

Y Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507221)

P4x12 SMW

Remove connector

P2x8 SMW (x2)

Linear encoder PCB assy. (E103961)


* On reassembly of Y Encoder, fix Y

Scale at the position shown above.

2. Reassemble

Y Encoder

Fix Y scale at the senter of the sensor.

Y Scale

Encoder

* Caution: Be careful not to dirt or damage Y Scale.

1. Make sure that the scale locates at

the center of encoder reading part

watching from the side face.

3. Y Encoder

Visual Inspection

Content Check the height of Y

Encoder.

Confirm that Y Scale is

set in the working area of

Y Encoder.

Tools • Pen Light

3-130

Overhaul of Sensors

* When the sensor contacts to the scale, adjust the position of bracket.

Push Y encoder sensor BKT in slightly, loosen or remove a fixing screw to adjust.


* Execute “ENCODER TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)

Y Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507221)

4. Reassemble

Covers

5. Encoder

Test


Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select “TEST“.

2. Execute “LINEAR ENCODER”.

Select “LINEAR ENCODER” of “ENCODER TEST” to execute.

Content Execute the following tests

1. ERROR CHECK

(MAINTENANCE#TEST)

2. VIsual Check

3. PQ check (Test drawing)

Tools Media (for test drawing)



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW


#TEST


#TEST


#ENCODER TEST

LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Set

#LINEAR ENCODER

ActiveWIDTH:****mm [ENTER] : Exec.

(Execute test:3 to&fro)

* Value of operation width is default at execution.

3. Check the test results and if there

is no erro, finish the test.

4. Check contact of encoder

Moving the head unit to each right, center and left on the platen manu-ally, and check that encoder does not contact to the scale in visual.

5. Execute drawing with the settings

above to check Print Quality.

* The pinstripe may appear accord-ing to encoder fixing position.In this case, confirm the fixing posi-tion and fix again.

[END] :End

#LINEAR ENCODER

Result of a test.

M =****.* E = ****.*

Mc= 0.0 Ec= 0.0

Pr : Measurement on Platen

Mr: Measurement on Media

R endCenterL end

Check that enoder does not contact to the scale in visual.

Head UnitY Encoder

6.25 % MC 720x720Hi 4Pass Uni(Drawing only 2nd pass

Drawing Settings

Drawing

Check PQ

Make sure that pinstripe does not appear at a few mm pitch (about 2 - 4mm)

(If not, finish the test.)

3-131


3-4-10. Head Up/Down Encoder




1. Remove Head

Up/Down

Encoder

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.





Open the cover, move the right ful-crum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.

Right


Right

Move fulcrum pin to inward, remove it from pin hole.

Right







Remove right and left scews to remove the head cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-132

Overhaul of Sensors

6. Remove UD Encoder Bracket

Remove screws and remove UD Encoder Bracket with the scale.

7. Remove UD Encoder Sensor

Bracket

Loosen the screw to remove Head Up/Down Encoder together with UD Encoder Sensor Bracket .

8. Remove Head Up/Down Encoder

Remove a connector, remove screws (x2) fixing to UD Encoder Sensor Bracket and remove the Head UD encoder.

P4x12 SMW

Head UD Scale Assy. (E300472)

UD Encoder Bracket (M507223)

P4x12 SMW

UD Encoder Sensor Bracket (M507224)

Linear encoder PCB assy. (E103961)

P2x8 SMW (x2)


* Fix the encoder so that the scale is

at the position shown in the draw-ing at assembling the encoder.

2. Reassemble

Head Up/Down

Encoder

UD Scale must be within the range.

UD Scale

Encoder

* Before executing “HEAD HEIGHT ADJUST” for the next

process, system parameter No.16 is reset to initial value (150) in this step.

1. Display the system parameter

No.16

Start with the System Parameter Input Mode, and display No.16 with [�]/[�].

2. Set initial value 150 to the value

Set initial value 150 to value of sys-tem parameter No.16, confirm and finish the step.

3. Clear

Systemparameter

[ENTER] + [END] + Power ON

(Start with System parameter Input Mode)

SYSTEM PARAMETER000:COMP. X = 0

SYSTEM PARAMETER016:HGLOPOS = 330

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

----> 150016:HGLOPOS = 330 [ENTER] : Reg.

SYSTEM PARAMETER016:HGLOPOS = 150 [END] : End

Confirm value on LCD screen,push [END] plural of times to end.

----> 330016:HGLOPOS = 330 [�] / [�] : SW

*Change to 150

3-133


* As for the detail of head height

adjust, see p.3-12 .

* Keep the clamp down at conduct-ing this adjustment.

1. Execute “BasisHEADheight”

Start with the Maintenance Open Mode, and execute “BasisHEADheight”.

4. Head Height

Adjust

Content Adjust head height to the

standard height (1.5mm)

mechanically using a jig.

Tools 1.5mm Head gap check tool

(OPT-J0097)

Head gap check jig 1.5 (OPT-J0097)



[ENTER]#ADJUSTBasisHEADheight<ent>

[FUNCTION]or [�]


(Start with maintenance Open Mode)

(Carriage moves to over platen)

2a. adjust 1.5mm of gap from platen

manually.

[ENTER] : Save adjust value to end.[END] : Cancel to end.

2b. ~ Arrangement of Jig ~

Arrange the jig on the following plo-sition.

3. Slip the jig in from side face.

Height 1.5mm isadjusted by hand.


*Being Initialized*PLEASE WAIT

[ENTER] : Save adjust value

[END] : Not save adjust value

(After initialization, adjust is finished) Platen face

1.5 mmJig

Up/Down car-

riage with rotat-

ing manually

4. Push the head of jig to the frame. * Push the jig to contact to metal frame in right and left of head.

3-134

Overhaul of Sensors

* Exexcute “ ENCODER TEST ” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)



5. Encoder Test

Content Execute “POSITIONen-

coder” in “ENCODER

TEST” of MAINTENANCE

MODE.

Back and forth operation

from head top position to bot-

tom position is executed, and

returned to the position

before the test to end.

Tools –



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TESTCHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] : S

2. Execute “POSITIONencoder”.

Select and execute “POSITIONencoder” of “ENCODER TEST”

3. When the screen above is dis-

played after the check operation,

the test is end. Press [END] plural

of times to finish.

#TESTENCODER TEST <ENT> [ENTER] : Set

#ENCODER TESTLINEAR ENCODER <ent> [�] / [�] : SW

#ENCODER TESTPOSITIONencoder<ent> [ENTER] : Set

#POSITIONencoderCHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exec.

[END] : End

#POSITIONencoderResult of a test.

St=330Mv=0 Rt=330

~ Check Operation ~

(Head to&fro)

St : Start position(Top)Mv : Move position(Bottom)Rt : End position (Top)


6. Reassemble

Covers

3-135


3-4-11. Paper Sensor


* As front switch does not cut the

power to heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.


1. Remove

Paper Sensor

Behind

Warning:Electric Shock!!Turn OFF the rear power switch.



Loosen lower side screws (x2), and removescrews ahown in the picture above to remove the cover.


Loosen lower side screws (x3), and removescrews ahown in the picture above to remove the cover.

5a. Remove PR guide 130/160.

Remove roght and left screws (x4).

P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)

Rear Cover L (M507497) PR-guide 130/160

(M507425/7308)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~


6a. Remove connectors shown in the

right from the heater PCB.

Remove connectors (CN7, CN15, CN16).

6b. ~ Connectors ~

P4x12 SMW (x2)


Connector color qty

Red 2Red(Heater side) 1

3-136

Overhaul of Sensors

7. Remove Relay Connector

Remove the relay connector of ther-mistor at station side.

8. Remove screws on lower side of R

Heater Cover Assy

130S : 4qty160S : 5qty

9. Loosen acrews on upper part of R

Heater Cover Assy in Printer

front side.

130S : 6qty160S : 7qty

P4x12 SMWLoosen screw

10. Remove cables from the frame

Remove cables before removing R Heater Cover so that cables will not to be mess.

11. Remove RHeater Cover

* Take care not to give damage on the cover or other parts.

12. Remove connector and Paper Sen-

sor

* Do not remove Paper Sensor R Bracket. It is the base for positioning Media Encoder.

R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy.(M006926/M006924)

P3x12 (SMW)

Paper Sensor(PS-R11L-B)

Paper Sensor R Bracket(M507156)


* Caution: See the above illustration for right connection.


2. Reassemble

Paper Sensor

Red: Pre-heater Blue:Printheater

Black:After-heater


Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater AssyA screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-137


* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of



Start with Maintenance Open Mode and select “TEST”.

2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD

with “R.PAPER”.

Shield light around sensor part and check sensor display of LCD.

3. Test

R. PAPER

Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] :

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST



#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :OFF

#SENSOR TESTR.PAPER :OFF

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#SENSOR TESTR.PAPER :ON

Shield light around sensor part to check ON/OFF

3-138

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-12. Media Rotary Encoder Assembly

ContentRemove Media rotary encoder under the platen (Print heater).Major scale operation. Conduct with more than 2 oersins.

Tools & jigs

•Fixing pin (for roll screen)•Glove

Work Flow

1. Remove Drying fan

Assembly (P.3-139)

2. Remove Media Rotary Encoder Assembly (P.3-141)

A Heater Cover Assy.

P Heater Assy.

Media Rotary Encoder Assembly

3. Reassemble Rotary Encoder

Assembly (P.3-144)

4. Rotary Encoder Decenter-

ing Compensation (P.3-145)

1. Remove connectors (x2) on lower

side of the printer.

Remove connectors for dryer fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB.


Assy.


1. Remove

Drying fan

Assembly

Right



3a. Loosen screws (x2) shown in the

picture.

Loosen screws (x2) fixing right roll holder plate.

3b. Release lock of stop plate for

holder plate in the left side.


Right

Loosen (x2)

Right

Roll screen

Left

Notice: If a spring of roll screen is released, winding becomes dif-ficu-lut. Take care until it is fixed with a pin.

3-139


4. Remove roll screen from shaft

bush of support fitting.

* When the roll screen is removed, the spring is released.

Wind up the spring at assembling.

5. Remove exhaust cover L.

Remove lower screw with hexago-nal wrench, and tighten upper screws (x2) to remove cover.

6a. Remove exhaust cover R.

Remove screw to fix exhaust cover R to exhaust cover R holde.

Right

Exhaust cover L(M507882)

CS 6x15

Loosen (x2)

Left

P4x12 SMW

Exhaust cover R holder

Right

6b. ~ Remove exhaust cover R. ~

Loosen upper screws (x2) to remove exhaust cover R.

7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from

stayes in both sides.

Remove right and left mini-knobs and remove the belt lock screw.

7b. ~ Remove Dryer FAN Assy ~

* Conduct with 2 persons not to drop the Dryer FAN Assy.

Loosen (x2)

Exhaust cover R(M507881)

Left



Right

Mini knob

Drying fan Assy. 130/160(M007141/40)

8. Remove exhaust cover bracket. 9. Remove drying fan stay L.

* As the part is heavy, work with more than 3 personnel.

10. Remove drying fan stay R.

P4x12 SMW (x5)

Exhaust cover bracket (M507883)

Left Left

Screw (x2)

Drying fan stay L(M507880) Right

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Drying fan stay R(M507879)

3-140

Overhaul of Sensors


* As the front switch does not cut

the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear for getting electric shock.


2. Remove

Media Rotary

Encoder

Assembly

Behind

Warning:Electric Shock!!Turn OFF the rear power switch. Maintenance Cover L (M601944)


Loosen lower screws (x2) and remove the screws shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.


Loosen lower screws (x3) and remove the screws shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.

5. Remove MF Cover R.


P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)


P4x12 SMW (x8)

Loosen (x6)



Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward, and remove it from the pin hole.




Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove Y Cover F.


Move fulcrum pin to inward,

and remove it from pin hole



Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

3-141


8. Remove H Harness Cover. 9. Remove Maintenance Space

Cover.

Loosen the screws (x4) to remove Maintenance Space Cover in the arrow direction.

10a.Remove the connectors shown

right from Heater PCB.

P4x12 SMW (x3)

H Harness Cover(M507183)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Remove in arrow direction.

Maintenance Space Cover (M507182)


10b. ~ Connector List ~

Print Heater: Blue ConnectorAfter Heater: Black Connector

11. Release cable clamps (x8). 12a.Loosen the screw for A Heater

Cover Assembly.

Upper: P3 x 10 SMW (x4)

Lower: P4 x 12 SMW (x4)

Body Color Qty

Black 4Blue 4Blue (Heater Side) 1

Release clamps (x8)

P3x10 SMW (x4)

12b. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~

130S: A Heater Cover 130 Assembly (M006927)


13a.Remove A Heater Cover Assem-

bly.

Take cable out of clamp.

13b.Release Heater Connector.

* Be careful not to damage the surface of A Heater Cover.

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Loosen (x4)

Caution: Hold A Heater Cover with a hand on

loosening screws to prevent cover

from falling.

Take out cable. Left

Release connector.

Right

3-142

Overhaul of Sensors

14. Loosen the screws (x24) for P

Heater Assembly.

* Slide Media Plate and certainly loosen the lower screws.

15a.Process Heater Cable.

Release all clamps for Heater cable (Blue) on the left of printer to lead through bush.

15b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~

Media Plate (M507157)

B3x10 Ni (x24)

P Heater Assembly

Release clamp (x8)

Lead through bush.

Lead through bush after releasing all clamps.

16. Process Thermistor Cable.

Release connector of Thermistor and cable from clamps to lead through bush.

17. Remove P Heater Assembly.

* Carefully use both hands to handle cables so as to prevent

them from hanging.

18a.Loosen the screws (x4) for Media

Rotary Encoder.

Release connector

Release clamps(x2)Put through bush

Release connector and clamps to lead through bush. P Heater Assembly

Media Rotary Encoder Assembly (E300468)

18b. ~ Loosen the screws. ~ 19. Disconnect the connector (CN9) of

Rotary Encoder.

Remove connector of CN9 from the Main PCB.

20. Remove Rotary Encoder

Assembly.

P4x12 SMW (x4)

CN9

Media Rotary Encoder Assembly (E300468)

3-143



* Be sure to reassemble Media Plate on reassembling P Heater Assembly. Follow the next

procedure to smoothly reassemble.

1. Tighten the upper screws pressing

Plate against the back.

3. Reassemble

Rotary Encoder

Assembly

Media Plate(M507157)

Fix screws with pushing

2. To tighten the lower screws, pull

Plate toward you and press Slide

Bar against the back.

3. Put on the other in the same way.

* After assembling, confirm that it moves smoothly with sliding it

horizontally.

* Run Heater Cables (Blue) around

each clamp on each end in front of printer.

Pull plate

Push slide bar

Smooth moving

Right

Left

* Remove loosening of cables referring to the above to connect

to Heater PCB.

* Caution: Refer to the above illustration to ensure right

connection.

* Connector connection printer lower side is shown in the picture

above.

Red:Pre-heater

Blue:Printheater

Black:After-heater

Lower:Connect to Thermostat of each Assembly

Any of same color will do.

R : Dryer FANAssy side (Black)

L: Exhaust duct Assy side (White)

3-144

Overhaul of Sensors


* Check front side and back side at assembling the Dryer FAN Assy and set that front side comes top.

Operation with 2 persons.

* Wind the spring and fix it with a pin, and after fixing to hold fitting, take the pin out at assembling the

roll screen.

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG Front Side

Without fan label

Back Side

With fan label

Left

* At fixing loosen roll screen hold

fitting, fix the screw with pushing the roll screen to inward.

Fix with pushing

Right

Roll screen

* Execute “MEDIA ENCODER” of “ADJUST” (MAINTENANCE

MODE) for Desentering Compensation(Automatic).

* Use cut sheet media instead of roll paper as using of the roll paper may cause bad influence on decentering compensation because of back tension.Use media having more than 800mm of feed direction.

1. Select “ADJUST”.

Start with the Maintenance Open Mode and select “ADJUST”.

* Execute after completing Media Detection.

4. Rotary

Encoder

Decentering

Compensation

Content Execution of automatic

decentering compensation

Tools The following media* is rec-

ommended

Premium Photo paper

(SPC-0213)

Pet Gloss

(SPC-0111)

* If corresponding media can not be

arranged, use firm paper as much as pos-

sible,. paper hard to feed such as arpaulin

is not allowed.



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>


[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

#ADJUST

HEAD ADJUST <ent> [�] / [�] : SW

3-145


2. Select “MEDIA ENCODER” to

execute compensation.

* Do not touch JV-5 during the decentering compensation. Correct adjust values can not be obtained because of vibration or tension.

3. After confirming normal end,

press [END] plural of times to

turn the power OFF.

#ADJUST

MEDIA ENCODER <ENT> [ENTER] : Set

#MEDIA ENCODER

ADJUST START :ent [ENTER] : Exec.[END] : Ret.

**** ADJUST NOW ****

PLEASE WAIT

#MEDIA ENCODER

ADJUST START :ent (Displayed at compensation)

(Approx. 2 min.)

0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0

4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0

8:0 9:0

COMPLETED :ent

End screen at

normal

[ENTER] / [END] :End

3-146

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-13. Front Cover Sensor L


Open the cover, move the fulcrum pin to inward and remove it from the pin hole.

1. Remove

Front Cover

Sensor L

Behind



pected move.

Move fulcrum pin to inward


Right



3. Remove Front Cover Sensor BKT

L

Remove the screw to remove the front cover sensor BKT L with the sensor.

4. Remove the front Cover Sensor L.

Release the connector, and remove screws fixing the Front cover sensor L.

Front Cover L (M601940/41)P4x12 SMW

Front Cover Sensor Bracket L (M507521)


P2 x12 SMW


* After assembling the front cover, make sure that SW dog does not

contact to the front cover sensor BKT.

2. Reassemble

Front Cover

Sensor L

Switch dog L(M507519)

Front Cover Sen-sor Bracket L

3-147


* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)



2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD

with “FRONT COVER”

Open/close the front cover to sensor display of LCD.

3. Test

Front Cover

Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] :SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST



#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :OFF


[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#SENSOR TESTFRONT COVER :ON

Open/Close Front coverto check ON/OFF

3-148

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-14. Front Cover Sensor R



1. Remove

Front Cover

Sensor R

Behind



pected move.

Move fulcrum pin to inward


Right



3. Remove the Front Cover Sensor

BKT R

Remove the screw to remove the front cover sensor BKT R with the sensor.

4. Remove the Front Cover Sensor

R.

Release the connector, and remove the screw fixing the front cover sen-sor R.


P4x12 SMW

Front Cover Sensor Bracket R (M507520)

Front Cover Sensor R

P 2x12 SMW (x2)


* After assembling the front cover, make sure that SW dog does not

contact to the front cover sensor BKT.

2. Reassemble

Front Cover

Sensor R

Switch dog R(M507518)

Front Cover Sen-sor Bracket R

3-149


* Check with “SENSOR TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE MODE)



2. Confirm ON/OFF display of LCD

with “FRONT COVER”

Open/close the front cover to con-firm sensor display of LCD.

3. Test

Front Cover

Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#TEST

CHECK PATTERN <ENT> [�] / [�] :SW


#SENSOR TEST

SET LEVER :OFF


[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] :Fix

(to Next)

#SENSOR TESTFRONT COVER :ON

Open/Close front coverto check ON/OFF

3-150

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-15. Maintenance Cover Sensor L

1. Remove Maintenance Cover L. 2. Remove the screw fixing the

Maintenance SW BKT.

* After removing the screw, take care not to drop the Maintenance

SW BKT.

1. Remove

Maintenance

Cover Sensor L


Left

P4x12 SMW

Maintenance Switch Bracket (M507534/7918)

3. Remove the Maintenance Cover

Sensor L.

Release the connector and remove screws (x2) of the Maintenance Cover Sensor L.


* When the Maintenance SW BKT

is assembled to the main body frame, use the positioning boss for positioning.

Maintenance Cover Sensor L

P2x10 SMW (x2) 2. Reassemble

Maintenance

Cover Sensor L

Left

Positioning Boss

Maintenance Switch Bracket

1. Usual start of JV-5

If an error is not displayed on LCD, OK.If an error is displayed, check sensor assembling.

3. Test

Maintenance

Cover Sensor L

L.*> [JV5-01]

Power ON

* If no error in usual start, OK

3-151


3-4-16. Maintenance Cover Sensor R

1. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 2. Remove Screws Fixing the

Maintenance SW BKT.

* After removing screws, take care not to drop the Maintenance SW

BKT.

1. Remove

Maintenance

Cover Sensor R

Maintenance Cover R (M601943)P4x12 SMW Right

Maintenance Switch Bracket (M507534/7918)

3. Remove Maintenance Cover

Sensor R.

Release the connector, and remove screws (x2) of the Maintenance Cover Sensor R.


* When the Maintenance SW BKT

is assembled to the main body frame, use the positioning boss for positioning.

Maintenance Cover Sensor R

P2x10 SMW (x2) 2. Reassemble

Maintenance

Cover Sensor R

Positioning Boss

Maintenance Switch Bracket

1. Usual start of JV-5

If an error is not displayed on LCD, OK.If an error is displayed, check sensor assembling.

3. Test

Maintenance

Cover Sensor R

L.*> [JV5-01]

Power ON

* If no error in usual start, OK.

3-152

Overhaul of Sensors

3-4-17. Ink Leakage Sensor

ContentJV5-130S/160S uses total 3 of the same type ink leak sensors on right and left cable bears and on the station.At ink leak error, as no position of leaking is displayed though occurrence of leaking is displayed, corresponding sensor must be identified at first. Here, only replacement method of sensors is described. (Replace after taking mesaures for cause of ink leaking .)

Tools & jigs

•Waste Cloth (Bemcot etc.)•Gloves•Conductive block (for sensor check)

Work Flow

1. Identifying Sensor

(P.3-153)

4. Remove Ink Leakage

Sensor R (P.3-154)


Sensor L (P.3-154)


Sensor S (P.3-155)

Identify cause

and take action

Cleaning adjacent

place5. Reassemble Ink Leakage

Sensor R (P.3-155)

3. Reassemble Ink Leakage

Sensor L (P.3-154)

7. Reassemble Ink Leakage

Sensor S (P.3-156)9. Reassemble Cov-

ers (P.3-157)

8. Test Ink Leak

Sensor (P.3-157)




1. Identifying Sensor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Make sure that there is no ink leaking on the left side of Bear Guide.


Make sure that there is no ink leaking on the right side of Bear Guide, or on ink tray of the station.

4. Hereinafter the step is branched. Remove corresponding sensor with referring to the table above.

* When ink leaking position can not be identified, execute check of each sensor.


Maintenance Cover R (M601943)Sensor Name Sensor Position

Ink Leakage Sensor L Bear Guide L end

Ink Leakage Sensor R Bear Guide R end

Ink Leakage Sensor S Station

Ink trayè„

Note : Here replacement procedure of ink

leak sensor is described.

Replace sensor after taking measures

for the cause of ink leaking according

to the situation.

3-153


Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the left end of the bear guide is described.

1. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink

detection PCB.

Loosen screws f(x2) ixing the ink leak sensor L.

2. Remove the connector to remove

the ink leak sensor L.

* Take care not to stick ink to the connector.If ink stuck to the connector, replace harnes at the same time.

2. Remove

Ink Leakage

Sensor L

Ink detection PCB bracket (M507833)

Left

Loosen

Ink Leakage Sensor L(E104534)

Release connector

3. Ink detection PCB

* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohlIf ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.

Conduct cleaning aroung ink leak-ing.


Do not touch pad faces

Cleaning3. Reassemble

Ink Leakage

Sensor L

Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the right end of the bear guide is described.

1. Remove Rear Cover R.

Loosen lower screws (x4) and remove the screw shown in the picture to replace the cover.

2. Loosen screws (x2) of the ink

detection PCB.

Replace the connector, and loosen screws (x2) fixing the ink leak sen-sor L.

4. Remove

Ink Leakage

Sensor R


P4x12 SMW (x11)

Loosen (x4)

Right

Ink detection PCB bracket (M507833)

Loosen

3-154

Overhaul of Sensors

3. Remove the connector to remove the ink leak sensor R.


4. Ink detection PCB.

* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohl.If ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.

Ink Leakage Sensor R(E104534)

Release connector


Conduct cleaning aroung ink leak-ing.


Cleaning5. Reassemble

Ink Leakage

Sensor R

Procedure for replacing a ink leak sensor on the station part is described.

1. Loosen screws of ink detection

PCB.

Remove the screw fixing the ink leak sensor S to ink tray.

2. Replace the connector to remove

the ink leak sensor S.


6. Remove

Ink Leakage

Sensor S

TP3x8 F

Ink Tray(M601968)

Ink Tray(M601968)

Ink Leakage Sensor S(E104534)

3-155


3. Ink Detection PCB

* Do not touch pad faces (x2). If touched, conduct cleaning with alchohlIf ink sticks to the PCB, replace the PCB.

* Conduct cleaning of ink tray and replacement of station absorber according to degree of ink leak.

Hereinafter the procedure is described.

1. Remove ink tray

Remove screws (x4) to remove the ink tray from the station.


Cleaning

P4x25 SMW (x4)

Ink Tray(M601968)

2. Remove the station absorber

Remove screws (x3) and absorber binding boards (x3) to remove sta-tion absorbers (x2).

* If dirt is significant , replace them.

3. Conduct cleaning of ink tray.

Clean inside of the tray with clean-ing fluid.

Station Soak Up Pad(M904829) x2

Soak Up Pad Holder

(M507890) x3

B4x25 (x4)


* When sensor cable is replaced or removed, check the followings.

1. Set the station at capping.

Elevate the station to cap with turn-ing the power ON or the method shown in the picture above.

2. Make a circle around the clamp while the zone of cable shown in the picture above is streched lightly.

* Considering up/down move of the station, slack of cable is not allowed.

7. Reassemble

Ink Leakage

Sensor S CCW : Up

~ R side ~ ~ Printer rear ~

Make a circle

Cable is streched lightly

Notice: Cable slack is not allowed.

3-156

Overhaul of Sensors

3a. Arrange cable on clamp position

shown in the drawing above, and

connect the connector (CN9) to

the side relay PCB.

3b. ~ Cabling and Connection ~

~ Printer rear ~ ~ R side ~





8. Test

Ink Leak

Sensor

Adjust Out-

line

In sensor test, short-circuit

the right and left pad with the

following method, and check

ON/OFF display of LCD.

Adjust

Method

Place a conductive block on

pad faces on PCB to short-

circuit, and check LCD dis-

play.

LCD change : OK

LCD no change : NG

Tool, Jig Conductive block



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW


#TEST


2. Check ON/OFF display of LCD

with “INK LEAK”.

Short-circuit right and left pads and check LCD display. When there is a change in display, finish with [END].



#TEST

SENSOR TEST <ENT>


#SENSOR TEST

INK LEAK :OFF

[�] / [�] : SW


#SENSOR TEST

INK LEAK :ON

9. Reassemble

Covers

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-157


3-4-18. Waste Tank Sensor

1. Remove the Waste Tank

* Take care not to contaminate ambit with waste fluid. Place a cap on the tank or discharge waste fluid from the tank before the operation.

2a. Remove the Waste Tank Assy.

Loosen the screw shown in the pic-ture above.

1. Remove

Waste Tank

Sensor

Remove Waste Ink Tank

Loosen

Waste Ink Tank Bracket Assy.(M007128)

2b. Remove screws (x3)

* At removing the screw, take care not to drop the Waste Ink Tank Bracket Assy, and conduct opera-tion with holding it with one hand.

2c. Remove the Connector. 3. Plug the Waste Tank Relay Pipe

with waste cloth.

P4x12 SMW (x3) Connector

Plug coupler

4. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor

BKT

Remove screws (x2), and remove the Waste Tank Sensor BKT from the Waste Tank Sensor Assy

5. Remove the Waste Tank Sensor

Release the connector and remove the screw fixing the Waste Tank Sensor.

Waste Tank Sensor Bracket (M507299)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

B4x10

Waste Tank Sensor (OJ-796021-702F) x2

3-158

Overhaul of Sensors


* Fix the sensor on the position where it does not contact to the Waste Tank Detection Light

Shield Plate.

* At assembling the Waste Tank Sensor Assy, set the metal plate shown in the picture inside of a

washer of loosen screw.

2. Reassemble

Waste Tank

Sensor

Waste Tank Detection Shield Plate (M507322)

Sensor

* At assembling the Waste Tank Sensor Assy, take care not to give damage on the cable caused by rolling the cable inside or pinching. (Make sure that the cable comes out from the right side of the Main body.)





Not to pinch

3. Test

Waste Tank

Sensor



L.*> [JV5-01]


FUNCTION#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW



2. Switch to “WasteTANK” 3. Assemble the waste Tank and up/

down it to check LCD display.




[�] / [�] : SW


:OFF/ON :ON /OFF :ON /ON


#SENSOR TESTWasteTANK :OFF/ON

No waste tank(or tank full)

Near Full(Tank presence

#SENSOR TESTWasteTANK :ON/ON

Waste tank pres-ence

3-159


3-160

Overhaul of Driving Parts

3-5. Overhaul of Driving Parts

Driving parts for JV5-130S/160S are shown below.

Part Reference page

3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly p.3-162

3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt p.3-165

3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly p.3-167

3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt p.3-171

3-5-5. Y Drive Belt p.3-175

3-5-6. Wiper Motor p.3-179

3-5-7. Station Motor p.3-182

3-5-8. Head UD Motor p.3-184

3-5-9. M Motor p.3-186

~ LEFT ~

X Pulley

Y-axis Motor Assembly

M Motor

Wiper Motor

Station Motor

Head UD Motor

Y Drive Pulley

Y-axis Motor

Assembly

3-161


3-5-1. X-axis Motor Assembly


1. Remove

X-axis Motor

Assembly

Behind



pected move.Maintenance Cover L (M601944)


Loosen lower side screws (x2), and remove the screws shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.



5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM

Bracket.

P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)


P4x12 SMW (x3)

Loosen (x3)

XM Bracket (M507266)

6. Release the connectors (x2) to X-

axis Motor.

7. Remove X-axis Motor Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x2) to remove the motor assembly. Be careful of the assembly falling.

Reverse Steps 6 and 5 for reassem-bly.

Release connectors.(x2)

X-axis Motor Assembly (M507266) P3x10 SMW (x2)

2. Reassemble

X-axis Motor

Assembly

3-162


1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley

and X-axis Motor Pulley.

* Put the belt horizontally in the middle of pulleys.

3. Adjust X Belt

Tension

Content Adjust the tension of X Belt

(between X-axis Motor and X

Pulley).

Wrong tension could slip

motor or result in breakage of

motor or belt due to rotation

obstruction, or cause failure in

media feed unit.

Target 2-2.5 mm of flexure on

applying force of 300gf with

gage

Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg)

OK

NG

NG

Put horizontally in the middle of pulleys.

Belt is vertically shifted.

Belt is slantingly engaged.

2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force

of 300gf perpendicular to the belt

in the center between the pulleys.

2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the

flexure of the belt comes within 2-

2.5 mm.

2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~

Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust the tension to the proper value, and tighten the screws (x3).

Push perpendicular to the belt center at300gf.

Check bending amount( 2~ 2.5 mm )

XM bracket

* If buzz is found on motor, conduct the following adjustment.


* Adjust value varies on each motor and each machine


4. Adjust Motor

Current

Content Execute current adjust of X-

motor

Adjust 2 items

Adjust

Contents

Minimize Hunting noise of

X-motor at operation.

Tools –

Stopr Adjust

Y Moving Adjust

X Moving Adjustt

Execute Item on X-motor :Stop Adjust X-operation Adjust

Execute Item on X-motor :Stop AdjustY-operation Adjust

← No need

3-163



#ADJUST MODE

* Start with the Maintenance Open Mode

2. Execute ”STOP ADJUST”


3a. Execute “X MOVING ADJUST”

[FUNCTION]



[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

L.*> [JV5-01]



#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [ENTER] : Set


X = 0 Y = 0 (****) (****)

0~255 (Input range)

[�] / [�] : VC

[�]SW[�]:[ENTER] : Ret


#X MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : XC

[�] / [�] :SW[ENTER] : Ret.

#MOTOR CURRENTX MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set

3b. Input the following conditions and

execute

* Input the following conditions.Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/sAcceleration (A) : 0.2 GLength (X) : approx.

50 ~ 100 mm


X-motor driving, adjust value to

minimize the noise.

Check the noise of X-motor at the left back side of JV-5.

4. Presss [END] plural of times to end.

#X MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC[�] / [�] : Move[ENTER] : Exec.

[END] : Ret.

X-axis consecutive drive (X-mortar drive)

* Not cap OFF

#XmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx)

S= 10mm/s A=0.20GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC

[END] : Ret.

(At Xmotor drv.)



#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [END] : Ret.

End

Put on covers after adjustment. * Put cover inside of washers for loosened screws to tighten them.

5. Reassemble

CoversA screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-164


3-5-2. X Pulley, X Belt


1. Remove

X pulley and

X belt

Behind



pected move.Maintenance Cover L (M601944)


Loosen lower side screws (x2), and remove the screw shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.


Loosen lower side screws (x3), and remove the screw shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.

5. Loosen the screws (x3) for XM

Bracket.

P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)


P4x12 SMW (x3)

Loosen (x3)

XM Bracket (M507266)

6. Remove X Pulley Bracket.

Loosen the screws (x3) to remove X Pulley Bracket.

7. Remove X Pulley.

Loosen the screws (x2) to remove X Pulley from X axis.

8. Remove X Belt.

Loosen the screws (x2) for X-axis Motor Assembly to carefully remove the belt so as to prevent fall.

P4x12 SMW (x3)

X Pulley Bracket (M507267)

SSWP 4x4 (x2)

X Pulley (M203155)

P3x10 SMW (x2)

3-165


Reverse the procedure of Steps 8 to 6 for reassembly.

2. Reassemble

X-axis Motor

Assembly

3. Adjust X Belt

Tension

Content Adjust the tension of X Belt

(between X-axis Motor and X

Pulley).





media feed unit.

Target 2-2.5 mm of flexure on

applying force of 300gf with

gage


1. Engage X Belt between X Pulley

and X-axis Motor Pulley.

* Put the belt horizontally in the middle of pulleys.

2a. Apply Tension Gage with the force

of 300gf perpendicular to the belt

in the center between the pulleys.

2b. Adjust XM Bracket so that the

flexure of the belt comes within 2-

2.5 mm.

OK

NG

NG

Put horizontally in the middle of pulleys.

Belt is vertically shifted.

Belt is slantingly engaged.

Push perpendicular to the belt center at300gf.

Check bending amount

( 2~ 2.5 mm )

2c. ~ Tension Adjustment ~

Laterally shift XM Bracket to adjust the tension to the proper value, and tighten the screws (x3).


XM bracket

4. Reassemble


is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-166


3-5-3. Y-axis Motor Assembly


1. Remove

Y-axis Motor

Assembly

Behind



pected move.



Loosen lower side screws and remove the following screws.Lower side : 2


Right side face : 4Right top side : 3

4. Release the clamps (x2) shown

above.

Release the clamps (x2) for Wash Cartridge Assembly.


P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Release clamps. (x2)

5a. Remove Wash Cartridge Assembly.

Loosen the screws (x3) to remove Wash Cartridge & Stay.

* Keep Wash Cartridge as joined

with Stay.

5b. Mount Wash Cartridge Assembly

to the position shown above.

P4x12 SMW (x3)

Lay Protection Sheet.

Be careful of tube disconnection

Caution: Lay Protection Sheet and put Wash

Cartridge Assembly on it to keep

from flaw or damage.

Caution: Be careful of tube disconnection at

the joint above to handle Wash Car-

tridge Assembly.

3-167


6. Remove YM Top Plate. 7. Remove YM-spacers (x2). 8. Release clamp and connectors.

Release the clamp for Y-axis Motor Cable and disconnect the connec-tors (x2).

YM Top Plate (M507260)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

YM-spacer (M202665) x2

Release connectors. (x2)

Release clamp.

Y-axis Motor Assy. (E300475)

9a. Remove Y-axis Motor Assembly.

* Be careful of Y-axis Motor Assembly falling to loosen the

screws (x2).

9b. ~ Y-axis Motor Assembly ~ Follow the next procedure to reas-semble Y-axis Motor Assembly.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

YD Bracket D(M507154)

Y drive transmission belt Y-axis Motor Assembly (E300475)

2. Reassemble

Y-axis Motor

Assembly

1. Temporarily fix Y-axis Motor

Assembly to YD Bracket D with

the screws (x2).

2. Engage the belt between Y Drive

Pulley and DM Pulley.

* Belt must be horizontal in the

middle of pulley width. (Upper shift is allowable.)

3. Reverse the steps 9 to 6 to

reassemble YM Top Plate, and

conduct the following adjustment.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

YD Bracket D(M507154)

Y drive transmission beltOK

NGSlanting

Horizontal in middle

NG

OK

Shifted lower

Horizontal but upper

3-168


1. Apply the gage at right angle in

the middle between Y-axis Motor

Pulley and Y Drive Pulley

Assembly to measure tension.

* Target: XXX ± xx kg

3. Adjust Y-Drive

Transmission Belt

Tension

Content Adjust the tension of y-drive

transmission belt (between Y-

axis Motor and Y Drive Pulley

Assembly).





media feed unit.

Target


Press in middle at right angle.

2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor

Assembly until tension becomes

right.

2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after Y-

axis Motor is positioned.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

* If buzz is found on motor, conduct the following adjustment.


* Adjust value varies on each motor

and each machine


4. Adjust Motor

Current

Content Adjust electric current of Y-

motor

Adjust items are the following

2.

Adjust

Contents

Minimise Hunting noise at Y-

motor driving.

Tools –

Stop Adjust

YMoving Adjust

X Moving Adjust

Execute item on X-motor: Stop AdjustX Move Adjust

Execute item on Y-motor: Stop AdjustY Move Adjust

← No need

3-169



#ADJUST MODE.


2. Execute ”STOP ADJUST”


3a. Execute “Y MOVING ADJUST”

[FUNCTION]



[�] / [�] : SW

[ENTER] : Set

L.*> [JV5-01]


[REMOTE]+[FUNCTION]+PowerON

#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [ENTER] : Set


X = 0 Y = 0 (****) (****)

0~255 (Input Range)

[�] / [�] : VC

[�] / [�] :SW [ENTER] :Ret.


#Y MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GY= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC

[�] / [�] :SW[ENTER] : Ret.

#MOTOR CURRENTY MOVING ADJUST<ent> [ENTER] : Set


* Input the following conditions.Speed (S) : 5 ~ 10 mm/s

Acceleration (A) : 0.2 GLength (X) : approx.

50 ~ 100 mm


Y-motor driving, adjust value to

minimize the noise.

Check the noise of Y-motor at the left back side of JV-5.

4. Press [END] plural of times to end.

#Y MOVING ADJUST

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC[�] / [�] : Move[ENTER] : Exec.

[END] :Ret.

Y-axis consecutive drive (Y-mortar drive)

(Carriage Out)

#YmovingADJUST *RUN* xxx (xxxx)

S= 10mm/s A=1.00GX= 100mm

[�] / [�] : VC

[END] : Ret.

(At Y-motor driving)



#MOTOR CURRENTSTOP ADJUST <ent> [END] : Ret

End


5. Reassemble


is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-170


3-5-4. Y Drive Pulley Assembly, Y-Drive Transmission Belt


1. Remove

Y Drive Pulley

and Y-Drive

Transmission Belt

Behind



pected move.



Loosen lower side back and front screws and remove the following screws.Lower side : 2


Right side face : 4Right top side : 3



P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)




6. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release

tension.

* Loosen the screws alternately. Loosening only a screw could heavily burden the other to break spring.

7. Loosen the screws (x2) for Y-axis

Motor Assembly.

P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2) Y Drive Belt(M800885/6)

Y-T SP Plate (M507262)

B4x60 (x2)

Left

Y-axis Motor

Loosen (x2)

Right

3-171


8. Remove D Bracket U.

Loosen the screws (x2) to remove D Bracket U.

9a. Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly.

Remove Y Drive Pulley Assembly from the axis of YD Bracket D.

9b. ~ Notices at Removing Pulley ~

P4x12 SMW (x2)

D Bracket U (M502708)

YD Bracket

Right

Y Drive TransmissionBelt

Y Drive Belt

Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891)

Y Drive Transmission Belt

O-ring

Notice: Take care not to lose the O-ring on

the pulley.

Follow the next procedure to reas-semble Y Drive Pulley and Y Drive Transmission Belt.

1. Reassemble Y Drive Pulley

Assembly, and engage Y Drive

Transmission Belt.

2. Reassemble D Bracket U, and

adjust Y Drive Transmission Belt

position. *Put the belt horizontally

in the middle of pulley width.

(Upper shift is allowable.)

2. Reassemble

Y Drive Pulley

and Y Drive

Transmission Belt

Y Drive Pulley Assembly (M006891)

Y Drive TransmissionBelt

OK

NGSlanting


NG

OK

Shifted lower


1. Apply the gage at right angle in

the middle between Y-axis Motor

Pulley and Y Drive Pulley

Assembly to measure tension.

* Target: XXX ± xx kg

3. Adjust Y Drive

Transmission Belt

Tension

Content Adjust the tension of YDrive

Transmission Belt (between

Y-axis Motor and Y Drive

Pulley Assembly).





media feed unit.

Target

Tools • Tension Gage (x Kg) Press in middle at right angle.

3-172


2a. Laterally shift Y-axis Motor

Assembly until tension becomes

right.

2b. Tighten the screws (x2) after Y-

Axis Motor is positioned.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

1a. Place Y Drive Belt on Y Drive Pul-

ley and confirm that fitting is cor-

rect.

* Place the belt on the position shown in the drawing horizon-tally at placing the belt.

4. Adjust

Y Drive Belt

Alignment

Content Check and adjust the

alignment of Y Drive Belt

(between Y Drive Pulley

Assembly - Y-T pulley).

Improper assembling may

cause belt dropping, motor

idle running or bad print

quality.

Tools

OK

NGSlanting


NG

OK

Shifted lower


1b. ~ Check Pulley ~

* Place E-rings on top and bottom of the pulley outside of the blacket at fixing the pulley.

2. Tighten screws (x2) of Y-T SPplate

to increase the belt tension.


3. Check Belt tension Part

The gap between line A of Y-T pul-ley and Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm, as a target.

Y-T pulley assy. (M006977)

Y-T pulley bracket

Fix E-ring outside (Top/Bottom)

Left

Y Drive Belt(M800885/6)


B4x60 (x2)

3 ± 2.0 mm

3-173



5. Reassemble

Covers

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-174


3-5-5. Y Drive Belt


1. Remove

Y Drive Belt

Behind



pected move.



Loosen screws lower side back and front and remove the following screws.Lower side : 2


Right side face : 4Right top face : 3



P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)



Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.


Assy.




P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

Right


Right

3-175







Remove right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F.

* Take care not to drop the cover. Operations with 2 persons.




Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

9. Manually lower Station to move

Carriage.

Up: Counterclockwise (CCW)Down: Clockwise (CW)


Remove the right and left screws to remove the head cover.

11. Separate the belt from the

carriage.

Remove screws (x2) shown in the picture and pull out the belt connec-tion part in the Y-direction(the right of the carriage is the left)

CW: Down

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


P4x12 SMW (x2)

12. Remove Y-T SP Plate to release

tension.


13. Remove Y-T Pulley. 14. Remove the left and right Belt

Holders 1 from Belt Holder.



B4x60 (x2)

Left

Y-T Pulley(M205123)

Y-T Pulley Bracket (M507315)

Belt Holder (M400161)

Do not loosen.

Belt Holder 1

3-176


15. Loosen the screw. 16. Disconnect Belt Holder S and Belt

Holder 1.

Insert Slotted Screwdriver to pick.

17. Slide Belt Holder S to remove.

* Remove Belt Holders S on both

ends.

* See reassembly procedure for further steps.

B4x8

Belt Holder 1(M400160)

Belt Holder S(M503786)

Loosen Pick with Slotted ScrewdriverSlide to remove.

Follow the next procedure for reas-sembly.

1. Join new belt and old belt with

tape.

2. Run the new belt around

Carriage.

2. Reassemble

Y Drive Belt

Old Belt

New Belt

Fix with tape.

New Belt

Tape

Make a circle with belt

3. Lead the belt behind Carriage

after it ran around Carriage.

4. Engage the toothed surface at

both ends of belt with Belt Holder

1, and tighten screw after

mounting Belt Holder S.

5. Mount Belt Holders 1 (left and

right) to Belt Holder.

Y Drive Belt (M800885/6)

Lead belt behind Carriage.

Belt holder 1 (M40060)

Engage the toothed surface of

belt with Belt Holder 1.


Belt Holder 1

3-177


6. Assemble Y-T Pulley with Y-T

Pulley Bracket.

* Put upper and lower E-rings outside of each bracket.

* Put the belt horizontally as shown above.

7. Fix the Y-T SP Plate


Y-T Pulley (M205123)

Y-T Pulley Bracket

Put E-ring outside (upper/lower) OK

NGSlanting


NG

OK

Shifted lower




B4x60 (x2)

Left

8a. Align Belt Holder so that screws

holes (x2) become in position, to

reassemble.

9a. Check Belt Tension Part

* When A-line plate end of Y-T pul-ley shown in the picture touches to Y-T BKT, return to 4 and move 1 belt ridge to inward.(If necessary, cut appropriately.)

9b. Check Belt Tension Part 2

The gap between Line A of the Y-T pulley and the Y-T BKT is 1 - 5mm, as a target.


Screw Holes (x2)

Y-T Bracket

Y-T Pulley Bracket

A 3 ± 2.0 mm

9c. ~ Tighten screws. ~ Put on covers after adjustment. * Put cover inside of washers for loosened screws to tighten them.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

5. Reassemble

Covers

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-178


3-5-6. Wiper Motor




1. Remove

Wiper Motor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3a. Remove Right Cover and Rear

Cover R.

Loosen screws on lower side of the right cover and remove screws shown in the picture.

3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~

Remove the screws shown in the picture and remove the right cover first.




Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)









* Take care not t o drop the cover.

Operation eith more than 2 persons.




Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

3-179


6a. Remove Station Back Cover. 6b. ~ Station Back Cover~ 7. Remove Wiper Wash Holder.

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Station Back Cover (M507375)

P4x12 SMW

Wiper Wash Holder (M601841)

8. Disconnect the connector from

Wiper Sensor.

9. Disconnect the connector from

Wiper Motor.

10. Loosen the screws (x2) to remove

Wiper Unit Assembly.

Disconnect connector.

Disconnect connector.

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x2)

Wiper Unit Assembly

11a.Remove Wiper Motor. 11b.~ Remove Wiper Motor. ~

Wiper Unit Assembly

Wiper Motor (E300495)

P3x6 SMW (x4)

3-180




2. Reassemble

Wiper MotorA screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-181


3-5-7. Station Motor




1. Remove

Station Motor

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.

2. Remove Maintenance Cover R. 3a. Remove the Right Cover and Rear

Cover R.

Loosen screws on back and front of lower side of the right cover and remove screws shown in the picture.

3b. ~Remove the Right Cover ~

Remove screws shown in the picture and remove the right cover first.




Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x2)



4. Disconnect connector from Station

Motor.

5. Remove Motor Bracket.

remove screws (x2) from back side of the printerand remove the motor BKT.

6. Remove Station Motor.

Remove screws (x3) and remove the station motor from the Motor BKT.

Disconnect

Behind

P4x12 SMW (x2)

P3x6 SMW (x3)

Motor Bracket (M507250)

Station Motor (E300495)

3-182




2. Reassemble

Station MotorA screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-183


3-5-8. Head UD Motor


1. Remove

Head UD

MOTOR

Behind



pected move.



Loosen screws on lower side right and left and remove the following screws.Lower side : 2


Right side face : 4Right top face : 3

4. Confirm that Carriage Assembly

is capped.

* The Jumping shaft on the head unit protrudes at the position shown in the picture.


P4x12 SMW (x2)

Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Jumping Shaft

5. Remove the Head UD Motor

Remove the connector and remove screws (x3) of the head UD motor, and remove it with the motor.

6. Remove the Head UD Motor

P4x12 SMW (x3)

Head Up and Down Motor Assembly

(M007178)

Head UD Motor Bracket (M507210)

P3x6 SMW (x2)

3-184



* Lubricate UD Jumping Shaft Hole as appropriate.Amount: 2 drops

Lubricant: Slider Grease

* To reassemble Head UD Motor Bracket, tighten screw so that UD Jumping Shaft smoothly put in/

out the hole. Gear engagement must have play.

2. Reassemble

Head UD

MOTOR

Lubrication

Fitting hole

UD Jumping Shaft

* At assembling the head UD motor BKT, adjust the position so that the jumping shaft on the head unit can be inserted in the fitting hole straight.(Target :center deviance is within 0.5 mm)

~ Jumping Shaft~

Center deviance

0.5mm

Jumping Shaft

Fitting Hole(Head UD Motor BKT)

Jumping Shaft

3-185


3-5-9. M Motor

1. Shut off the main power. 2. Remove Take-up Cover.

1. Remove

M Motor

Behind



pected move.

P3x6 SMW(x3)

Take-up Cover(M507538)

3a. Remove Winding Motor Unit

Remove the left screw.

3b. ~Removing the Winding Motor

Unit ~

Remove lower side screws (x2)

3c. ~Winding Motor Unit ~

P3x6 SMW

B4x10 (x2)

4. Remove the motor from the unit. 5. Remove the mini-keeper.

Remove the C-ring toremove the mini-keeper.

6. Remove the C-ring.

Mini keeper

C-10

C-10

3-186


7. Remove the pin from the motor

shaft.

8. Remove M Gear Bearing BKT-A.

Remove the M gear bearing BKT-A including the BKT-B and bearing.

9. Remove Stopper Screws (x2).

Remove the stopper screws (x2) from the motor shaft.

Pin

M Gear Holder Bracket -B (M507329)

M Gear Holder Bracket -A (M507328)

SSWP3x3 (x2)

10. Remove M Motor.

Pull out the motor shaft and remove screws (x4) from the M motor BKT.

M motor shaft(M205137)

M motor

M Motor Bracket (M507327)

P4x10 SMW (x4)


2. Reassemble

M MOTOR

3-187


3-6. Overhaul of Other Parts

The followings are other parts forming the JV5-130S/160S..

Part Reference page

3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy. p.3-189

3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy. p.3-193

3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy. p.3-198

3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy. p.3-204

3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid p.3-206

3-6-6. SSR p.3-209

~ Head Assy ~

Cutter Unit Assy.

R Heater Cover Assy.

P Heater Cover Assy.

Wiper Wash SolenoidA Heater Cover Assy.

SSR (x3)

3-188

Overhaul of Other Parts

3-6-1. Cutter Unit Assy.




1. Remove

Cutter Unit Assy.

L.*> [JV5-01]

ST.MAINTENANCE

CARRIDGE OUT <ent>

[ST.MAINTE]

[ENTER]


Power ON. Behind



pected move.


Assy.






Right


Right


Right




Remove the right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F.



Remove the right and left screws to remove the head cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

Left

Right

B3x6 (x2)


3-189


6. Remove the Cutter Assy

P3x10 SMW (x2)

Cutter Unit Assembly

(M006952)

* After assembling the cutter unit,

execute the cutter unit positioning.

* If the jig can not be arranged,

using of an intervenient having height of 7.5mm in the cutter unit side is allowed.

1. Set screws of the cutter unit at

temporary joint state.

* Temporary joint state is that the unit is held lightly.

2. Cutter Unit

Positioning

Content Adjust fixing position of cut-

ter unit (vertical, horizontal)

using a jig



ing tool)

: OPT-J0108

Temp. joint (x2)

Cutter Unit

2. Down the Clamp Lever 3. Set the Jig to the Platen


4. Push the jig to the end

After setting, slide the jig to head side to the end (to stop)

Down clamp lever

Notice: Keep clamp lever down at adjust-

ing.

PG setting should be 1.5mm


Push to the end

3-190


5a. djust cutter unit height 5b. Adjust the cutter unit position

back-front.


5c. ~ Cutter Position Adjust Supple-

ment ~

* Execute the following cutter tool position check manually before

turning the power ON.

Height Adjust Jig

Cutter Unit

Height Adjust Jig

Push down cutter too

Slot for cutter tool




range.




slot of platen.

6a. Check the Cutter Tool Position



back-front positioning

Head Unit

R endCenterL end









slot on the platen

* Execute “ENCODER TEST” of “TEST” (MAINTENANCE

MODE)

* f the media is too thin to read, use a media within the specifications

range.



3. Encoder

Test

Content Measure each of media pres-

ence position and no presence

position with downing..

Tools • Media



L.*> [JV5-01]

FUNCTION

SET UP <ENT>

FUNCTION

#TEST <ENT>

[FUNCTION]

[�] / [�] : SW



3-191


2. Execute “CUTTER ENCODER”.

Select and execute “CUTTER ENCODER” of “ENCODER TEST”.

3. Confirm the test results and finish

the test when there is no error.

#TEST


#ENCODER TEST

LINEAR ENCODER <ent> [�] / [�] : SW

#ENCODER TEST

CUTTER ENCODER <ent> [ENTER] : Set

#CUTTER ENCODERCHECK :ent [ENTER] : Exec.

[END] :End

#CUTTER ENCODER

Result of a test.

THICK = 0.5mm

Pr=-247 Mr=-231

Pr : Measurement of PlatenMr: Measurement on Media


4. Reassemble

Cutter Unit Assy.

3-192


3-6-2. A Heater Cover Assy.



Remove connectors for drying fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB.


Assy.


1. Remove

Drying fan

Assembly

Right




picture.





Right

Loosen (x2)

Right

Roll screen

Left

Notice: If a spring of roll screen is released, winding becomes dif-ficu-lut. Take care until it is fixed with a pin.



* When the roll screen is removed, the spring is released.Wind up the spring at assembling.





Right


CS 6x15

Loosen (x2)

Left

P4x12 SMW


Right

3-193




7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from

stayes in both sides.

Remove right and left mini-knobs and remove the belt lock screw.


* Conduct with 2 persons not to

drop the Dryer FAN Assy.

Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R(M507881)

Left



Belt Screw Right

Mini knob

Drying fan Assy. 130/160(M007141/40)




P4x12 SMW (x5)


Left Left

Screw (x2)


P4x12 SMW (x2)



* As the front switch does not cut the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear for getting electric

shock.


2. Remove

A Heater Cover

Assy.

Behind


3-194



Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove the screw shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.


Loosen lower side screws (x3) and remove the screw shown in the pic-ture to remove the cover.



P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)



Right




Remove the right and left screws (x6) to remove the Y Cover F.


7. Remove H Harness Cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

P4x12 SMW (x3)


8. Remove Maintenance Space

Cover.


9a. Remove the connectors shown



After Heater: Black Connector

P4x12 SMW (x4)




Body Color Qty

Black 4

3-195



Cover Assembly.




Release clamps (x8)

P3x10 SMW (x4)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Loosen (x4)



from falling.


bly.




12c. ~ A Heater Cover Assembly ~




Release connector.

Right


* Remove loosening of cables referring to the above to connect

to Heater PCB.

* Refer to the above illustration to ensure right connection.

3. Reassemble

A Heater Cover

Assy.

Red:Pre-heater

Blue:Print heater

Black:After-heater

Any of same color will do.

3-196


* Connector connection of lower side of the printer is as shown in the picture above.


* Check front side and back side at assembling the Dryer FAN Assy and set that front side comes top.

Operation with 2 persons.

L: Exhaust ductAssy side (White)

R :DryerFANAssy side (Black)

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG FrontWithout fan label

BackWith fan label

* Wind the spring and fix it with a

pin, and after fixing to hold fitting, take the pin out at assembling the roll screen.

* At fixing loosen roll screen hold

fitting, fix the screw with pushing the roll screen to inward.

Left

Fix with pushing

Right

Roll screen

* Check operation of heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at

the final on-line test in repairing.

4. Test・Confirm

3-197


3-6-3. P Heater Cover Assy.



Remove connectors for drying fan and exhaust duct connected to the BOX relay PCB.


Assy.


1. Remove

Drying fan

Assembly

Right




picture.





Right

Loosen (x2)

Right

Roll screen

Left

Notice: If a spring of roll screen is

released, winding becomes dif-

ficu-lut. Take care until it is fixed

with a pin.



* When the roll screen is removed, the spring is released.Wind up the spring at assembling.





Right


CS 6x15

Loosen (x2)

Left

P4x12 SMW


Right

3-198




7a. Remove Dryer FAN Assy from the

roght and left stayes.

Remove the right and left mini-knobs and remove the belt lock screw.


* Conduct with 2 persons not to

drop the Dryer FAN Assy.

Loosen (x2) Exhaust cover R(M507881)

Left



Belt Screw Right

Mini knob

Drying fan Assy. 130/160(M007141/40)




P4x12 SMW (x5)


Left Left

Screw (x2)


P4x12 SMW (x2)



* As the front switch does not cut the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear for getting electric

shock.


2. Remove

P Heater Cover

Assy.

Behind


3-199



Loosen screws (x2) on the lower side and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover


Loosen screws (x3) on the lower side and remove the screws shown in the picture to remove the cover.



P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)



Right






7. Remove H Harness Cover.


P4x12 SMW (x6)

Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

P4x12 SMW (x3)


8. Remove Maintenance Space

Cover.


9a. Remove the connectors shown



Print Heater: Blue ConnectorAfter Heater: Black Connector

P4x12 SMW (x4)




Body Color Qty

Black 4Blue 4Blue (Heater Side) 1

3-200



Cover Assembly.






Release clamps (x8)

P3x10 SMW (x4)

P4x12 SMW (x4)

Loosen (x4)



from falling.


bly.




13. Loosen the screws (x24) for P

Heater Assembly.

* Slide Media Plate and certainly loosen the lower screws.


Release connector.

Right

Media Plate (M507157)

B3x10 Ni (x24)

P Heater Assembly

14a.Process Heater Cable.

Release all clamps for Heater cable (Blue) on the left of printer to lead through bush.

14b. ~ Process Heater Cable. ~ 15. Process Thermistor Cable.

Release connector of Thermistor and cable from clamps to lead through bush.

Release clamp (x8)

Lead through bush.

Lead through bush after releasing all clamps.

Release connector

Release clamps(x2)Put through bush

Release connector and clamps to lead through bush.

3-201


16a.Remove P Heater Assembly.

* Carefully use both hands to

handle cables so as to prevent them from hanging.

16b.~ P Heater Assembly ~

P Heater Assembly


* Be sure to reassemble Media Plate

on reassembling P Heater Assembly. Follow the next procedure to smoothly reassemble.

1. Tighten the upper screws pressing

Plate against the back.

3. Reassemble

P Heater Cover

Assy.

Media Plate(M507157)

Fix screws with pushing

2. To tighten the lower screws, pull

Plate toward you and press Slide

Bar against the back.

3. Put on the other in the same way.

* After assembling, slide it to the right and left to confirm moving smoothly.

* Run Heater Cables (Blue) around each clamp on each end in front of

printer.

Pull plate

Push slide bar

Move smoothly

Right

Left

3-202


* Remove loosening of cables referring to the above to connect to Heater PCB.

* Caution: Refer to the above illustration to ensure right connection.

* Connector connection on the lower side of the printer is as shown in the picture.

Red:Pre-heater

Blue:Printheater

Black:After-heater

Lower:Connect to Thermostat of each Assembly

Any of same color will do.L: Exhaust duct

Assy side (White)

R :DryerFANAssy side (Black)



* Check front side and back side at

assembling the Dryer FAN Assy and set that front side comes top. Operation with 2 persons.

* Wind the spring and fix it with a

pin, and after fixing to hold fitting, take the pin out at assembling the roll screen.

A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG FrontWithout fan label

BackWith fan label

Left

* At fixing loosen roll screen hold fitting, fix the screw with pushing

the roll screen to inward.

* Check operation of heater&dryer&exhaust FAN at

the final on-line test in repairing.

Fix with pushing

Right

Roll screen

4. Test・Confirm

3-203


3-6-4. R Heater Cover Assy.


* As the front switch does not cut

the power to the heater PCB, there is a fear for getting electric shock.


1. Remove

R Heater Cover

Assy.

Behind



Loosen lower side screws (x2) and remove the screw shown in the drawing to remove the cover.


Loosen lower side screws (x3) and remove the screw shown in the drawing to remove the cover.

5a. Remove the PR Guide 130/160

Remove the right and left screws (x4).

P4x12 SMW (x11)


Loosen (x2)

P4x12 SMW (x7)

Loosen (x3)

Rear Cover L (M507497) PR-guide 130/160

(M507425/7308)

P4x12 SMW (x2)

5b. ~ Remove PR Guide ~

* Conduct with 2 persons not to drop the cover.

6a. Remove connectors descrived in

the right from the heater PCB.

Remove connectors (CN7, CN15, CN16).

6b. ~ Connectors ~

P4x12 SMW (x2)


Connector Color qty

Red 2Red(heater side) 1

3-204


7. Remove the Relay Connector

Remove the relay connector of ther-mistor at station side.

8. Remove Screws on lower side of

the R Heater Cover Assy

130S : 4160S : 5

9. Loosen Screws on upper side of

the R Heater Cover Assy in front


130S : 6160S : 7

P4x12 SMWLoosen the screw

10. Remove Cables from the Frame

Remove cables before the heater cover replacing so that cables are not in mess at the replacing.

11a.Remove R Heater Cover

* Take care not to give damage on the cover or other parts in the

vicinity.

11b. ~ R Heater Cover assy. ~

R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy.

R Heater Cover 130S/160S assy.(M006926/M006924)


* Caution: See the above illustration for right connection.


2. Reassemble

R Heater Cover

Assy.

Red: Pre-heater

Blue:Printheater

Black:After-heater


Bottom:Connected to thermostat of heater Assy A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-205


3-6-5. Wiper Wash Solenoid

1. Turn the power to the JV-5 On,

and get into the MAINTENANCE

MUENU.

2. Select “DISCHARGE” of MAIN-

TENANCE Washiliquid.

1. Discharge

Washing Fluid

L.*> [JV5-01]

Power ON


[ST.MAINTE]

[�]/[�]


#HD.MAINTENANCEFILL UP INK <ent> [�]/[�]

#HD.MAINTENANCEMaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER]

MaintWashLiquidFILLING UP <ent> [�]/[�]

MaintWashLiquidDISCHARGE <ent> [ENTER]

3. Remove the washing liquid car-

tridge to discharge washing liquid.

Remove washing liquid cartridge



It'sBeingDischarged. PLEASE WAIT

******--------------


2. Remove

Wiper Wash

Solenoid

Behind



pected move.


3-206












Y Cover F (M507498/7501)

5. Down the Clamp lever. 6a. Remove KB Cover.

Loosen the right 4 screws.

6b. ~ Remove KB Cover 2 ~

Remove the screw on upper side of the front cover sensor R, loosen lower side screws and tilt to the front, and remove the screw fixing the KB cover shown in the picture.

Down Clamp Lever

KB Cover (M601945)

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x4)

Left Right

Front cover sensor R

Tilt

Left

P4x12 SMW

P4x12 SMW

Loosen

6c. ~ Remove KB Cover 3 ~

Loosen screws (x3) to remove the KB cover with taking care not to hit the dryer unit.

7. Remove the Connector

Remove the connector of wiper washing solenoid from the Relay Connector.

8. Remove the Wiper Washi Holder

* Take care not to drop washing liq-uid in the tube on parts in the vicinity.

Not to contact

Left

P4x12 SMW

Loosen (x3)

KB Cover (M601945)

Release connector

Wiper wash holder(M601841)

P4x12 SMW

3-207


9a. Remove the Wiper Wash Solenoid

Assy

Remove screws (x2) , remove the wiper wash solenoid while the tube is connected to.

9b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~ 10a.Remove the Tube

* Take care not to drop washing liq-

uid in the tube on parts in the vicinity.

P3x6 SMW (x2)

Remove tube

10b. ~ Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. ~ Reverse the disassembly procedure for reassembly.

Wiper Wash Solenoid Assy. (E104400)

3. Reassemble

Wiper Wash

Solenoid

1. Turn the power to the JV-5 ON,

and get into the MAINTENANCE

MENU.

2. Fill Wash Liquid.

* As for the detail of changing of screens at filling, see the Instruc-tion Manual.

4. Wash Liquid

Filling

L.*> [JV5-01]

Main Power ON (Back)

Power SW ON


[ST.MAINTE]

[�]/[�]


#HD.MAINTENANCEFILL UP INK <ent>

[�]/[�]

#HD.MAINTENANCEMaintWashLiquid<ent> [ENTER]

MaintWashLiquidFILLING UP <ent> [ENTER]

Execute wash liquid filling

3-208


3-6-6. SSR


* As front switch does not cut the

power to heater PCB, there is a fear of getting electric shock.

2. Remove MF Cover C

Remove the cover in the cap station side on the back of the printer.

130S : MF Cover C 130 (M507418)160S : MF Cover C 160 (M507165)

1. Remove

SSR

Behind

Warning:Electric Shock!!Turn OFF the rear power switch.

MF Cover C 160/130

P4x12 SMW (160:12 , 130:10)

Loosen (160:8 , 130:6)

3. Pull out the Cables (x4) of SSR.

Pull out cables connected SSR.

4a. Remove SSR

Remove screws (x2) to remove SSR from the SSR BKT.

4b. ~ SSR ~

SSR bracket (M507168)

P2x10 SMW (x2)

SSR x3


* Connect the connector referring to the drawing above, and take care

not to set wrong side.

* If the cables have extra length, make a circle with a clamp not to

touch AC.

2. Reassemble

SSR

From heater PCB(Either top or bottom)

From IO PCB(Either top or bottom)

3-209



A screw washer

is outside of the

cover.

A screw washer

is inside of the

cover.

OK NG

3-210

CHAPTER 4 Troubleshooting

4-1

Contents

4-1. Outline ......................................................................... 4-2

4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble 4-2

4-1-2. Checking procedure ............................................... 4-2

4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed .... 4-4

4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures ............ 4-4

4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures ..... 4-15


4-1. Outline

This chapter describes the troubleshooting for JV5-130S/160S. Before starting work, read and understand

thoroughly the instructions given below and also in “1-1. Precautions in Maintenance” (p.1-2 ).

4-1-1. Rough identification of the source of the trouble

At the beginning of troubleshooting, it is necessary to identify roughly which functions the trouble relates

to.

Problems can be roughly classified into those that relate to the printer itself and those that involve the

connection between the printer and the host computer.

1. Problems with the printer itself

The cause of the trouble can be identified by executing appropriate functions or using test

functions.

2. Problems concerning the connection to the host computer

Hardware: Broken wire or faulty contact of cables

Software: Transmission by improper application setting

4-1-2. Checking procedure

In the standard setting of JV5-130S/160S, priority is given to the host computer.

Check the settings on the host computer to see if there is any improper parameter setting.

START

Rough identification of error source

Execute appropriate functions or use test functions of JV5-130S/160S (See p.4-4)

Refer to Precautions in Maintenance (P.1-2 )

4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed (P.4-4 )

Troubles on the host computer side

If this troubleshooting cannot correct the trouble, check to see if the same trouble occurs with another host computer (if possible).

Do theabove functions operate

normally?

No

Is thereerror message?

Yes

No

Yes

Is thetrouble related to print

quality?

Yes

No

4-2

Outline

This section describes troubleshooting procedures for the problems for which error messages are

displayed.

1. Identifying the error category

The causes of errors can be classified into the following categories:

Handling error on the host computer side

Trouble on the host computer side

Trouble with the interface cable

Printer handling error

Printer mechanical trouble

Printer hardware trouble

Printer firmware trouble

2. Initial action

Refer to the error message, and judge whether the trouble lies on the host computer side or on the printer

side.

Has any of the interface conditions (Printer model setting, command, communication conditions,

etc.) been changed?

Does the trouble occur under specific conditions?

Does the same trouble occur repeatedly?

3. Failure on the printer side

Take the following steps to repair the printer.

Replace the defective part (sensor, etc.) or make the necessary adjustment.

Replace the main PCB.

4. Repair at the factory

If the error recurs even after the corrective measures specified here are taken, return the printer to the

factory of MIMAKI for repair.

4-3


4-2. Troubles for which error messages are displayed

4-2-1. Error messages and corrective measures

<Error messages and corrective measures >

Display

Cause

Remedy (instruction & maintenance manual)

ERROR

No.ERROR

Descriptions in the manual

(for reference)Remedy

ERROR

01

MAIN ROM An error occurred on the

control circuit board.

(ROM)

Turn the power OFF and turn the

power ON after elapse of 2~3 minutes.

In a case of recurrence, contact your

local distributer to call for service.

1. Replace the main PCB with a new one.

ERROR

02

MAIN RAM An error occurred on the


(RAM)





ERROR

03

POWER +3.3V An error occurred on the


(Power supply voltage

+3.3V)





1. Replace the power supply PCB with a new

one.


POWER +5V An error occurred on the



+5V)




+24V)




+42V)

ERROR

04

FLASH ROM An error occurred on the


(Parameter ROM)





1. After uploading parameters, initialize all

parameters.

* If the state is not restored, replace the main

PCB with a new one.

ERROR

06

SD-RAM An error occurred on the


(SDRAM)






2. Replace the memory PCB with a new one.

ERROR

07

HEAD (----) An error was detected in

the head connection.

(Abnormal temperature

was detected)





1. Reconfirm the head temperature with

#TEST>TEMPERATURE.CHK>NOZ-

ZLE TEMP.

In case of recurrence. execute the follow-

ings.

2. Make sure that corresponding head FPC,

head relay PCB are connected in the right

way.

3. Replace the corresponding head with a

new one.

4. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.

VOLTAGE (----) An error was detected in

the head connection.

(Abnormal voltage was

detected)

4-4

Troubles for which error messages are displayed

ERROR

08

LinearEN-

CODER: SENSOR

An error occurred in

detection by the linear

encoder.

(Counting impossible)





1. Make sure that linear encoder scale and

encoder PCB are placed in the right posi-

tions.

2. Replace the encoder PCB with a new one.

LinearEN-

CODER: DIR.



encoder.

(Wrong orientation)

LinearEN-

CODER: COUNT



encoder.

(Read-out count error)

ERROR

09

FPGA ERROR An error occurred on the


(FPGA PDC)






HDC ERROR

(----)

An error occurred on the


(FPGA HDC)

1. Replace the corresponding HDC PCB with

a new one.


ERROR

10

COMMAND

ERROR

The printer received

some data other than

command data.

Securely connect the interface cable in

position.

Use an interface cable conforming to

the specifications.

1. When the state is not recovered even if

untreated data is cleared, execute the fol-

lowings.

2. Check the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifi-

cations, cable length, etc.)

3. Replace the USB PCB with a new one.


ERROR

11

PARAMETER

ERROR

Any parameter outside

the range of acceptable

numeric values was

received.





1. When the state is not recovered even if


lowings.





ERROR

12

MAINTENANCE

COMMAND

– (This error does not occur on site.) 1. When the state is not recovered even if


lowings.





ERROR

16

MRL COMMAND Received data does not

follow the command

system set in the device.

Transmit data with the command sys-

tem corresponding to the system.

1. Mak sure that the transmission data is in

MRL-III command system (data ripped for

JV-5).

2. Check the command system set with

[MACHINE SETUP] – [MRL COM-

MAND].

<Error messages and corrective measures (continued) >

Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-5


ERROR

20

I/F BOARD 01 An error occurred in the

interface between the I/F

board and the control

board.





1. Replace the I/F (USB/1394) board with a

new one.





board.




board.




board.

ERROR

21

I/F NONE No I/F board is attached

to the control board.






new one.


ERROR

23

HOST I/F Time out error occurred

during communication

between the host com-

puter and the interface

board for IEEE-1394

connection.

Make sure that the cables are con-

nected correctly and there is no occur-

rence of an error in the host PC.

1. Make sure that the connection to the host

PC is correct.

2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an

error in the host PC, or the application runs

normally.

ERROR

24

I/F INITIAL An error occurred in ini-

tial operation of the I/F

board and control board.






new one.


ERROR

25

FULL-SPEED An error occurred in

communication between

the host computer and

the interface board for

USB2.0 connection.

(Full-Speed mode con-

nection)

Check that the host PC supports the

USB2.0 interface. (Communication

can be resumed without changing any

setting. However, it is recommend to

use the connection in High-Speed

mode.)

Make sure that the host PC and the USB

cable follow the USB2.0 interface standard.

PACKET SIZE

OVER





USB2.0 connection.

Make sure that the cables are con-

nected correctly and there is no occur-

rence of an error in the host PC.

1. Make sure that the connection to the host

PC is correct.

2. Make sure that there is no occurrence of an

error in the host PC, or the application runs

normally.

USB PROTOCOL An error occurred in




USB2.0 connection.

USB ENVIRON-

MENT





USB2.0 connection.

USB DATA An error occurred in




USB2.0 connection.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-6


ERROR

30

OPERATION

ERROR

Improper operation was

conducted on the opera-

tion panel.

Perform correct operations. 1. It is notified that wrong operation is con-

ducted.

ERROR

34

DATA REMAIN As received data which

is not drawn remains,

setting of Function Fea-

ture can not be changed.

Change setting function after executing

all received data or clearing the data.

1. Explain that any of the operating condi-

tions cannot be changed if data that have

not been drawn remains.

ERROR

40

MOTOR ALARM

X

The X-motor was over-

loaded.





1. Check friction of X (Y)-axis motor.

2. Replace the X (Y)-axis motor with a new

one.


ERROR

41

MOTOR ALARM

Y

The Y-motor is over-

loaded.







one.


ERROR

42

X OVER CUR-

RENT

Overcurrent in the X-

motor was detected.







one.

Replace the main PCB with a new one.

ERROR

43

Y OVER CUR-

RENT

Overcurrent in the Y-

motor was detected.







one.

Replace the main PCB with a new one.

ERROR

45

CAPPING : SEN-

SOR


capping control.

(Sensor trouble)





1. Check that the cap sensor functions prop-

erly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.

2. Replace the cap sensor with a new one.


CAPPING :

PARAMETER


capping control.

(Improper parameter

adjusted value)

1. Make sure that the adjusting value of

#ADJUST>CAPPING is set correctly.

ERROR

46

WIPER An error occurred in

wiper control.





1. Check that the wiper sensor functions

properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.

2. Check that the wiper motor functions

properly with #TEST>MOTOR TEST.

3. Make sure that there is no friction on the

guide rail caused by sticking of ink.

4. Replace the wiper sensor with a new one.

5. Replace the stepping motor with a new

one.

6. Replace the IO PCB with a new one.

ERROR

47

STATION An error occurred in sta-

tion control.





1. Check that the station sensor works prop-


2. Check that the cap motor works properly

with #TEST>MOTOR TEST.

3. Check that up/down operation of the sta-

tion is smooth.

4. Replace the station sensor with a new one.

5. Replace the stepping motor with a new

one.


ERROR

49

CUTTER SOLE-

NOID

An error occurred in cut-

ter control.





1. Check that up/down operation of the cutter

is smooth.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-7


ERROR

50

MEDIA DETECT Paper could not be

detected.

The media set position

or media itself is not

proper.

If the same error message appears

again even after setting the media prop-

erly, contact your local distributor to

call for service.

1. Make sure that there is no gap between the

end faces of platen and platen rubber.

2. Execute #TEST>PAPER SENSOR to

obtain sensor values at the media exist

position and media non-exist position.

When the difference of values is more than

±50, detection is allowed.

If the difference is smaller, execute the fol-

lowings.

3. Clean the paper width sensor or replace

with a new one.


THICKNESS

DETECT

Media thickness could

not be detected.

Input the media thickness or select the

END key and execute media detection

again.

Make sure that operation of the cutter is

proper at detection.

Or, make sure that the scale and the encoder

PCB are placed on the right positions.

At recurrence after checkings above men-

tioned, execute the followings.



* This error may occur when thin media is

used.

ERROR

51

Y-ORIGIN Y-origin could not be

detected.





1. Check that the Y origin sensor works prop-


2. Replace the Y origin sensor with a new

one.


ERROR

53

HEAD HEIGHT

ORIGIN

Head height origin could

not be detected.

Make sure that the scale and the encoder PCB

are placed on the right positions. Check the

vertical operation of the head unit with man-

ual operation (smoothness of operation).





ERROR

54

MEDIA JAM Paper jam was detected. Dissolve media jamming.

If the error is still displayed after dis-

solving, contact your local distributer

to call for service.

1. Check that the jam sensor works properly

with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.

2. Check whether the error is detected at

inversion in Y SERVO TEST. If it is

detected, check a spring in the unit.

3. Replace the jam sensor with a new one.


5. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with a new

one.

ERROR

58

POSITION

ENCODER:DIR


detection by the posi-

tion encoder.

(Wrong orientation)






are placed on the right positions.




2. Replace the slider PCB with a new one.POSITION

ENCODER:CNT


detection by the posi-

tion encoder.

(Read-out count error)


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-8


ERROR

59

CUTTER

ENCODER


detection by the cutter

encoder.

(Wrong orientation)






are placed on the right positions. Check the

vertical operation of the head unit with man-

ual operation.





ERROR

64

TAKE-UP VOLT-

AGE

An abnormal voltage of

the take-up motor was

detected.





1. Replace the wind-up PCB with a new one.

E70 FPGA FPGA Configuration

fails.

(As the support functions will be sup-

ported after the releasing, this error

does not arise on site i n the present.)


E71 SD-RAM Abnormal operation in

SD-RAM




1. Make sure that memory PCB is connected

properly.



E74 TRANS DATA Received data is not Ver-

sion Up file




1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-

ted.

E75 I/F NONE I/F board is not installed. (As the support functions will be sup-




new one.


E76 I/F INITIAL Abnormal operation in I/

F board





new one.


E77 I/F BOARD An error occurred in the


the main PCB and the I/

F board.





new one.


E78 HOST I/F A time out error occurs

in the communication

between the host PC and

the I/F board.





new one.


E80 ROM0 ERASE ROM0 Erase error (As the support functions will be sup-




E81 ROM1 ERASE ROM1 Erase error (As the support functions will be sup-




E82 h'******** ROM0 Write error (As the support functions will be sup-




E83 h'******** ROM1 Write error (As the support functions will be sup-




E84 h'******** Verify error (As the support functions will be sup-




E85 ROM HASH Hash check error (As the support functions will be sup-




E90 h'******** ROM Erase error (As the support functions will be sup-




new one.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-9


E92 h'******** ROM Write error (As the support functions will be sup-




new one.

E95 MODE SHIFT Transition to the version

up mode is not allowed.





new one.

E98 I/F FORMAT Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be sup-



1. Make sure that the ROM file is transmit-

ted.

E99 VERSION DATA Wrong version up data. (As the support functions will be sup-



–––

E111 NCU ROM 00 Dot check F-ROM

ERASE error

(at Version Up)




1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new

one.

NCU ROM 01 Dot check F-ROM VER-

IFY error

(at Version Up)





one.

NCU ROM 02 Dot check F-ROM

WRITE error

(at Version Up)





one.

E114 NCU ROM HASH Hash check error

(at Version Up)





one.

ERROR

116

NCU I/F 00 An error occurred in


the NCU PCB and the

control board.



If the error occurs frequently, contact

your local distributor to call for ser-

vice.

(Operation can be resumed after turn-

ing off the nozzle missing detection

function.)

1. Check the parameter upload, Using state

and report the result to the development

department.

NCU I/F 01 1. Replace the dot detection PCB with a new

one.


E119 NCU NONE NCU is not connected

(at Version Up)




1. Make sure that the connection cables are

connected properly.

ERROR

120

ENVIRONMENT

TEMP(LO)

The ambient temperature

is outside the permissi-

ble temperature range

(too low).

Adjust the ambient temperature of the

printer.

To continue operation without chang-

ing the ambient conditions, press the

[ENTER] key.

Operation under the temperature among the

guaranteed operation temperature range is

recommended.

ERROR

121

ENVIRONMENT

TEMP(HI)

The ambient temperature

is outside the permissi-

ble temperature range

(too high).

ERROR

134

MEDIA

ENCODER: SEN-

SOR


detection by the media

encoder.

(Counting impossible)

Select NORMAL in [MediaFeed

SETUP] – [FEED METHOD]

Or turn the power OFF and turn the




1. Replace the media encoder with a new

one.


MEDIA

ENCODER:DIR.



encoder.

(Wrong orientation)

MEDIA

ENCODER: ORI-

GIN



encoder.

(Origin detection impos-

sible)


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-10


ERROR

135

MEDIA FEED

UNUSUAL


media feed.

1. Check that the media has been set

properly.

2. Using [SET UP] - [MediaFeed

SETUP] - [MOVEMENT TEST],

perform testing to see if the media is

compatible with direct feed.

If the state is not recovered with the

procedures above mentioned, execute

the followings.

• Select NORMAL in [SET UP] –

[MediaFeed SETUP] – [FEED

METHOD]

• Turn the power OFF and turn the




←

ERROR

142

INK LEAK Ink leakage was

detected.





1. Make sure that there is no ink leaking both

insides of bear and the station.

2. Check that the INK LEAK sensor works

properly with #TEST>SENSOR TEST.

3. Wipe off stains on the ink leak sensor

PCB.

ERROR

143

CARTRIDGE

SOLENOID


the ink cartridge valve

solenoid was detected.





1. Replace the ink unit PCB with a new one.

WASH CART.

SOLENOID


the cleaning cartridge

valve solenoid was

detected.


ERROR

144

CARTRIDGE SET

!

An ink cartrdge is not

set.

Set an ink cartridge. It is explained that leaving a state without set-

ting a cartridge may cause inability of ink

sucking because needles of the slot are dehy-

drated.

ERROR COM-

MAND

(This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifica-

tions, cable length and so on)

ERROR PARAM-

ETER

(This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data cor-

respond to version of the device.

ERROR DATA (This error does not occur on site.) Confirm the IF (USB/1394) cable. (specifica-

tions, cable length and so on)

ERR PRM.

SHORTAGE

(This error does not occur on site.) Make sure that PRM file, parameter data cor-

respond to version of the device.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-11


ERROR

160

NCU DETECT 00 NCU detection error

occurred.

(Improper parameter

value)

Printing can be resumed after turning

off the nozzle missing detection func-

tion.

Turn on the nozzle missing detection

function again before starting to print

the next and subsequent print files.



vice.

There is a nozzle row that can not discharge

ink. Identify the row with the test drawing

and conduct cleaning of the row.


occurred.

(Improper parameter

value)

Check the parameter upload, Using state and

report the result to the development depart-

ment.


occurred.

(FPGA error)






one.



occurred.

(Reference position

judgment)

Printing can be resumed after turning

off the nozzle missing detection func-

tion.

Turn on the nozzle missing detection

function again before starting to print

the next and subsequent print files.



vice.

1. Make sure that the Flushing fan works

properly.

2. Replace the flushing box with a new one.


occurred.

(Reference position

judgment)

Dust adhered around the head may cause the

NCU detection error. In such a case, instruct

the operator to clean around the head fre-

quently.

ERROR

161

NCU

EXCHANGE

LD consumption cur-

rent is close to the

threshold value.

Prolonged use is allowed.


your local distributer to call for service.

1. Replace the nozzle detection sensor with a

new one.

NCU CONSUMP-

TION

LD consumption current

is not below the thresh-

old value.





* Operation can be resumed after turn-

ing off the nozzle missing detection

function.

ERROR

162

NCU LINE

VOLTAGE

Power supply voltage

error.





* Operation can be resumed after

turning off the nozzle missing

detection function.


new one.


one.

ERROR

163

NCU SENSOR Sensor detection level

dropped.

Prolonged use is allowed.


your local distributer to call for service.

1. Clean a lens cover of the nozzle detection

sensor.


new one.


one.

NCU SENSOR

DETECT

Sensor detection error. Turn the power OFF and turn the






detection function.

ERROR

164

NCU FPGA

ERROR

FPGA configuration

failure.







detection function.

1. Replace the nozzle sensor with a new one.


one.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-12


ERROR

200

HEAD MEMORY

(----)


head unit memory.





1. Check the head memory cable, head relay

PCB.

2. Replace the head memory with a new one.


4. Replace the HDC PCB in slot 1 with anew

one.

ERROR

201

BACKUP MEM-

ORY


backup memory.






ERROR

202

DEVICE CON-

STRUCTION

The system configura-

tion is not supported by

the model judgment at

system start.

Contact your local distributor to call

for service.

* Press the [ENTER] key to display

the details of the error.

* Press the [ENTER] key again to

enable the system to be started after

changing the configuration to a

supported one.

1. Identify a place where the error occurs

with [RESULTof DIAGNOSIS].

ERROR

203

SDRAM SIZE SD-RAM with a size

large enough for the

printer has not been

mounted.





* When there is available SD-RAM

mounted, the printer can be started

without expanding SD-RAM.

However, printing speed may drop

depending on the resolution.

1. Make sure that 2 memory PCB are placed.



ERROR

210

INTERLOCK

SENSOR

A short circuit of the

interlock cable was

detected.





Short-circuit of one of the following cable.

Replace the corresponding cable with a new

one.

• Front cover sensor R cable

(Keyboard)

• Maintenance cover sensor cable

(Keyboard)

• Cover sensor L cable

(Ink unit PCB)

ERROR

211

HeaterTEMP

(--/--/--)

An abnormal tempera-

ture of the media heater

is detected.






2. Replace the corresponding SSR with a

new one.

HeadWARM.

TEMP. (----)

An abnormal tempera-

ture of the head heater

was detected.


2. Replace the corresponding head heater

with a new one.

HeadWARM.

BREAK(----)

The head heater is dis-

connected.

HeadWARM.

THERM(----)

Trouble has occurred

with the thermistor of

the head heater.

ERROR

212

WASTE INKtank

SENSOR

An error in the sensor

for the waste ink tank

was detected.





1. Check the state with sensor test.

2. Make sure that the direction of waste ink

tank is correct,

3. Replace the sensor with a new one.



Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-13


ERROR

250

Y COORDI-

NATES

An error was detected

during scanning opera-

tion.





1. Make sure that the position of media is

correct.

2. make sure that there is no bend on the

Paper width sensor.

3. When the state is not recovered, check

parameter upload and using state, and

report the result to the development

department.

ERROR

251

SYSTEM ERROR A system error occurred. Turn the power OFF and turn the




1. Confirm the error with memory check

(Main.SRAM, Main.FROM).

2. When the state is not recovered, check

parameter upload and using state, and

report the result to the development

department.


Display

Cause


ERROR

No.ERROR



4-14


4-2-2. Warning messages and corrective measures

<Warning messages and corrective measures >

Display Cause




Close a cover.

An open cover was detected. Check the front cover and maintenance

covers.


again even after closing all the covers,

contact your local distributor to call for

service.

1. Make sure that the cover sensor works

properly with #TEST>SENSOR

TEST cover sensor.

2. Make sure that the toggle pushes the

lever of the cover sensor firmly.

3. Make sure that the cables are con-

nected properly.

4. Replace the cover sensor with a new

one.

** NO MEDIA **

No media was detected. Set media. 1. Check that the paper sensor R works

properly with #TEST>SENSOR

TEST.

2. Make sure that connection of the

cables is correct.

3. Replace the paper sensor R with a new

one.

!EXCHANGE BAT-

TERY

The battery of RTC has run

down.


for service.

1. Replace the battery with a new one

having the same model number.

L.1> [JV5-01]

!Replace a WIPER

Time to replace the wiper in

the capping station with a new

one has come.

(The wiping count has reached

the specified value.)

Replace the wiper with a new one.

* Execute [ST.MAINTENANCE] -

[WIPER EXCHANGE].

1. Make sure that wiper replacement is

conducted with MAINTE-

NANCE>ST.MAINTENANCE.

L.1> [JV5-01]

!Do TEST DRAW

The nozzle recovery cannot be

expected because the printer

has been left standing for a

prolonged period of time.

Perform test printing. If nozzle missing

is serious, execute [ST.MAINTE-

NANCE] - [NOZZLE WASH] for

maintenance.

←

Heater Power OFF

The power to the heaters is off. Turn on the power to the heaters.


again even after turning on the power

to the heaters, contact your local dis-

tributor to call for service.

1. Check that the heaters work properly

with #TEST>HEATER TEST.

PRE PRT AFT

BREAK **°C **°C

A heater is disconnected.

(This example shows that pre-

heater is disconnected.)


for service.



2. Make sure that fuse of heater PCB is

not blown out.

3. Replace the SSR or IO PCB with a

new one.

PRE PRT AFT

THERM **°C **°C

The thermistor of a heater is

defective.

(This example shows that the

thermistor of pre-heater is

defective.)


for service.



2. Make sure that connection of cables is

correct.


L.*> !NC [JV5-01] There is a problem with the

NCU.

On the NCU>COND.INDICATION

display, check the current error in the

NCU.

←R.*> !NC [JV5-01]

*Media can't be CUT*The heads are positioned too

high to permit media cutting.

Cut the media by manual operation.←

4-15


L.*> [JV5-01]

NEAR END MCYK----

Ink for one supply path has

been nearly used up.

Replace the cartridge for the supply

path corresponding to the indicated

color.

* Printing is permitted without

replacing the cartridge (until INK

END is displayed). However, the

printer returns to local mode every

completion of printing one file.

←R.*> [JV5-01]

NEAR END MCYK----

L.*> [JV5-01]

INK END ----KYCM

Ink for one supply path has

been completely used up.

Replace the cartridge for the supply

path corresponding to the indicated

color. ←R.*> [JV5-01]

INK END ----KYCM

L.*> !CAR [JV5-01] There is a problem with

installed ink cartridges.

(If this occurs together with

any other warning, the display

shows [L.*> !CAR/TNK/

WSH/NC instead of [JV5-**].)

Check the content of the warning by

displaying it using the guidance func-

tion.←

R.*> !CAR [JV5-01]

L.*> !TNK [JV5-01] There is a problem with the

waste ink tank.





Check that the waste ink tank has been

installed and it is not full.

←R.*> !TNK [JV5-01]

L.*> !WSH [JV5-01] There is a problem with the

installed cleaning solution car-

tridge.





Check that the cleaning solution car-

tridge has been set properly.

←R.*> !WSH [JV5-01]

INK NEAR END

MMCC ---- ---- ----

The ink of the ink cartridge has

been nearly used up.

Replace the cartridge generating the

warning with a new one.

If the error occurs frequently after

replacing cartridges or when the car-

tridge has sufficient ink, execute the fol-

lowings.

1. Check that the cartridge end sensor

works properly with #TEST>INK

CARTRIDGE.

2. Check the end board of the cartridge.

3. .Replace the sensor with a new one.

INK END

---- YYKK ---- ----

The ink of the ink cartridge has

been completely used up.






lowings.

1. Check the end board of the cartridge.

2. Replace the sensor with a new one.

NON-ORIGINAL INK

---- ---- KKYY ----

The ink cartridge is not

MIMAKI genuin.

Or, the ink IC chip can not be

read.

Replace the warned cartridge with a

MIMAKI genuine one, or insert the

cartridge again.




lowings.

1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CAR-

TRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is per-

formed properly.

2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB

with a new one.

<Warning messages and corrective measures (continued) >

Display Cause




4-16


WRONG INK IC

---- ---- ---- CCMM

The IC chip of the ink cartridge

cannot be read normally.

Remove the cartridge generating the

warning once and install it again.

If the same warning message still

appears, contact your local distributor

to call for service.




lowings.

1. Make sure that #TEST>INK CAR-

TRIDGE>INK-IC CHECK is per-

formed properly.

2. Replace the ID point of contact PCB

with a new one.

Kind of INK

---- ---- ---- ----

The ink of the ink cartridge is

different in type from the ink

currently supplied.

Check the ink type of the cartridge

generating the warning. ←

Color of INK

---- ---- ---- ----

The ink of the ink cartridge is

different in color from the ink

currently supplied.

Check the ink color of the cartridge

generating the warning. ←

WRONG CARTRIDGE

---- ---- ---- ----

There is trouble with an

installed ink cartridge.

Check the cartridge generating the

warning.←

NO CARTRIDGE

---- ---- ---- ----

An ink cartridge has not been

installed in the slot.

Install an appropriate cartridge in the

slot generating the warning.If the error occurs frequently after

replacing cartridges, execute the follow-

ings.

1. Check that the cartridge exist/non-

exist sensor works properly with

#TEST>INK CARTRIDGE.

2. If it does not work properly, replace

the sensor or IO PCB with a new one.

Expiration

---- ---- ---- ----

The specified expiration date

of an ink cartridge has passed.



* The cartridge may be used until one

month passes after the specified

expiration date.

←

Expiration:1MONTH

---- ---- ---- ----

The expiration date of an ink

cartridge has passed (one

month has passed after the

specified expiration date).

The red LED blinks.



* The cartridge may be used until two

months pass after the specified

expiration date.

←

Expiration:2MONTH

---- ---- ---- ----

The expiration date of an ink

cartridge has passed (two

months have passed after the

specified expiration date).


warning with a new one.←

INK REMAIN ZERO

---- ---- ---- ----

Remaining amount of ink in an

ink cartridge is zero.


warning with a new one.←

!WasteTANK

FULL/NONE

The waste ink tank is full or

has not been installed.

Install a waste ink tank or replace with

a new one.

1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is

installed properly.

2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor

works properly with #TEST>SEN-

SOR TEST.



!NearFULL WASTE

TANK

The waste ink tank is nearly

full.

Replace the waste ink tank with a new

one.

1. Make sure that the waste ink tank is

installed properly.

2. Check that the waste ink tank sensor

works properly with #TEST>SEN-

SOR TEST.

If it does not work properly, replace the

sensor or IO PCB with a new one.


Display Cause




4-17


!Wash Liquid END

The cleaning liquid cartridge is

empty.

Replace the cleaning solution cartridge

with a new one.

1. Check that the cartridge end sensor

works properly with #TEST>WASH

CARTRIDGE.



!WashLiquidCart.NONE

The cleaning liquid cartridge

has not been installed.

Install the cleaning solution cartridge. 1. Check that the cartridge exist/non-

exist sensor works properly with

#TEST>WASH CARTRIDGE.



!WRONG WASH CART.There is trouble with cleaning

liquid cartridge.

Check the cleaning solution cartridge.←

** Washing liquid **

** un-filling up. **

Cleaning solution has not been

supplied.

Supply the cleaning solution.

Execute [MAINTENANCE] -

[HD.MAINTENANCE] - [FILL UP

INK].

←


Display Cause




4-18

CHAPTER 5 Explanation of Electrical Parts

5-1

Contents

5-1. Outline ......................................................................... 5-2

5-1-1. Operation Explanation ............................................. 5-3

5-1-2. Power Supply ........................................................... 5-4

5-2. Circuit Board Specifications ...................................... 5-5

5-2-1. Main PCB ................................................................ 5-5

5-2-2. USB Board ............................................................... 5-6

5-2-3. I/F Connection Board .............................................. 5-6

5-2-4. HDC PCB ................................................................ 5-7

5-2-5. IO PCB ..................................................................... 5-7

5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB ........................................................... 5-8

5-2-7. Slider PCB ............................................................... 5-9

5-2-8. Heater PCB ............................................................ 5-10

5-2-9. Keyboard PCB ....................................................... 5-10

5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB ................................................ 5-11

5-2-11. Encoder PCB ......................................................... 5-11

5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB ....................................... 5-11

5-2-13. Take-up PCB .......................................................... 5-11

5-2-14. Box Relay PCB ...................................................... 5-12

5-2-15. Side relay PCB ....................................................... 5-12

5-2-16. Head relay PCB ..................................................... 5-13

5-2-17. Head memory PCB ................................................ 5-13

5-2-18. LED PCB ............................................................... 5-13

5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB ............................................. 5-13

5-2-20. Memory PCB ......................................................... 5-13

5-3. Electronic block diagram ......................................... 5-14


5-1. Outline

JV5-130S/160S is provided with the circuit boards shown below.

Fig.5-1


5-2-1. Main PCB p.5-5 5-2-11. Encoder PCB p.5-11

5-2-2. USB Board p.5-6 5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB p.5-11

5-2-3. I/F Connection Board p.5-6 5-2-13. Take-up PCB p.5-11

5-2-4. HDC PCB p.5-7 5-2-14. Box Relay PCB p.5-12

5-2-5. IO PCB p.5-7 5-2-15. Side relay PCB p.5-12

5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB p.5-8 5-2-16. Head relay PCB p.5-13

5-2-7. Slider PCB p.5-9 5-2-17. Head memory PCB p.5-13

5-2-8. Heater PCB p.5-10 5-2-18. LED PCB p.5-13

5-2-9. Keyboard PCB p.5-10 5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB p.5-13

5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB p.5-11 5-2-20. Memory PCB p.5-13

~ Head Assy ~

ID point of contackt PCB(Wash Cartridge)

~ Left ~ Ink Unit PCB

LED PCB (x2)

Heater PCB

Drying fan fork PCB (x2)

Slider PCB

Head relay PCB (x4)

Keyboard PCB

Side relay PCB

IO PCB

USB BoardMain PCB

Take-up PCB

I/F Connection Board

HDC PCB (x4)

Power Supply PCB

Dot Detection PCB

ID point of contackt PCB (x16)

Box Relay PCB

Memory PCB (x2)

Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Head memory PCB (x4)

Paper Width Sensor PCB

Encoder PCB

Encoder PCB

Encoder PCB

5-2

Outline

5-1-1. Operation Explanation

The slider of JV5-130S/160S consists of four heads arranged staggered from each other, each of which

has nozzles arranged in eight rows, 180 nozzles (at 180-dpi intervals) per row.

Ink is ejected from the ink chamber by vibrating the piezoelectric elements of the heads. For this

vibration waveform, the printer uses variable waveform which can permit 4-step expressions (L, M, S

and none).

The heads are driven by the HDC PCB that are provided for the heads, respectively. The four HDC

PCB are connected to the main PCB in the electrical circuit box. One HDC PCB, which drives one

head, generates the drive signal (COM waveform) that is applied in common to all the piezoelectric

elements of one row of nozzles. The drive signal is generated for the eight rows of nozzles.

FPGA (HDC) is mounted on each HDC PCB. Each FPGA (HDC) applies the COM waveform in

synchronization with the scale interval of the linear scale and simultaneously sends the nozzle data to

the head. By adjusting the time for applying the COM waveform for each head, the print position in

the Y direction can be adjusted within the range of one dot. In addition, ink discharging performance is

different from head to head. Therefore, the COM waveform is automatically corrected based on the

registered head ID or the ID registered on the head memory, other information and the detected

ambient temperature. (There may be a case where no ink is ejected if the head ID is not registered

correctly.)

The main PCB has FPGA (PDC), which takes charge of image processing and controls the SDRAM

picture memory (PRAM). The PRAM is mounted on the memory PCB. One memory PCB has a

capacity of 512 MB and the printer permits mounting of a maximum of four memory PCB (2 GB). Of

the data output from the host PC, the command part is analyzed by the CPU and the image part is

transferred to the memory. The PRAM is a ring memory and when data for one scanning session has

been accumulated, the heads start scanning. One scanning session forms an image only in 180 dpi

(eight or six colors) or in 360 dpi four colors) in the X direction. Therefore, the printer completes the

image in the targeted resolution while feeding the media by a required distance.

JV5 has many devices (stepping motors and sensors) that require communication with the main PCB.

However, the routing of the wires and the replacement of the main PCB would be difficult if such

devices are all connected to the main PCB directly. To avoid such difficulty, the printer is equipped

with the IO PCB and ink unit PCB, which use serial communication with the main PCB, thus reducing

the number of signals. The signals are processed by the FPGA (PDC) mounted on the main PCB.

The missing nozzle detection unit (NCU) consists of the unit that emits a laser beam and detects an ink

drop and the dot detection PCB, which analyzes the data. By emitting a laser beam at an angle and at

fixed intervals, missing nozzles can be detected during printing.

Fig.5-2

Nozzle Arrangement of Head (Rear View)

Scanning direction

HEAD

Paper feeding direction

5-3


5-1-2. Power Supply

Board name: Power supply PCB assembly (E300428)

The input value and output values of power supply are as follows:

Note: Take care that the input specification for JV-5 is AC200V-AC240V thoug the input specification for the power PCB is

AC100V-AC240V.

Note: Adjust to be 5% of power voltage.

Input AC100V - AC240V, 50/60Hz

Output +3.3V, 5.6 A

+5V, 15.5 A

+24V, 10.0 A

+42V, 10.5 A

+5VSB, 3.5 A

<Connector pin assignment table and volume numbers>

PIN Voltage PIN Voltage

1 +42V 13 +42V

2 +42V 14 +42V

3 +24V 15 +24V

4 +24V 16 GND

5 GND 17 GND

6 GND 18 GND

7 GND 19 GND

8 GND 20 GND

9 GND 21 GND

10 GND 22 +5V

11 +5V 23 +5V

12 +3.3V 24 +3.3V

<Volume No.>

Voltage Volume No.

+42V VR4

+24V VR1

+5V VR2

+3.3V VR3

<Auxiliary power connector>

PIN Voltage

1 +5VSB

2 GND

3 Remote control input

5-4

Circuit Board Specifications

5-2. Circuit Board Specifications

5-2-1. Main PCB

Board name: Main PCB assembly (E104082)

The CPU is SH-3 (RISC, 200MHz) made by Hitachi.

A program for the CPU is written in flash memory. Version up of this program is easily executed on

site through I/F.

The CPU downloads the version up to PRAM to execute writing in the flash memory.

When receive data is read, The CPU write the data in picture memory. After execution of required

processes, the data is transmitted to the HDC PCB with 8 bit width.

Receiving the data, the HDC creates driving COM signals for head 1 ~ 4 and nozzle data, and

transmits each data to the slider PCB via HDC FPC cable.

X, Y-axis motor driving circuit and other IO circuits are also included.

<Block diagram around main PCB>

Fig.5-3

5-5


Main PCB Connector Signals

* As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.

5-2-2. USB Board

Board name: USB PCB assembly (E103711)

USB PCB or 1394 board can be connected. Each of them has a CPU on I/F board and program is

written in flash memory of the CPU. Therefore, version up of the I/F-CPU is conducted with

download from the host computer. This board supports the duplex.

5-2-3. I/F Connection Board

Board name: I/F connection board assembly (E103701)

The main PCB and I/F board are connected together.

<Main PCB connector signals>

CN No Pin Connected to: Silk display Notice

CN1 6 X-axis motor encoder X-ENC Color: Black

CN2 5 Y-axis motor encoder Y-ENC

CN3 3 X-axis motor X-MOT Color: Black

CN4 2 Y-axis motor Y-MOT

CN5 32 Keyboard PCB KEY

CN6 20 Dot detection PCB DOT

CN7 10 Option heater HEATER

CN8 28 Ink unit PCB INKUNIT

CN9 6 Media rotary encoder M-ENC

CN10 4 F/W debug F/W Not used

CN11 64 HDC PCB 1 HDC1




CN15 72 SDRAM memory 1 SDRAM1

CN16 72 SDRAM memory 2 SDRAM2

CN17 72 SDRAM memory 3 SDRAM3 Not used

CN18 72 SDRAM memory 4 SDRAM4 Not used

CN19 80 USB/1394I/F

CN20 24 Main power source POWER Main power

CN21 3 Main power source SUB-POW Sub-power

CN22 4 IO PCB IO-POW IO power

CN23 38 IO PCB IO IO signal

CN24 10 Auxiliary SUB Not used

CN25 100 Debug board Not used

CN26 8 G/A debug G/A Not used

5-6


5-2-4. HDC PCB

Board name: HDC PCB protection panel assembly (E104537)

A board to generate driving signals for head. One HDC can drive 1 head.

In order to remove heat generated at creating COM wave form, a cooling fan is used.

Installed to be vertical to the main PCB.

HDC PCB connector signals

5-2-5. IO PCB

Board name: I/O PCB assembly (E104085)

Controlling I/O of sensors, stepping motors and fans.

IO PCB Connector Signals

Note: As for arrangement of each pin, see the tables below.

<HDC PCB connector signals>

CN No Pin Connect to: Silk display Notice

CN1 40 Slider PCB

CN2 40 Slider PCB

CN3 40 Slider PCB

CN4 40 Slider PCB

CN5 64 Main PCB

CN6 2 Thermistor 1 Not used

CN7 2 Thermistor 2 Not used

< IO PCB connector signals>


CN1 38 Main PCB MAIN BOARD

CN2 6 For CPLD Not used

CN3 4 Main PCB POW

CN4 30 Harness (Take-up, unreel) WIND/FEED

CN5 2 AUX. AD1 Not used


CN7 3 Paper sensor F F-PAPER Not used

CN8 28 Harness (Station) Harness1 Station harness

CN9 3 Cross paper sensor A-PAPER Color: Blue

CN10 3 AUX. Input 1 Not used

CN12 18 Side relay PCB SideRelay Board Color: Yellow

CN13 26 Box relay PCB BoxRelayBoard 1 Color: Red

CN14 12 Harness (SSR, HDC cooling fan) Harness 2 Color: Blue

CN15 16 Box relay PCB BoxRelayBoard 2 Color: Black

CN16 6 AUX. SSR Not used



5-7


5-2-6. Ink Unit PCB

Board name: Ink unit PCB assembly (E104086)

Arranged rear face of the ink cartridge.

Solenoid, ID, near end sensor, existence sensor and LED PCB and cover sensor of 16 ink cartridges

are connected. The main PCB is connected to with a cable.

Ink Unit PCB Connector Signals

<Ink unit PCB connector signals>


CN1 6 LED PCB LED BOARD

CN2 28 Main PCB MAIN BOARD

CN3 6 CPLD Not used

CN4 7 Cover sensor COVER

CN6 8 LED1~4 (1)

CN7 8 LED5~8 (2)

CN8 8 LED9~12 (3)

CN9 8 LED13~16 (4)

CN10 4 Ink cartridge 1 (1)
















CN26 3 AUX. IN1 Not used

CN27 3 AUX. IN2 Not used

CN28 2 Ink solenoid 1 (1)
















5-8


5-2-7. Slider PCB

Board name: Slider PCB assembly (E104591)

Arranged in the head cover.

FFC from HDC is connected to relay signals to head. I/O and encoder PCB of each paper width sensor,

cutter solenoid are also connected.

Slider PCB Connector Signals

<Slider PCB connector signals>


CN1 3 Cap height sensor Cap HIGH Color: Red

CN2 3 Jam sensor 1 JAM1 Color: Blue

CN3 3 Jam sensor 2 JAM2 Color: Yellow (Not used)

CN4 4 Paper width sensor PAPER E.G Color: Black

CN5 4 Registry guide sensor TOMBO Color: White (Not used)

CN6 40 HDC PCB 1 (CN1)












CN18 80 Head relay PCB HEAD1




CN22 5 Linear encoder L-ENC Color: Red

CN23 5 Cutter solenoid CUT-ENC Color: Yellow

CN24 5 Position encoder POS-ENC Color: Blue

CN25 2 AUX. 1 SUB1 Color: White (Not used)

CN26 2 Cutter solenoid P-CUTTER Color: Green

CN27 2 Blow off fan 2 FAN2 Color: Orange (Not used)



CN30 2 Blow off fan 1 FAN1 Color: Orange (Not used)

CN31 2 LED LED Color: Red (Not used)


CN33 2 Driller solenoid Color: Gray (Not used)

CN34 2 AUX. 5 Color: White (Not Used)

5-9


5-2-8. Heater PCB

Board name: Heater PCB assembly (E104043)

Arranged in the electric equipments.

Power from AC power source is relayed to each heater.

Heater PCB Connector Signals

5-2-9. Keyboard PCB

Board name: Keyboard PCB assembly (E104089)

Comprising 2 of 20 characters x 2 lines LCD and key switches for each, connected to the main PCB

with a keyboard cable.

Keyboard PCB Connector Signals

<Heater PCB connector signals>


CN1 3 Power plug (Inlet) POW

CN2 3 Power supply PCB BOARD Not used

CN3 4 SSR (Print) SSR-P Color: Blue

CN4 4 SSR (Pre) SSR-R Color: Red

CN5 4 SSR (After) SSR-A Color: Yellow

CN6 4 Thermostat (Print) TMS-P Color: Blue

CN7 4 Thermostat (Pre) TMS-R Color: Red

CN8 4 Thermostat (After) TMS-A Color: Yellow

CN9 3 Wire heater -1 (1) Color: Blue




CN13 3 Wire heater -5 (5) Color: Blue (Not used)

CN14 3 Wire heater -6 (6) Color: Blue (Not used)

CN15 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-1 (1) Color: Red

CN16 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R1-2 (2) Color: Red

CN17 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-1 (3) Color: Red (Not used)

CN18 3 Pre aluminum foil heater R2-2 (4) Color: Red (Not used)

CN19 3 After aluminum foil heater A1-1 (1) Color: Yellow




<Keyboard PCB connector signals>


CN3 32 Main PCB

CN4 3 Front cover sensor R

CN5 4 Remote switch

CN6 3 Maintenance cover sensor Color: Black

5-10


5-2-10. Dot Detection PCB

Board name: Dot detection PCB assembly (E104091)

Arranged on back side of the keyboard cover.

Connected to the nozzle check unit (NCU) to detect nozzle missing and communicates with the main

PCB in serial.

Dot detection PCB Connector Signals


5-2-11. Encoder PCB

Board name: Encoder PCB assembly (E103961)

There are total 3 boards, namely a board for linear scale placed behind the slider, a board for head up/

down placed in the left side of the slider, and a board for paper thickness detection placed near the

cutter solenoid.

5-2-12. Paper Width Sensor PCB

Board name: Paper width sensor PCB assembly (E103960)

Placed near the cutter solenoid, and including a sensor for paper width detection.

5-2-13. Take-up PCB

Board name: Take-up PCB assembly (E104087)

Placed in the take-up device. M motor and Take-up switch are connected. Serial communication is

conducted with the IO PCB to control.

Take-up PCB Connector Signals


<Dot detection PCB connector signals>


CN1 100 Debug board Not used

CN2 9 NCU to NCU

CN3 8 AUX. power source Not used

CN4 20 Main PCB to MAIN

<Take-up PCB connector signals>


CN1 6 For CPLD Not used

CN2 16 IO PCB IO

CN3 3 SEN1 Not used

CN4 3 SEN2 Not used

CN5 4 STEP Not used

CN6 6 Take-up switch M-SW

CN7 2 Not used

CN8 5 L-ENC Not used

CN9 9 M motor MOT

CN10 3 Not used

5-11


5-2-14. Box Relay PCB

Board name: Box relay PCB assembly (E104351)

Relaying the connection between pump motor, FAN etc. and the IO PCB. Placed in the electric

equipment box in the front.

Box relay PCB Connector Signals

5-2-15. Side relay PCB

Board name: Side relay PCB assembly (E104352)

Relaying connection between the solenoid, sensors etc. and the IO PCB. Placed on the right side face

viewing from the front.

Side Relay PCB Connector Signals

<Box relay PCB connector signals>


CN1 26 IO PCB to IO

CN2 16 IO PCB to IO

CN3 9 Pump 1, 2 PUMP 1,2 Color: Black

CN4 8 Pump 3, 4 PUMP 3,4

CN5 4 Drying fan EXH-F2

CN6 8 Exhaust fan EXH-F3

CN7 2 Flushing box fan FB-FAN

CN8 14 Adsorption fan, Thermistor FAN

CN9 7 Wiper sensor, Solenoid WIPE

CN10 6 Waste tank sensor TANK

<Side relay PCB connector signals>


CN1 18 IO PCB to IO

CN2 2 Cap valve solenoid CAP-SOL Color: Black

CN3 4 Head up/down motor HEAD-M

CN4 3 Y origin sensor Y-HOME

CN5 2 ID point of contact PCB WASH-ID

CN6 2 Cartridge solenoid WASH-SOL

CN7 4 Detection machine assembly I/C, Y WASH-CAT

CN8 2 Motor cooling fan M-FAN Not used

CN9 3 Ink leak sensor 1 ST-LEAK

CN10 3 Ink leak sensor 2 Y-LEAK1

CN11 3 Ink leak sensor 3 Y-LEAK2

5-12


5-2-16. Head relay PCB

Board name: Head relay PCB assembly (E104237)

Relaying connection between the slider PCB and the head FPC.

Head Relay PCB Connector Signals

5-2-17. Head memory PCB

Board name: Head memory PCB assembly (E104428)

Head ID information is stored. Assembled to be integrated into the head.

Head memory PCB connector signals

5-2-18. LED PCB

Board name: LED PCB assembly (E104088)

A control LED (green) and an error LED (Red) are equipped on each slot, and 2 LED PCBs are used.

LED PCB Connector Signals

5-2-19. Ink Leak Sensor PCB

Board name: Ink leak sensor PCB assembly (E104534)

Three of the board are used, namely, on both sides in the cable bear guide and on the cap in the station.

5-2-20. Memory PCB

Board name: Memory PCB assembly (E104090)

1 board has the capacity of 512 MB, and 2 boards are mounted on the main PCB.

<Head relay PCB connector signals>


CN1 35 Head FFC

CN2 31 Head FFC

CN4 80 Slider PCB

CN3 11 Head memory PCB

CN5 2 Head memory PCB Not used



<Head memory PCB connector signals>


CN1 3 Head warm thermistor

CN2 11 Head relay PCB

CN3 2 Head warm heater

CN4 2 Head warm heater

<LED PCB connector signals>


CN1 6 Ink unit PCB ENTER

CN2 6 LED PCB EXIT

5-13


5-3. Electronic block diagram

DC24V

DC5VBDC42V

DC 5VDC3.3V

CN1

CN22RED

CN34

N.C

N.C N.C

CN30CN27

CN18

CN2

CN2

CN3

CN23YELLOW

CN24BLUE

CN9: ID4

CN2 CN1 CN2 CN1

CN1

CN4

CN3REDCN1 CN4

BLACK

BLACK

CN26GREEN

CN2BLUE YELLOW

CN12

CN10

CN11

CN9

CN15

CN16

CN14

CN13

CN17

CN8: ID3

CN7: ID2

CN6: ID1

CN35: SOL8CN34: SOL7CN33: SOL6CN32: SOL5CN31: SOL4CN30: SOL3CN29: SOL2CN28: SOL1

CN38: SOL11

CN42: SOL15CN43: SOL16

CN41: SOL14CN40: SOL13CN39: SOL12

CN37: SOL10CN36: SOL9

CN2

CN26

CN3

(For CPLD)

N.C

WHITE

CN8

CN6

CN7

CN9

CN20

CN21

CN4

CN5

CN1

CN3CN5

CN4

CN6BLACK

CN5

WHITE

BLACK

BLACK

CN1

CN4

CN3

BLACK

BLACK

CN7RED

CN4 RED

CN3 BLUE

CN5 BLACK

CN1

CN16REDCN15RED

12

34

65

CN2

CN19

CN8

CN3CN2

CN4

CN1

CN2

CN4

CN3

CN1

CN1

CN4

CN3CN2

CN14

CN13

CN12

CN4

CN1

CN3CN2

CN11

CN10: INK1

CN16: INK7CN15: INK6CN14: INK5CN13: INK4CN12: INK3CN11: INK2

CN17: INK8

CN18: INK9CN19: INK10

CN24: INK15CN23: INK14CN22: INK13CN21: INK12CN20: INK11

CN25: INK16

CN1

CN19

CN2

CN2

CN3 CN1

CN20

CN2

CN2

CN3 CN1

CN21

CN2

CN2

CN3

CN6BLUE

CN12BLUE

CN11BLUE

CN10BLUE

CN9BLUE

CN21BLACK

CN22BLACK

CN8BLACK

CN20BLACK

CN19BLACK

CN32CN25

USB2.0

16 x 40- Conductor HDC FPCs

*After the number of lots, it absorbs it to the slider PCB.

USB PCB

Power Supply PCB

Slider PCB

INK UnitPCB

HDCPCB

3

HDCPCB

2

HDCPCB

4

HDCPCB

1

Heater PCB

IF ConnectionPCB

INK Cartridge(x16)

Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB Head Rekay PCB

INK HEAD 1 INK HEAD 3 INK HEAD 2 INK HEAD 4

5V PCB

Keyboard PCB

LED PCB LED PCB

ID Point ofContact PCB x4




Y-axisMotor

X-axisMotor

Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB Head Memory PCB

LinearEncoder

PCB

PaperWidth

Sensor

Cutter actuator

assy.

CutterEncoder

PCB

PositionEncoder

PCB

JAMSensor

BottomPoint

Sensor

Head Heater x2Thermistor




Front Cover Sensor R

Maintenance CoverSensor R

Media RotaryEncoder

Remote switch


Maintenance CoverSensor L

Presence /Near EndSensor x16

Solenoid Valve x 16

INK CartridgeSolenoid

Power SupplySocket

PowerSupplySwitch

SSR(Rear)

SSR(Print)

SSR(After)

Print Heater

ThermistorThermostat

Rear Heater


After Heater


RY1

5-14

Electronic block diagram

CN4CN6

CN2

CN23

CN22

CN18

CN7

CN3

CN1

CN2

CN10

CN7

CN3

CN4

CN8

CN6

CN5

CN9

2pinBLACK

2pinBLACK

4pinBLACK

3pin WHITE

CN7

CN2

CN8

CN5

CN3

CN6

CN1

CN9

CN4

CN10

CN11

CN8

CN12

CN15

CN7

CN9BLUE

CN5

2pin

BLACK

CN13

CN14

CN4

CN3BLACK

CN4

CN10

CN9

CN7

CN6

CN5

CN2

MD

4pin

MD8pin

3pin WHITE

CN1

Dsub15

Dsub9pin

Dsub15

CN1

CN26

CN3

CN5

CN10

CN25

CN1

CN2

CN17

CN16

CN15

CN8

2pin BLACK

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

N.C

SDRAMSlot 4 N.C

N.C

N.C

SDRAMSlot 3 N.C

SDRAMSlot 2

SDRAMSlot 1

To SSR x3

To RY1

To A Heater Thermistor

To P Heater Thermistor

To R Heater Thermistor

Reel Out IF

Steel Plate Relay

External Connector GroupSteel Plate

Station

Bear Guide (L/R)

(For DEBUG BOARD)

(For G/A)

(For single purpose

power supply)

(For DEBUG)

(For F/W RS)

(For DEBUG BOARD)

(For CPLD)

(For CPLD)

StationMotor

WiperMotor

Head U/DMotor

Take-upMotor

Pump Motor 1

Pump Motor 2

Pump Motor 3

Pump Motor 4

NCU

Bottom Point Sensor

Paper Sensor

Clamp Sensor

Presence Sensor &Near End Sensor

ID Point of ContacktPCB

Solenoid Valve

FB FAN

Origin Sensor

INK Leak Sensor PCB

INK Leak Sensor PCB

INK Leak Sensor PCB

Waste Tank Sensor 1

Waste Tank Sensor 2

Wiper Sensor

Wiper WashSolenoid

Dry Fan Assy

Exhaust Fan L Exhaust Fan R

HDCCooling Fan

Absorption Fan x3

Deodorization FAN x2

External Heater

Wind Roll SW ASSY(CW/CCW/OFF)

MainPCB

IO PCB

OPTION

OPTION

Dot DetectionPCB

Take-upPCB

Side RelayPCB

BOXRelayPCB

Drying FanFork PCB

Drying FanFork PCB

Wash Cartridge

MemoryPCB

(512MB)

MemoryPCB

(512MB)

5-15


5-16

A

A Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3-193Adjust Head Stagger ................................... 3-23Adjustment of the head angle ........................ 3-20Adjustment tools .......................................... 1-4

B

BasisHEADheight ...................................... 3-12Bottom Point Sensor ................................. 3-115BOX Relay PCB ........................................ 3-90Box Relay PCB .......................................... 5-12

C

Cap Base 1H ............................................. 3-38Cap Head assy. .......................................... 3-37Cap Sensor .............................................. 3-117Capping adjusting ....................................... 3-14Clamp Sensor .......................................... 3-113Cutter Unit Assy. ..................................... 3-189

D

Damper Assembly ...................................... 3-57Dot Detection PCB .......................... 3-96, 5-11Drop Position Correction ............................. 3-26Drying Fan Fork PCB ............................... 3-106

EElectronic block diagram ............................. 5-14Encoder PCB ............................................. 5-11Enter Head ID ........................................... 3-18

F

Filling of Ink ............................................. 3-19Front Cover Sensor L ................................ 3-147Front Cover Sensor R ................................ 3-149

H

HDC PCB ........................................ 3-77, 5-7Head memory PCB ..................................... 5-13Head Relay PCB ........................................ 3-81Head relay PCB ......................................... 5-13Head UD Motor ....................................... 3-184Head Unit ................................................... 3-7Head Up/Down Encoder ............................ 3-132Heater PCB .................................... 3-88, 5-10

II/F Connection Board .................................... 5-6ID Point of Contact PCB ............................ 3-101Ink Leak Sensor PCB .................................. 5-13Ink Leakage Sensor .................................. 3-153

Ink Unit PCB .................................... 3-98, 5-8IO PCB ........................................... 3-78, 5-7

J

Jam Sensor ............................................. 3-121

K

Keyboard PCB ................................ 3-92, 5-10

L

LED PCB ..................................... 3-103, 5-13

M

M Motor ................................................ 3-186Main PCB ........................................ 3-70, 5-5Maintenance Cover Sensor L ..................... 3-151Maintenance Cover Sensor R ..................... 3-152Major Parts for Cartridge Assembly .............. 3-42Media Rotary Encoder Assembly ................ 3-139Memory PCB ............................................ 5-13

O

Origin Sensor .......................................... 3-110

P

P Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3-198Paper Sensor ........................................... 3-136Paper Thickness Encoder .......................... 3-125Paper Width Sensor ................................. 3-119Paper Width Sensor PCB ............................ 5-11Power PCB .............................................. 3-85Power Supply ............................................. 5-4Pump Motor Assembly ............................... 3-35

R

R Heater Cover Assy. ............................... 3-204

SS Pump Assembly ...................................... 3-33Side Relay PCB ........................................ 3-99Side relay PCB .......................................... 5-12Slider PCB ....................................... 3-82, 5-9Specifications of the main unit ....................... 1-5SSR ...................................................... 3-209Station Motor .......................................... 3-182Sucker BOX ............................................. 3-61

T

Take-up PCB ................................ 3-105, 5-11Tools to be used at disassembly and reassembly 1-4

1


U

USB Board ................................................. 5-6USB PCB ................................................. 3-79

W

Wash Cartridge Assembly ........................... 3-51Waste Tank Sensor ................................... 3-158Wiper Motor ........................................... 3-179Wiper Sensor .......................................... 3-112Wiper Wash Solenoid ............................... 3-206

X

X Belt .................................................... 3-165X Pulley ................................................. 3-165X-axis Motor Assembly ............................ 3-162

Y

Y Drive Belt ........................................... 3-175Y Drive Pulley Assembly .......................... 3-171Y Encoder .............................................. 3-129Y-axis Motor Assembly ............................ 3-167Y-Drive Transmission Belt ........................ 3-171

2

D500306-2.00-29092006

© MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD. 2006

IGTM

FW1.20